sjc building services renovation & … management and coordination 01 31 00 - 1 sjc building...

PROJECT TITLE PAGE 00 01 01 - 1

SJC BUILDING SERVICES RENOVATION & REMODELING ARCHITECT'S PROJECT #15056 ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

DOCUMENT 00 01 01 - PROJECT TITLE PAGE

1.1 PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 1

A. Project Title: St Johns County Building Services Renovation & Remodeling.

B. Owner: St. Johns County.

C. Owner’s Address: 4040 Lewis Speedway, St. Augustine, FL 32084.

D. Owner’s Bid No. 16-55.

E. Architect’s Project No. 15056.

F. Architect: Ebert Norman Brady Architects.

G. Architect’s Address: 1361 13th Ave. S., Suite 230, Jacksonville Beach, FL 32250

H. Architect’s Phone: 904-241-9997.

I. Architect’s Web Site: www.enbarchitects.com

J. Copyright (2016 ENB Architects). All rights reserved.

END OF DOCUMENT 00 01 01

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY

LEFT BLANK FOR PRINTING

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1


SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. RFIs. 4. Digital project management procedures. 5. Project meetings.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request for Information. Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and in prominent location in built facility. Keep list current at all times.

1.4 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.



1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely indicated on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.

b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to coordination drawings in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.

c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.

e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.

f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear

to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternative sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:



1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within plenums to accommodate layout of light fixtures and other components indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of

embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.

6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:

a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.

b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.

c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.

7. Electrical Work: Show the following:

a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger. b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-

alarm locations. c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and

motor-control center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.

8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:

a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.

9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that in general the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make suitable modifications and resubmit.

C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements:

1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings.

2. File Preparation Format: DWG, Version 2014, operating in Microsoft Windows operating system.

3. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using PDF format. 4. Upon written request, Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of

Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files.



a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings.

b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in AutoCAD 2014 format. c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of an Agreement

form acceptable to Owner and Architect.

1.6 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information, clarification, or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return without response those RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in PDF format.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow ten working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.



d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.

e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt by Architect of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to construction contract between the Contractor and St. Johns County.

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within seven days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log twice monthly. Use CSI Log form 13.2B. Include the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate. 9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as

appropriate.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1.7 DIGITAL PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES

A. Use of Architect's Digital Data Files: Digital data files of Architect's CAD drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use during construction. Not all digital data files will be provided. Contractor must submit a request in writing for the specific drawing sheets that are needed.

1. Digital data files may be used by Contractor in preparing coordination drawings, Shop Drawings, and Project record Drawings.

2. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Contract Drawings.

3. Digital Drawing Software Program: Contract Drawings are available in AutoCAD 2014. 4. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of an Agreement form

acceptable to Owner and Architect. 5. The following digital data files will be furnished for each appropriate discipline:

a. Floor plans. b. Reflected ceiling plans.



B. PDF Document Preparation: Where PDFs are required to be submitted to Architect, prepare as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 3. Certifications: Where digitally submitted certificates and certifications are required,

provide a digital signature with digital certificate on where indicated.

1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times a minimum of 10 working days prior to meeting.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and

agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Owner will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect..

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Responsibilities and personnel assignments. b. Tentative construction schedule. c. Phasing. d. Critical work sequencing and long lead items. e. Designation of key personnel and their duties. f. Lines of communications. g. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. h. Procedures for RFIs. i. Procedures for testing and inspecting. j. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. k. Distribution of the Contract Documents. l. Submittal procedures. m. Preparation of Record Documents. n. Use of the premises and existing building. o. Work restrictions. p. Working hours. q. Owner's occupancy requirements. r. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. s. Procedures for moisture and mold control. t. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. u. Construction waste management and recycling. v. Parking availability.



w. Office, work, and storage areas. x. Equipment deliveries and priorities. y. First aid. z. Security. aa. Progress cleaning.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity when required by other sections and when required for coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect, and Owner's Commissioning Authority of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.



D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 45 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:

a. Preparation of Record Documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final

inspection for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. f. Requirements for demonstration and training. g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and

for final payment. i. Submittal procedures. j. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. k. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. l. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations.



3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site use. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of Proposal Requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01 31 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1


SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Submittal schedule requirements. 2. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting coordination drawings and subcontract list.

2. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.

3. Section 01 32 33 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting preconstruction photographs, periodic construction photographs, and final completion construction photographs.

4. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting closeout submittals and maintenance material submittals.

5. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

6. Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

1.3 SUBMITTAL FORMATS

A. Submittal Information: Include the following information in each submittal:

1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Architect. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 6. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 7. Unique submittal number, including revision identifier. Include Specification Section

number with sequential alphanumeric identifier; and alphanumeric suffix for resubmittals.



8. Category and type of submittal. 9. Submittal purpose and description. 10. Number and title of Specification Section, with paragraph number and generic name for

each of multiple items. 11. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 12. Indication of full or partial submittal. 13. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 14. Other necessary identification. 15. Remarks. 16. Signature of transmitter.

B. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

C. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations; include relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate sheet. An approval of a submittal containing any undisclosed variation or deviation from the Contract Documents that was not clearly indicated does not mean that the variation or deviation has been approved. Any undisclosed variation or deviation from the Contract Documents that is not clearly indicated will render the submittal null and void.

D. PDF Submittals: Prepare submittals as PDF package, incorporating complete information into each PDF file. Name PDF file with submittal number. All PDF pages shall be clear and legible.

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Email: Prepare submittals as PDF package, and transmit to Architect by sending via email. Include PDF transmittal form. Include information in email subject line as requested by Architect.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as a digital Project Record Document file.

2. Paper: Prepare submittals in paper form, and deliver to Architect.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of submittals for related parts of the Work specified in different Sections so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.



C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on [Architect's] [Construction Manager's] receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals

may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor.

a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect.

D. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action

stamp. 4. When resubmitting, submittals shall make very clear what items have been revised or

added to the submittal.

E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

F. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

1.5 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are unsuitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.



4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams that show factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before Shop Drawings, and before or concurrent with Samples.

B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other materials.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Permanently attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Project name and submittal number. b. Generic description of Sample. c. Product name and name of manufacturer. d. Sample source. e. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. f. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. Email Transmittal: Provide PDF transmittal. Include digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.

4. Paper Transmittal: Include paper transmittal including complete submittal information indicated.

5. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.



6. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

7. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record Sample.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

D. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space.

E. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

F. Certificates:

1. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Submit a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Provide a notarized signature where indicated.

2. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

3. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

4. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.



5. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

6. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

G. Test and Research Reports:

1. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

2. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

3. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

4. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

5. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

6. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

a. Name of evaluation organization. b. Date of evaluation. c. Time period when report is in effect. d. Product and manufacturers' names. e. Description of product. f. Test procedures and results. g. Limitations of use.

1.6 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are insufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF file and three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.



1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

1.7 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action Submittals and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Contractor's Approval: Indicate Contractor's approval for each submittal with a uniform approval stamp. Include name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

1. Architect will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not have Contractor's review and approval.

1.8 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it.

1. PDF Submittals: Architect will indicate, via markup on each submittal, the appropriate action.

a. NET: No exceptions taken. b. MCN: Make corrections noted. Resubmittal not required. c. RAR: Revise and resubmit. d. R: Rejected. e. SSI: Submit specified item.

B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

E. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.

F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be returned by Architect without action.

ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 01 35 16 - 1


SECTION 01 35 16 - ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes special procedures for alteration work.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Alteration Work: This term includes remodeling, renovation, repair, and maintenance work performed within existing spaces or on existing surfaces as part of the Project.

B. Consolidate: To strengthen loose or deteriorated materials in place.

C. Design Reference Sample: A sample that represents the Architect's prebid selection of work to be matched; it may be existing work or work specially produced for the Project.

D. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

E. Match: To blend with adjacent construction and manifest no apparent difference in material type, species, cut, form, detail, color, grain, texture, or finish; as approved by Architect.

F. Refinish: To remove existing finishes to base material and apply new finish to match original, or as otherwise indicated.

G. Repair: To correct damage and defects, retaining existing materials, features, and finishes. This includes patching, piecing-in, splicing, consolidating, or otherwise reinforcing or upgrading materials.

H. Replace: To remove, duplicate, and reinstall entire item with new material. The original item is the pattern for creating duplicates unless otherwise indicated.

I. Replicate: To reproduce in exact detail, materials, and finish unless otherwise indicated.

J. Reproduce: To fabricate a new item, accurate in detail to the original, and from either the same or a similar material as the original, unless otherwise indicated.

K. Retain: To keep existing items that are not to be removed or dismantled.

L. Strip: To remove existing finish down to base material unless otherwise indicated.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Alteration Work Subschedule: A construction schedule coordinating the sequencing and scheduling of alteration work for entire Project, including each activity to be performed, and based on Contractor's Construction Schedule. Secure time commitments for performing critical construction activities from separate entities responsible for alteration work.



1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain best Work results. 2. Coordinate sequence of alteration work activities to accommodate the following:

a. Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building. b. Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. c. Other known work in progress. d. Tests and inspections.

3. Detail sequence of alteration work, with start and end dates. 4. Utility Services: Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. Coordinate shutoff,

capping, and continuation of utility services. 5. Use of elevator and stairs. 6. Equipment Data: List gross loaded weight, axle-load distribution, and wheel-base

dimension data for mobile and heavy equipment proposed for use in existing structure. Do not use such equipment without certification from Contractor's professional engineer that the structure can support the imposed loadings without damage.

B. Pedestrian and Vehicular Circulation: Coordinate alteration work with circulation patterns within Project building(s) and site. Some work is near circulation patterns. Circulation patterns cannot be closed off entirely and in places can be only temporarily redirected around small areas of work. Plan and execute the Work accordingly.

1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS FOR ALTERATION WORK

A. Preliminary Conference for Alteration Work: Before starting alteration work, conduct conference at Project site.

1. Attendees: Owner, Architect, Contractor, and major Subcontractors. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress of alteration work,

including review of the following:

a. Alteration Work Subschedule: Discuss and finalize; verify availability of materials, specialists' personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

b. Fire-prevention plan. c. Governing regulations. d. Areas where existing construction is to remain and the required protection. e. Hauling routes. f. Sequence of alteration work operations. g. Storage, protection, and accounting for salvaged and specially fabricated items. h. Existing conditions, staging, and structural loading limitations of areas where

materials are stored. i. Qualifications of personnel assigned to alteration work and assigned duties. j. Requirements for extent and quality of work, tolerances, and required clearances. k. Collection of waste. l. Protection of occupants and the public. m. Condition of other construction that affects the Work or will affect the work.

3. Reporting: Record conference results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from conference.

B. Coordination Meetings: Conduct coordination meetings specifically for alteration work at [weekly] [monthly] <Insert interval> intervals. Coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.



1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Architect, and Contractor, each specialist, supplier, installer, and other entity concerned with progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of alteration work activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to alteration work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress of alteration work. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Alteration Work Subschedule: Review progress since last coordination meeting. Determine whether each schedule item is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited with retention of quality; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities are completed within the Contract Time.

b. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Alteration Work Subschedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.

c. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including review items listed in the "Preliminary Conference for Alteration Work" Paragraph in this article and the following:

1) Interface requirements of alteration work with other Project Work. 2) Status of submittals for alteration work. 3) Access to alteration work locations. 4) Effectiveness of fire-prevention plan. 5) Quality and work standards of alteration work. 6) Change Orders for alteration work.

3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.


A. Alteration Work Subschedule:

1. Submit alteration work subschedule within seven days of date established for commencement of alteration work.

1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF SALVAGED MATERIALS

A. Salvaged Materials:

1. Clean loose dirt and debris from salvaged items unless more extensive cleaning is indicated.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning; cushion against damage during handling. Label contents of containers.

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

B. Salvaged Materials for Reinstallation:



1. Repair and clean items for reuse as indicated. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing; cushion against damage during

handling. Label contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment unless otherwise indicated. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials to make items functional for use indicated.

C. Existing Materials to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling from construction work. Where permitted by Architect, items may be dismantled and taken to a suitable, protected storage location during construction work and reinstalled in their original locations after alteration and other construction work in the vicinity is complete.

D. Storage: Catalog and store items within a weathertight enclosure where they are protected from moisture, weather, condensation, and freezing temperatures.

1. Identify each item for reinstallation with a nonpermanent mark to document its original location. Indicate original locations on plans, elevations, sections, or photographs by annotating the identifying marks.

2. Secure stored materials to protect from theft. 3. Control humidity so that it does not exceed 85 percent. Maintain temperatures 5 deg F or

more above the dew point.

E. Storage Space:

1. Owner will arrange for limited on-site location(s) for free storage of salvaged material. This storage space does not include security for stored material.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions that affect the Work by use of preconstruction photographs.

B. Discrepancies: Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with removal and dismantling work.

C. Owner's Removals: Before beginning alteration work, verify in correspondence with Owner that the following items have been removed:

1. <Insert items to be removed by Owner>.

D. Size Limitations in Existing Spaces: Materials, products, and equipment used for performing the Work and for transporting debris, materials, and products shall be of sizes that clear surfaces within existing spaces, areas, rooms, and openings, including temporary protection, by 12 inches or more.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

A. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from harm resulting from alteration work.

1. Use only proven protection methods, appropriate to each area and surface being protected.

2. Provide temporary barricades, barriers, and directional signage to exclude the public from areas where alteration work is being performed.

3. Erect temporary barriers to form and maintain fire-egress routes. 4. Erect temporary protective covers over walkways and at points of pedestrian and

vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service during alteration work. 5. Contain dust and debris generated by alteration work, and prevent it from reaching the

public or adjacent surfaces. 6. Provide shoring, bracing, and supports as necessary. Do not overload structural

elements. 7. Protect floors and other surfaces along hauling routes from damage, wear, and staining. 8. Provide supplemental sound-control treatment to isolate demolition work from other areas

of the building.

B. Temporary Protection of Materials to Remain:

1. Protect existing materials with temporary protections and construction. Do not remove existing materials unless otherwise indicated.

2. Do not attach temporary protection to existing surfaces except as indicated as part of the alteration work program.

C. Comply with each product manufacturer's written instructions for protections and precautions. Protect against adverse effects of products and procedures on people and adjacent materials, components, and vegetation.

D. Utility and Communications Services:

1. Notify Owner, Architect, authorities having jurisdiction, and entities owning or controlling wires, conduits, pipes, and other services affected by alteration work before commencing operations.

2. Disconnect and cap pipes and services as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as required for alteration work.

3. Maintain existing services unless otherwise indicated; keep in service, and protect against damage during operations. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities.

E. Existing Drains: Prior to the start of work in an area, test drainage system to ensure that it is functioning properly. Notify Architect immediately of inadequate drainage or blockage. Do not begin work in an area until the drainage system is functioning properly.

1. Prevent solids such as adhesive or mortar residue or other debris from entering the drainage system. Clean out drains and drain lines that become sluggish or blocked by sand or other materials resulting from alteration work.



2. Protect drains from pollutants. Block drains or filter out sediments, allowing only clean water to pass.

3.2 PROTECTION FROM FIRE

A. General: Follow fire-prevention plan and the following:

1. Comply with NFPA 241 requirements unless otherwise indicated. 2. Remove and keep area free of combustibles, including rubbish, paper, waste, and

chemicals, unless necessary for the immediate work.

a. If combustible material cannot be removed, provide fire blankets to cover such materials.

B. Heat-Generating Equipment and Combustible Materials: Comply with the following procedures while performing work with heat-generating equipment or combustible materials, including welding, torch-cutting, soldering, brazing, removing paint with heat, or other operations where open flames or implements using high heat or combustible solvents and chemicals are anticipated:

1. Obtain Owner's approval for operations involving use of welding or other high-heat equipment. Use of open-flame equipment is not permitted. Notify Owner at least 72 hours before each occurrence, indicating location of such work.

2. As far as practicable, restrict heat-generating equipment to shop areas or outside the building.

3. Do not perform work with heat-generating equipment in or near rooms or in areas where flammable liquids or explosive vapors are present or thought to be present. Use a combustible gas indicator test to ensure that the area is safe.

4. Use fireproof baffles to prevent flames, sparks, hot gases, or other high-temperature material from reaching surrounding combustible material.

5. Prevent the spread of sparks and particles of hot metal through open windows, doors, holes, and cracks in floors, walls, ceilings, roofs, and other openings.

6. Fire Watch: Before working with heat-generating equipment or combustible materials, station personnel to serve as a fire watch at each location where such work is performed. Fire-watch personnel shall have the authority to enforce fire safety. Station fire watch according to NFPA 51B, NFPA 241, and as follows:

a. Train each fire watch in the proper operation of fire-control equipment and alarms. b. Prohibit fire-watch personnel from other work that would be a distraction from fire-

watch duties. c. Cease work with heat-generating equipment whenever fire-watch personnel are

not present. d. Have fire-watch personnel perform final fire-safety inspection each day beginning

no sooner than 30 minutes after conclusion of work to detect hidden or smoldering fires and to ensure that proper fire prevention is maintained.

e. Maintain fire-watch personnel at Project site until two hours after conclusion of daily work.

C. Fire-Control Devices: Provide and maintain fire extinguishers, fire blankets, and rag buckets for disposal of rags with combustible liquids. Maintain each as suitable for the type of fire risk in each work area. Ensure that nearby personnel and the fire-watch personnel are trained in fire-extinguisher and blanket use.



D. Sprinklers: Where sprinkler protection exists and is functional, maintain it without interruption while operations are being performed. If operations are performed close to sprinklers, shield them temporarily with guards.

1. Remove temporary guards at the end of work shifts, whenever operations are paused, and when nearby work is complete.

3.3 GENERAL ALTERATION WORK

A. Have specialty work performed only by qualified specialists.

B. Ensure that supervisory personnel are present when work begins and during its progress.

C. Record existing work before each procedure (preconstruction), and record progress during the work. Use digital preconstruction documentation photographs or video recordings.

D. Perform surveys of Project site as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from alterations.

E. Notify Architect of visible changes in the integrity of material or components whether from environmental causes including biological attack, UV degradation, freezing, or thawing or from structural defects including cracks, movement, or distortion.

1. Do not proceed with the work in question until directed by Architect.


PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1


SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.


1. Contract between Owner and Contractor for “Substitution Procedures” for requests for substitutions.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved by Architect through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a single manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation. In addition to the basis-of-design product description, product attributes and characteristics may be listed to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other special features and requirements for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.

C. Subject to Compliance with Requirements: Where the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements" introduces a product selection procedure in an individual Specification Section, provide products qualified under the specified product procedure. In the event that a named product or product by a named manufacturer does not meet the other requirements of the specifications, select another named product or product from another named manufacturer that does meet the requirements of the specifications. Submit a comparable product request, if applicable.



1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Comparable Product Request Submittal: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify basis-of-design product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Architect's Approval of Submittal: As specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures."

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

B. Identification of Products: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer or product names or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products or equipment that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.

1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface, or, where required for observation following installation, on a visually accessible surface that is not conspicuous.

2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on a visually accessible but inconspicuous surface. Include information essential for operation, including the following:

a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings.

3. See individual identification sections in Divisions 21, 22, 23, and 26 for additional identification requirements.



1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

a. Submit additional documentation required by Architect in order to establish equivalency of proposed products. Evaluation of "or equal" product status is by the Architect, whose determination is final.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

a. Sole product may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: …"

2. Sole Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

a. Sole manufacturer/source may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: …"

3. Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will will not be considered.

a. Limited list of products may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: …"

4. Non-Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, which complies with requirements.



a. Non-limited list of products is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: …"

5. Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

a. Limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: …"

6. Non-Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, which complies with requirements.

a. Non-limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers whose products may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: …"

7. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample," provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in the contract between Owner and Contractor for “Substitution Procedures” for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration of Comparable Products: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, is consistent with the Contract Documents, will produce the indicated results, and is compatible with other portions of the Work. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant product qualities include attributes such as type, function, in-service performance and physical properties,



weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other specific features and requirements.

2. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 3. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 4. Samples, if requested.

B. Submittal Requirements: Approval by the Architect of Contractor's request for use of comparable product is not intended to satisfy other submittal requirements. Comply with specified submittal requirements.



EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 1


SECTION 01 73 00 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction.


1. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 2. Section 02 41 19 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions

of the building. 3. Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated

construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of subsequent work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of subsequent work.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Cutting and Patching Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Prior to commencing work requiring cutting and patching, review extent of cutting and patching anticipated and examine procedures for ensuring satisfactory result from cutting and patching work. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cutting and patching to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent.



b. Trade supervisor responsible for cutting operations. c. Trade supervisor(s) responsible for patching of each type of substrate. d. Mechanical, electrical, and utilities subcontractors' supervisors, to the extent each

trade is affecting by cutting and patching operations.

2. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.


A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

C. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor.

D. Final Property Survey: Submit two copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.

B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection.

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Plumbing piping systems. f. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. g. Control systems. h. Communication systems. i. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. j. Conveying systems. k. Electrical wiring systems. l. Operating systems of special construction.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in



reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services; and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.



C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain

required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable

tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established

by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and



electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Where possible, select tools or equipment that minimize production of excessive noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the Work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.



3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Repair or remove and replace damaged, defective, or nonconforming Work.

1. Comply with Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for repairing or removing and replacing defective Work.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching with Owner.

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where

required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.



6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.



3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.



B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements."

3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain undisturbed by construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of the Work.

C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.


CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19 - 1


SECTION 01 74 19 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.


1. Section 02 41 19 "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement a waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work.

C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.

3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating

elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed. 3. Store items in a secure area until installation. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and

equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated.

B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site.

C. Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing door closers, leave door hardware attached to doors.

3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.

C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan.



1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or

processor.

3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.

B. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other metals.

C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners.

D. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.

3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from

Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

B. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.



2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.


CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1


SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.


1. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for additional operation and maintenance manual requirements.

2. Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.


A. Product Data: For each type of cleaning agent.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at final completion.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.



B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number.

5. Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. 6. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency

responders. 7. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 8. Complete final cleaning requirements. 9. Touch up paint and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate

visual defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the Work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.



1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.

1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where warranties are indicated to commence on dates other than date of Substantial Completion, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.



B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.

D. Warranty Electronic File: Provide warranties and bonds in PDF format. Assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single electronic PDF file with bookmarks enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

1. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect or by email to Architect.

E. Warranties in Paper Form:

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

F. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:



a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are not planted, mulched, or paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean

according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

l. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

m. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

n. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair, or remove and replace, defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.



a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.


OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 1


SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory manuals. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Systems and equipment operation manuals. 4. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. 5. Product maintenance manuals.


1. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals indicated. Provide content for each manual as specified in individual Specification Sections, and as reviewed and approved at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect and Owner’s Commissioning Authority will comment on whether content of operation and maintenance submittals is acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operation and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. Enable reviewer comments on draft submittals.

C. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Owner’s Commissioning Authority will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's and Owner’s Commissioning Authority's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt



of Architect's and Owner’s Commissioning Authority's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

1.4 FORMAT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Bookmark individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

1.5 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization of Manuals: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Architect. 7. Name and contact information for Owner’s Commissioning Authority. 8. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the

systems contained in the manuals. 9. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.



E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

1.6 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

C. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill.

D. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

E. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

1.7 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT OPERATION MANUALS

A. Systems and Equipment Operation Manual: Assemble a complete set of data indicating operation of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include information required for daily operation and management, operating standards, and routine and special operating procedures.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.



B. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

C. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

D. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

E. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

F. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color coding where required for identification.

1.8 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of data indicating maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include manufacturers' maintenance documentation, preventive maintenance procedures and frequency, repair procedures, wiring and systems diagrams, lists of spare parts, and warranty information.



1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

B. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranties and bonds as described below.

C. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

D. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Include the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins; include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

a. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

E. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

F. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.



G. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

I. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of maintenance manuals.

1.9 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

C. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

D. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

E. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

F. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1


SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous Record Submittals.


1. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one set of file

prints. 2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional

information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints. 2) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were

recorded.

B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

1.3 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether



individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding photographic documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:

1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings.

2. Format: DWG, Version 2014, Microsoft Windows operating system. 3. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 4. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.

Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 5. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 6. Architect will furnish Contractor with one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings

for use in recording information.

a. See Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files.

C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.



1. Record Prints: Organize record prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files

that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.

1.4 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file.

1.5 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

C. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.



1.6 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store record documents in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION


SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 1


SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.


1. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. 2. Section 01 35 16 "Alteration Project Procedures" for general protection and work

procedures for alteration projects.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and store.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.


A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.



4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.


A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of

Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.

C. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Submit before Work begins.

D. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition.


A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.


A. Owner may occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:

a. Furniture. b. Office cubicles. c. Furnishings. d. Office equipment.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.



1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs or video.

1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.



1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.

B. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain fire watch during flame-cutting operations and afterwards for a time period that is acceptable to Owner.

6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site. 8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in

Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.



D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts.

B. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove.

C. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and recycle or dispose of them according to Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will

convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste

Management and Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.


MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 1


SECTION 06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Wood blocking. 2. Plywood backing panels.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension.

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal size in least dimension.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

2. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.


A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Fire-retardant-treated wood.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less

when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Concealed blocking. 2. Plywood backing panels.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any of the following species:

1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; SPIB.



2. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.

C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

D. For blocking used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior, A-C, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate blocking and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels.

C. Provide blocking as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

D. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

E. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.



3.2 WOOD BLOCKING INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.


PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 1


SECTION 06 41 16 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced

architectural cabinets that are not concealed within other construction.


1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking required for installing cabinets that are concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.

2. Section 12 36 23.13 "Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops."

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to support loads imposed by installed and fully loaded cabinets.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: For plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show full-size details. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic-laminate

architectural cabinets.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's or fabricator's standard size.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following:



1. Plastic Laminates: 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish required.

a. Provide one sample applied to core material with specified edge material applied to one edge.

2. Exposed Cabinet Hardware and Accessories: One full-size unit for each type and finish.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.


A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar finish operations that might damage architectural cabinets have been completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction.

C. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

B. Grade: Custom.

C. Type of Construction: Frameless.

D. Door and Drawer-Front Style: Flush overlay.

E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Formica Corporation. b. Wilsonart.

F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:

1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 4. Edges: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and

finish. 5. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.

G. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.

a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.

b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge banding.

3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels.

H. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops.

I. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.



J. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body.

1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints.

K. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations.

2.2 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent.

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay. 4. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or MDF finished with thermally fused,

melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for Test Methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets.

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, [100] [135] [170] degrees of opening, self-closing.

C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.

D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.

E. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal, two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip.

F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.

1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted.

a. Type: Full extension. b. Material: Zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers.

2. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated-steel ball-bearing slides.



3. For drawers more than 3 inches high, but not more than 6 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1.

4. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-100.

G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

I. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.

J. Grommets for Cable Passage: 2-inch OD, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

1. Product: Equal to Mockett TG3. 2. Color: Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full line.

K. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.

L. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate architectural cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard grade of item to be installed.

B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with wafer-head cabinet installation screws.

D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inchesusing concealed shims.

1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips of No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace architectural cabinets. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.


WOOD FRAMES 06 48 00 - 1


SECTION 06 48 00 - WOOD FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior borrowed light wood frames. 2. Shop priming wood frames.


A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other

Sections.




C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups of typical wood frames as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Do not deliver wood frames until operations that could damage wood frames have been completed in installation areas. If wood frames must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior wood frames until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.



B. Field Measurements: Where wood frames are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Established Dimensions: Where wood frames are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where wood frames are to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood frames can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD FRAMES, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of wood frames indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

2.2 INTERIOR FRAMES FOR OPAQUE FINISH

A. Grade: Custom.

B. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.

2.3 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of wood frame and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches wide.

2. Wood Moisture Content for Interior Materials: 8 to 13 percent.


A. Interior Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Provide self-drilling screws for metal-framing supports, as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer.

C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use



nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate wood frames to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:

1. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 SHOP PRIMING

A. Interior Wood Frames for Opaque Finish: Shop prime with one coat of wood primer specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."

B. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood frames, as applicable to each unit of work.

1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of wood trim.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition wood frames to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing wood frames, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install wood frames to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

B. Assemble wood frames and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Install wood frames level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

D. Scribe and cut wood frames to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Anchor wood frames to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.



F. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of wood frames. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.

1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are applied in shop.

G. Refer to Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting" for final finishing of installed wood frames not indicated to be shop finished.


A. Repair damaged and defective wood frames, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace wood frames. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean wood frames on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.


HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND

FRAMES 081113 - 1

SJC BUILDING SERVICES RENOVATION & REMODELING ARCHITECT'S PROJECT #15056

ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into masonry construction.

2. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors.3. Division 09 Sections "Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames.4. Division 26 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for door controls

and operators.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.

B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.

C. Custom Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door design.2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.5. Details of each different wall opening condition.


FRAMES 081113 - 2


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.7. Details of accessories.8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Other Action Submittals:

1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.

E. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.

1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

2. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

C. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite.


A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.


FRAMES 081113 - 3


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inchhigh wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.

1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.2. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.3. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.


FRAMES 081113 - 4


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

F. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.

G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1. Design: Flush panel.2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's polyurethane.

a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated.

b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 4.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./ Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

1) Locations: Exterior doors.

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Square-edge.4. Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch radius.5. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- thick, end closures or

channels of same material as face sheets.6. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors

and Frames."

B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).


FRAMES 081113 - 5


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.2. Fabricate frames as face welded unless otherwise indicated.3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet.

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated sheet steel.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.2. Fabricate frames as face welded unless otherwise indicated.3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet.4. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053 inch thick steel sheet.5. Frames for Borrowed Lights: Same as adjacent door frame.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick.

3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows:


FRAMES 081113 - 6


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing

not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

2.6 HOLLOW METAL PANELS

A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for adjoining hollow metal work.

2.7 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed.

2.8 LOUVERS

A. Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch- thick steel frame.

1. Sightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades.

2.9 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- wide steel.

C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.

2.10 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117 or ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861.


FRAMES 081113 - 7


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

C. Hollow Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by

NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.

D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.

2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds

per anchor.6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches

or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches

or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in

metal-stud partitions.

c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb.d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and

bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.


FRAMES 081113 - 8


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8 or ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861.

2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware.

3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.

4. Coordinate locations and prepare for conduit, door positions switches and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 28 Sections.

G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type

of installation indicated.

2.11 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.


FRAMES 081113 - 9


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:

1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.


FRAMES 081113 - 10


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations,

field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured.f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim

as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing

antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between

frames and masonry with grout.5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take

precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces.

6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

7. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

8. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members.

9. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:


FRAMES 081113 - 11


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4

inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 081113

WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

SECTION 08 1416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid core veneer-faced doors (SCW).2. High impact acrylic modified vinyl faced doors (SCWA).3. Fire-resistant composite core doors.4. Acoustic (STC) rated wood doors5. Factory finishing.6. Factory glazing installation. 7. Sizing by manufacturer.8. Machining by manufacturer.


1. Section 062023 "Interior Finish Carpentry" for wood door frames including fire-rated wood door frames.

2. Section 083473 "Sound Control Door Assemblies" for acoustic flush wood door assemblies over STC 47.

3. Section 087100 “Door Hardware”.4. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors for [factory] [field]

installation.




A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Dimensions and locations of blocking.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts.4. Undercuts.5. Requirements for veneer matching.6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.8. Wiring raceways in doors.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For high pressure decorative laminate, acrylic door faces and factory-finished doors.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical examples of color and grain to be expected in finished work.

2. Provide construction samples of doors, approximately 5 by 5 inches (125 by 125 mm), with door faces and vertical edges representing actual construction to be used.

a. Provide unfinished samples for each species of veneer and required if factory furnishing is not required, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm).

3. Louver blade and frame sections, minimum 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material and finish specified.

4. Frames for light openings, minimum 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material, type, and finish required.


A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body when FSC Certified wood is specified.

2. A qualified manufacturer that is a member in good standing of the Window and Door Manufacturers Association.

B. Product Performance: Provide documents showing compliance to the following WDMA attributes, validating the specified WDMA Performance Duty Level:

1. Adhesive Bonding Durability: WDMA TM-62. Cycle Slam: WDMA TM-73. Hinge Loading: WDMA TM-84. Screw Holding: WDMA TM-10



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

a. Door Faceb. Vertical Door Edgec. Horizontal Door Edge (applies when hardware is attached)


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package factory-finished doors individually in manufacturer's standard plastic bags, stretch wrap, or cardboard cartons.

C. Mark each door on top rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. Include manufacturer's order number and date of manufacture.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weather tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction period.

B. Existing Doors: It is the responsibility of the supplier to inspect and field verify the existing wood doors for re-use as directed by the construction documents. Include pricing for doors requiring replacement, and repairs in order to meet life safety, fire and security requirements. Fire doors shall only be repaired or modified by an authorized UL Licensed wood door fabricator. Repair and / or refinish existing doors to match new doors supplied for the project.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section.

b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span.

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc. flush wood doors or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.2. Eggers Industries.3. Marshfield DoorSystems

B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.

2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A-11, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."

B. Regional Materials: Where available based on inclusive list of approved manufacturers, flush wood doors shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.

C. Certified Wood: Flush wood doors shall be certified according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and to FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification." FSC claims are to be based on "new" wood contribution only. All recycled, reclaimed, and recovered material, even if it is FSC Recycled, must be applied towards the MR 4 credit.

D. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain added urea formaldehyde.

E. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors that comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." All composite wood and agrifiber products must meet this requirement. Prefer products that are third party certified through SCS Indoor Advantage Gold.

F. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.

1. All doors must meet specified WDMA Performance Duty Level, including face screw holding requirement. Surface applied hardware shall be installed with screws; through bolts are not acceptable.

G. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to UL 10C.1. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated and At vertical exit enclosures and exit

passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

not more than 250 deg F (121 deg C)] above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

2. Cores: Provide core specified or fire-resistant composite core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated.

3. Blocking: Provide composite blocking approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to maintain WDMA performance level and eliminate through-bolting hardware.

4. Edge Construction: Category A - intumescents included in door construction where required.

5. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals.

6. Pairs: Provide formed-steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals as required.a. Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel, color as selected from

manufacturer's standard offering.

H. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784.

I. Acoustic Rated Wood Doors – STC 30-47 (where indicated):

1. Provide core indicated or special construction core as required to meet STC rating indicated on door schedule. All STC ratings must be tested as operable.

2. Provide gasketing and mortise door bottom as required to meet manufacturers tested acoustic rating.

3. Hollow metal frames shall be fully grouted or packed with mineral wool where acoustic rated wood doors are installed.

4. The Sound Transmission Class (STC) specified shall be certified by the manufacturer to be based on tests conducted at an independent testing agency in accordance with ASTM E90-90 and E413-87.

J. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:1. Provide Structural Composite Lumber core as required to meet WDMA Performance Duty

Level specified2. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA T.M.10.

a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf (3100 N).b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf (1780 N), or as required to meet WDMA

performance level specified.

2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors :

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Marshfield DoorSystems; "Signature Series" or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Algoma Hardwoods.b. Eggers Industries.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

2. Veneer Grade: A.3. Species: Plain Sliced White Birch4. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced).5. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.6. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center-balance match.7. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions.

Provide sets up to four doors.8. Special Veneer Selection: Select veneers for similar color and grain.9. Transom Match: Continuous match.10. Exposed Vertical Edges: Hardwood, of same or compatible species as face, minimum

thickness of 1/2 inch (13 mm), bonded to structural composite lumber, leaving edges of crossband exposed..

11. Horizontal Edges: Structural composite lumber. Bond smooth PVC edgeband to structural composite lumber, providing cleanable surface.

12. Core: Structural composite lumber, fire-resistant composite, or specialty core as required per Article 2.2 and schedule.

13. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, and then entire unit is abrasive planed before veneering.

14. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: As specified in Article 2.2.

2.4 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS

A. Factory Glazing: Refer to Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. Factory install glass as required. Fill glazing bead nail holes in factory finished doors.

B. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard flush wood beads unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces.2. Profile: Lipped tapered beads, profile per Marshfield W-3.3. At wood-core doors with 20-minute fire-protection ratings, provide wood beads and metal

glazing clips as required and approved for such use.

C. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated. Profile per Marshfield Veneer Clad Light Bead, matching non-rated W-6 profile.

D. Wood Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard solid-wood louvers unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces.2. Louver Type: As indicated.

E. Louvers for Fire-Rated Doors: Metal louvers with fusible link and closing device, listed and labeled for use in doors with fire-protection rating of 1-1/2 hours and less.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

a. Air Louvers Inc.b. Anemostat; a Mestek company.

2. Metal and Finish: 18 gauge cold rolled steel, with manufacturer's standard color baked-enamel- or powder-coated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.

2. Coordinate door undercuts with “Door Hardware” requirements and automatic door bottoms specified.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors.

C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles.

1. Fabricate door and transom panels with full-width, solid-lumber, rabbeted, meeting rails. Provide factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames.

D. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in fire rated and in doors indicated to be factory finished.

Comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces and vertical edges, seal top and bottom edges as required for warranty purposes



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

B. Factory finish doors.

C. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish.

D. Factory finish doors where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished.

E. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium.2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard UV cured polyurethane, equal to WDMA TR-6 catalyzed

polyurethane.3. Staining: Match existing stain and color.4. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. Any deficiencies must be corrected prior to door installation.

2. Reject doors with defects.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware.

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges.3. Trim bottom rail only to extent permitted by labeling agency.

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not trim factory finished doors for width.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Correct any deficiency that prohibits the door from swinging or operating freely. Do not remove hinge screws after initial insertion. Shims used for alignment purposes must be inserted between hinge and frame. Do not insert shims between hinge and door.

B. To prevent stile failure, insure that door closers are properly adjusted and do not limit the door opening swing. Limit door opening swing only with a properly located stop.

C. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.


ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 31 13 - 1


SECTION 08 31 13 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.

1.2 ALLOWANCES

A. Access doors and frames are part of an access door and frame allowance.



1. Include construction details material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:


a. Acudor Products, Inc. b. Babcock-Davis. c. Elmdor/Stoneman Manufacturing Company; a division of Acorn Engineering

Company.

2. Description: Face of door flush with frame, with exposed flange and concealed hinge. 3. Locations: Ceiling. 4. Door Size: As required. 5. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch, 16 gage, factory primed. 6. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 7. Latch and Lock: Cam latch, screwdriver operated.

B. Recessed Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:


a. Acudor Products, Inc.



b. Babcock-Davis. c. Elmdor/Stoneman Manufacturing Company; a division of Acorn Engineering

Company.

2. Description: Door face recessed 5/8 inch for gypsum board infill; with concealed flange for gypsum board installation and concealed hinge.

3. Locations: Wall. 4. Door Size: As required. 5. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch, 16 gage, factory primed. 6. Latch and Lock: Cam latch, screwdriver operated.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

C. Frame Anchors: Same material as door face.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish mounting holes, attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated.

1. For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum panels securely attached to perimeter of frames.

D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling. Provide access sleeves for each latch operator and install in holes cut through finish.

E. Latch and Lock Hardware:

1. Quantity: Furnish number of latches as required to hold doors tightly closed.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.



B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

1. Factory Primed: Apply manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

a. Color: White.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.


ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13 - 1


SECTION 08 41 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior storefront framing.


1. Section 08 80 00 “Glazing” for clear fully tempered float glass.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following:

a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Glazing.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

E. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.




A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.

1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering. c. Failure of operating components.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 2. U.S. Aluminum; a brand of C.R. Laurence. 3. YKK AP America Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system, including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer.

2.2 FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Nonthermal. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Center. 4. Finish: Clear anodic finish. 5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.

B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

D. Materials:

1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

2.3 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch nominal width. (Note: Design intent is to match existing interior entrance doors.)



3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled or Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. (Note: Design intent is to match existing interior entrance doors.)

2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide entrance door hardware for each entrance door to comply with requirements in this Section.

1. Opening-Force Requirements:

a. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to fully open door.

B. Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.

1. Offset-Pivot Hinges: Provide top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots at each door leaf.

C. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

D. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

1. Keying: Master key system. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE" to be furnished by Owner.

E. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum framing.

F. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.

G. Push/Pulls: Provide two contemporary styled 1” round pull handles mounted back to back for each door.

1. Centerline dimension: 12 inches. 2. Finish: Clear anodic finish.

H. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to comply with field conditions and requirements for opening force.

I. Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

2.5 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.



1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

D. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using screw-spline system.

E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors.

F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge.

G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.

H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers.

2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

D. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.

E. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the following maximum tolerances:

1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 3. Alignment:



a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch.

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length.


DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work covered under this section consists of the furnishing of all necessary labor, supervision, materials, equipment, tests and services to completely execute a complete mechanical and electromechanical door hardware system (Product) as described in this specification and as shown on the drawings, including but not limited to the following devices and products: Electro-mechanical and Mechanical Door Hardware, Door Hardware with Integrated Card Readers, Aluminum, Wood and Hollow Metal Door, Door Hardware, Weather Seals and Thresholds.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section: 06 20 00: Finish Carpentry

B. Section: 08 11 13: Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

C. Section 08 14 16: Flush Wood Doors

D. Section: 08 41 13: Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts

E. Section 08 14 16: Flush Wood Doors

F. All Specification Sections and Drawings for the following related disciplines: Architectural (including Architectural Door Schedule and Door Elevations), Life Safety, Electrical, Mechanical, Structural, Civil, Fire Alarm, Security and Technology.


A. STANDARDS: Manufacturers and model numbers listed are to establish a standard of quality. Similar items by approved manufacturers, unless otherwise noted, that are equal in design, finish and quality will be considered upon prior approval of the architect and provided required data and physical samples are submitted at least ten (10) days prior to date of bid. Products listed as “No Substitute” are specified as such to match existing or by the Owners request.

B. SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS: Hardware supplier must be engaged regularly in contracting work and be staffed to expedite work, the firm shall have been furnishing hardware on similar projects in the geographic area for not less than five years. The supplier must have in his employ a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to direct detailing, setting, applying of all hardware items.

C. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS: Hardware for the project shall be installed by factory authorized personnel who have successfully completed factory training courses and shall be certified for the installation of locksets, door closers and exit devices. Prior to installation the installer shall inspect all door frames for proper plum and square condition.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

General Contractor shall be notified of frames found out of square, plum or unsuitable for door installation at the installation meeting.

D. ELECTRONIC/ELECTRIC HARDWARE: It shall be the responsibility of supplier to coordinate with the approved manufacturer and the electrical contractor / security / fire systems contractor all electronic / electrical finish hardware items covered within this section via factory wiring diagram showing point to point connections, riser diagram and system schematic. Factory wiring diagrams shall be furnished with hardware submittals (See 1.6). Refer to Security wiring diagrams for coordination of electro-mechanical hardware with access control and life safety systems. Door Hardware submittals will not be reviewed without factory wiring diagrams.

E. PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE FOR MECHANICAL HARDWARE: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section “Project Meeting.” Review methods and procedures related to mechanical door hardware, including but not limited to the following:

1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, installer’s personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress an avoid delays.

2. Present General Contractor with a written report of the condition of door frames in terms of squareness and any other condition that may impede the installation and operation of the doors and hardware.

3. Review installer’s responsibilities for testing, inspecting and adjusting doors and hardware in accordance with Part 3 EXECUTION.

F. PREINSTALLTION CONFERENCE FOR ELECTRIFIED HARDWARE: Conduct conference prior to electrical Rough-in for electro-mechanical hardware components. Required attendance: St John’s County Construction Project Manager, Architect, Door Hardware / Security Consultant, BAS System Integrator, Security Integrator, Electrical Contractor, Door Hardware Supplier and Automatic Door Supplier. Review methods and procedures related to electrified door hardware including, but not limited to the following:

1. Discuss electrical rough-in requirements and other preparatory work to be performed by other trades.

2. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrical door hardware.3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,

installer’s personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress an avoid delays.

4. Review door hardware and security shop drawing requirements.5. Review installer’s responsibilities for testing, inspecting and adjusting doors and

hardware in accordance with all applicable building codes and associated work with other trades.

G. FLORIDA WIND AND IMPACT REQUIREMENTS: All door, frame and hardware complete assemblies shall meet or exceed requirements for Wind Pressure and Impact ratings. Furnish copies of Notice of Acceptance and Florida Product Approval Reference Numbers with submittals. Notice of Acceptance and Florida



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

Product Approval Reference Numbers submitted must indicate compliance with small and large missile impact, per design pressures indicated on Structural Drawings, according to the applicable version of the Florida Building Code testing requirements.

H. COORDINATION: It is the responsibility of the door hardware supplier and door hardware installer to coordinate all aspects of security door hardware voltages, wiring, door and frame raceways, and electro mechanical hardware installation with the Electrical and Security contractors. Door hardware supplier shall review the Security Drawings for the project for familiarization with the security requirements prior to submitting a proposal for the work.

I. EXISTING HARDWARE: It is the responsibility of the supplier to inspect and field verify the existing hardware for re-use as directed by the construction documents. Include pricing for hardware requiring replacement in order to meet life safety, fire and security requirements.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/BHMA designations where used in schedules to describe hardware items or to define quality or function are derived from the following standards and requirements specified elsewhere in this section.

1. Butts and Hinges: ANSI A156.1 (Formerly BHMA 101)2. Locks and Lock Trim: ANSI A156.2 (BHMA 601)3. Exit Devices: ANSI A156.3 (BHMA 701)4. Door Controls: Closers: ANSI A156.4 (BHMA 301)5. Auxiliary Locks: ANSI A156.5 (BHMA 501)6. Architectural Door Trim: ANSI A156.6 (BHMA 1001)7. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI A156.78. Door Controls: Overhead Holders: ANSI 156.8 (BHMA 311)9. Mortise Locks & Latches: ANSI A156.14 (BHMA 401)10. Materials and Finishes: ANSI A156.18 (BHMA 1301)

2. Door and Hardware Institute Standards used:

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."

3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."

3. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.2. FBC – Florida Building Code – Applicable Version.3. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

4. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.5. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.6. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.

4. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:

1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each item of hardware. Include whatever information may be necessary to show compliance with requirements, and instructions for installation and maintenance of operating parts and exposed finishes.

B. SCHEDULES: Submit six (6) copies of the finish hardware schedule in vertical format complying with DHI publication: “Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule”. Physical copies of schedules not required if schedules submitted digitally. Digital copies must be “clearly legible”. Determination of what is defined as “clearly legible” is at the sole discretion of the Design Team. Documents submitted that are not deemed clearly legible will be returned without review. Include a description of each electrified door hardware function, including product’s location, narrative of sequence of operation and integration with other building control systems. Submittals without required wiring diagrams will be returned without review.

C. SAMPLES: At the request of the architect, submit samples of products for approval of design, finish, etc.

D. TEMPLATES: Whenever required, furnish templates to the necessary fabricators of other related work, which is to receive finish hardware, such as door and steel door frames.

E. CATALOG CUTS: Submit six (6) copies of catalog cuts of all products listed in the finish hardware schedule unless submitted digitally. Digital copies must be “clearly legible”. Determination of what is defined as “clearly legible” is at the sole discretion of the Design Team. Documents submitted that are not deemed clearly legible will be returned without review.

F. KEYING SCHEDULE: The specific keying requirements are noted elsewhere in this schedule. If these requirements are not noted then, it is the supplier’s responsibility to submit a keying schedule based on the format listed in the DHI manual: Keying Procedures, Systems and Nomenclature for the approval of the Architect. Keying schedule must also be approved and sign off by the Owner or Owner’s representative prior to Architect approval.

1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. MARKING & PACKAGING: Hardware shall be delivered to the project site, or as otherwise required, in manufacturer’s original packages, numbered and labeled to identify each



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

opening for which it is intended and to correspond to item numbers on the approved hardware schedule.

B. Storage and protection of the materials is the responsibility of the General Contractor. The General Contractor shall provide clean, dry, locked storage room with shelves for sorting and protection of items.

1.7 WARRANTIES

A. All door closers shall have a ten (10) year warranty against defects in material and workmanship from the date of occupancy of the project.

B. All other products shall have a one (1) year warranty against defects in the material and workmanship from the date of occupancy of the project.

C. Exit hardware shall be warranted for a period of three (3) years against defects material and workmanship.

D. Power supplies shall be warranted for the life of the installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS

A. Products: Specified Manufacturers: Acceptable Manufacturers:

HINGES McKINNEY HAGARCONT. HINGES PEMKO McKINNEYPIVOTS RIXON LCNFLUSH BOLT ROCKWOOD McKINNEY, TRIMCOEXIT DEVICES SARGENT NO SUBSTITUTION CYLINDERS SARGENT NO SUBSTITUTIONLOCKS SARGENT NO SUBSTITUTIONPUSH-PULLS ROCKWOOD McKINNEY, TRIMCODOOR CLOSERS SARGENT NO SUBSTITUTION DOOR HOLDERS RIXON LCNKICK PLATES ROCKWOOD McKINNEY, TRIMCODOOR STOPS ROCKWOOD McKINNEY, TRIMCOTHRESHOLDS PEMKO McKINNEY, NAT. GUARDW / S SETS PEMKO McKINNEY, NAT. GUARDDOOR BOTTOMS PEMKO McKINNEY, NAT. GUARDSMOKE SEALS PEMKO McKINNEY, NAT. GUARDPOWER SUPPLIES SARGENT SECURITRONDOOR CONTACTS GE / SENTROL SECURITRON

B. To the greatest extent possible, obtain materials from one manufacturer. Manufacturers listed above are intended to insure quality and design of the project. Other manufacturers submitted may be acceptable, provided they are equal or exceed standard of quality proposed for this project.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

2.2 MATERIALS

A. SCREWS & FASTENERS: All screws and fasteners required for the hardware items are listed in the individual hardware sets. Any omission of these items should be reflected in the schedule submitted for approval. All screws shall be stainless steel.

B. HINGES: Where hinges are specified unless otherwise noted they shall be of types and sizes as required by ANSI A156.1. SIZE HINGES ACCORDING TO APPROVED MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS. Provide stainless steel continuous hinges as listed in the hardware sets.

1. Do not install weather seal gasket for Sargent Harmony locksets for interior applications.

2. It is the sole responsibility of the door hardware supplier to provide all required wiring harnesses with sufficient wire quantities for lock functions specified from locking device to hinge, from frame side of hinge to above ceiling junction box above door as detailed in drawings and specifications.

3. Do NOT cut any molex connectors off of any wiring harnesses, locksets, exit devices or hinges under any circumstance. Cutting off molex connectors shall warrant replacement of wiring harnesses and / or hardware at Contractor’s expense.

C. FLUSH BOLTS: Provide Manual and automatic flush bolts as noted in the hardware sets. All flush bolts are required to meet ANSI A156.3.

D. LOCKSETS & CYLINDERS: Provide lock sets and cylinders as noted in hardware sets. Lock sets shall meet ANSI A156.13, Grade One operational, Grade Two security, UL listed, Series 1000. Lock cases shall be field reversible without disassembly of lock case. Cylinders shall be 7 pin removable cores.




E. LOCK TRIM: The design criteria selected for the lockset is as noted in the hardware sets. This is the acceptable design selected by the owner and intended for this project.

G. EXIT DEVICES: Provide the series and type of exit devices as noted in the hardware sets. Exit devices are required to meet ANSI A156.3 Grade One. All exit devices and electrically controlled exit devices shall be of one manufacturer.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL




I. DOOR CLOSERS: Provide the series and type of door closers as noted in the hardware sets. These door closers are required to meet ANSI A156.4 Grade One. All closers and power actuated closers shall be of one manufacturer. Provide all door closers from the same manufacturer. Supply drop plates and fillers as required for all door and frame conditions. All door closers shall be fully adjustable and comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

1. SUPPLY DROP PLATES AND TRANSOM BRACKETS AS REQUIRED FOR EXISTING CONDITIONS AND ALUMINUM AND / OR FULL GLASS DOORS.

J. PUSH, PULL & KICK PLATE: Provide the type and size of these plates as noted in the hardware sets. These items are intended for the use and accessibility as protection of the openings indicated in the hardware schedule.

K. DOOR STOPS & HOLDERS: Provide the types as noted in the hardware sets. Any variation in the jobsite conditions could change the type as specified.

L. THRESHOLD & WEATHER-STRIPPING: Provide the types as noted in the hardware sets. All exterior openings and interior fire rated openings shall have the necessary items to meet the local building code standards. Provide stainless steel screws at all locations. All thresholds and door bottoms shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

M. SILENCERS: Provide the type required to accommodate the hollow metal frames and wood frames fabricated for the project. Stick on / adhesive silencers are not permitted.

N. ELECTRICAL PRODUCTS: To assure proper integration, ALL ELECTRICAL PRODUCTS TO BE PRODUCED BY THE SAME MANUFACTURER.

2.3 FINISHES

A. Provide the finishes as specified in the hardware schedule. Otherwise, provide matching finishes for the hardware items at each door opening to the greatest extent possible. Refer to the ANSI A156.18 for the identification of these finishes.

2.4 KEYING



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

A. Hardware supplier shall interview the designated representative of the owner to determine exact keying requirements. The hardware supplier shall submit a key schedule based on the instructions received from the owner’s representative in DHI format for the approval of the owner and Architect prior to factory order

B. Supply a Sargent Grand Master System factory keyed according to the approved key schedule. Cylinders shall be Interchangeable Core keyed to the St Johns County existing “H” series keyway at the direction of Owner’s representative.

C. Each key shall be marked and identified as directed by the Architect / Owner using the mechanical impact method of transferring the numerical impression to the key bow. Characters shall be consistent and uniform in their placement, alignment and depth of impression. Mark each key “DO NOT DUPLICATE”.

D. Provide 4 factory cut change keys per lock, 0 Grand Master Keys, 2 master keys per group, 20 pre-combinated cores, 5 control keys and 50 key blanks. All factory cut and blank keys shall be restricted for use in the geographic area and be of nickel silver. Ship all permanent factory cut keys, key blanks and cylinders direct via registered US Mail to: the designated Owner’s representative.

E. Provide the General Contractor with manufacturer’s standard keyed alike construction core system for use during construction. Install new factory keyed cores at the direction of the owner.

2.5 KEY CONTROL

A. Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels tags, with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, three-way visible card index, temporary markers and standard metal cabinet. Provide all of this material from one manufacturer and per that manufacturer’s system standard. Provide a system with the capacity for 150% of the number of cylinders and locksets required for the project.

PART 3 –EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. After installation has been completed, the hardware supplier shall have a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC); check the job to determine the proper application of hardware according to the approved hardware schedule and keying schedule. AHC shall attest to compliance of project specifications and submittals in a written and signed report furnished to the Owner.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to the DHI manual publication for Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware, and ADA REQUIREMENTS for instruction. Install all hardware in compliance with



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

manufacturer’s instruction and recommendations. Drill and countersink all items which are not factory prepared for fasteners. Cut and fit all thresholds and weather-stripping to profile of door frames. Set thresholds in accordance with the application condition.

B. Use only fasteners supplied with hardware and approved by the manufacturer. Drill and tap doors and frames as required prior to installation of hardware. Self-drilling screws are not acceptable. Provide stainless steel screws for all hardware.

3.3 ADJUSTING & CLEANING

A. At final completion all hardware shall be left clean and free from disfigurement. The contractor shall make a final adjustment to all door closers and other items of hardware. Where hardware is found defective, repair or replace or otherwise correct as directed.

B. At the completion of the project and / or during the closeout phase of the project the supplier will review with the designated owner’s representative the proper service and adjustment of all hardware items.

C. At the completion of the project and / or during the close out phase of the project the supplier will perform a final adjustment to all door closers furnished in this section to insure that all fire rated doors close and latch and that all door closer opening and closing pressure are in compliance with ADA.

3.4 OPERATIONS, MAINTENANCE AND TRAINING

A. At completion of the project, provide the owner with a manual containing the following information:

1. Final (as built) copy of hardware schedule.2. Final copy of keying schedule.3. Final copy of all system schematics and wiring diagrams.4. Copy of product data sheets as submitted including all Warranty data.5. Parts list for Locksets, Door Closers and Exit Devices.6. Copy of installation instructions for each type of hardware used.7. Name, address and phone number of each manufacturer and local

representative.8. Complete set of any specialized tools.9. AHC compliance report as required in 3.1 A, Inspection.

B. At the completion of the project the supplier shall engage a factory authorized service representative to train the Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain door hardware and electronic cylinder / lock systems provided in this section

3.5 PROTECTION

A. The general contractor is responsible for the proper protection of all items of hardware until the owner accepts the job as complete.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

3.6 FLORIDA WIND AND IMPACT REQUIREMENTS

A. All door, frame and hardware complete assemblies shall meet or exceed requirements for Wind Pressure and Impact ratings. Furnish copies of Notice of Acceptance and Florida Product Approval Reference Numbers with submittals. Notice of Acceptance and Florida Product Approval Reference Numbers submitted must indicate compliance with small and large missile impact, per design pressures indicated on Structural Drawings, according to the applicable version of the Florida Building Code testing requirements.

3.7 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

QTY DESCRIPTION MODEL SIZE OPTION FINISH

HARDWARE SET 1

3 EA HINGES TA2314 4.5 X 4.5 630

1 EA LOCKSET 8237 LNL LC 630

1 EA CYLINDER AS REQ’D 626

1 EA W/S S88 LAR BLK

1 EA STOP 400 626

HARDWARE SET 2

3 EA HINGES T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 630



1 EA CLOSER 1431-O 689

1 EA KICK PLATE K1050 8 X 2 LDW B4E 630

1 EA MOP PLATE S88 4 X 1 LDW B4E 630

1 EA STOP 400 626

HARDWARE SET 3

2 EA HINGES T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630

1 EA ELEC. HINGE T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 QC12 630

1 EA LOCKSET 82271 LNL IDP NAC LC 630

1 EA WIRE HARNESS AS REQ’D LAR NOTES 3 & 4



1 EA CLOSER 1431 CPS 689



1 EA MOP PLATE K1050 4 X 1 LDW B4E 630

NOTES:1. INTEGRATION WITH ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM REQUIRED.2. CARD READER, REQUEST TO EXIT AND DPS INTEGRATED INTO LOCKSET.3. THE HINGES AND WIRE HARNESSES SHALL HAVE A FACTORY MOLEX CONNECTOR. DO NOT CUT OR REMOVE THE MOLEX CONNECTORS4. DOOR HARNESS-FROM EXIT TO HINGE5. FRAME HARNESS-FROM HINGE TO JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED ABOVE DOOR OPENING



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

HARDWARE SET 4

2 EA HINGES T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630

1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE

T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 QC12 630

1 EA EXIT DEVICE LD-12-19-55-8876

ETL LC QC12 630





1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 434ARL LAR AL



1 EA W/S SET S88 LAR BLK

1 EA DPS 1076D BLK

NOTES:1. INTEGRATION WITH ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM REQUIRED.2. FAIL SECURE ELECTRIC TRIM3. THE HINGES AND WIRE HARNESSES SHALL HAVE A FACTORY MOLEX

CONNECTOR. DO NOT CUT OR REMOVE THE MOLEX CONNECTORS4. DOOR HARNESS-FROM EXIT TO HINGE5. FRAME HARNESS-FROM HINGE TO JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED ABOVE DOOR OPENING

HARDWARE SET 5

2 EA HINGES T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630

1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE

T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 QC12 630





1 EA CLOSER 1431 O 689

1 EA AUTO DOOR BOTTOM

434 APKL LAR K430MPA KIT AL




1 EA STOP 400 626

NOTES:1. INTEGRATION WITH ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM REQUIRED.2. REQUEST TO EXIT AND DPS INTEGRATED INTO LOCKSET.3. THE HINGES AND WIRE HARNESSES SHALL HAVE A FACTORY MOLEX




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

HARDWARE SET 6

3 EA HINGES T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630



1 EA CLOSER 1431 P10 689



1 EA STOP 400 626

HARDWARE SET 7

3 EA HINGES T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 630

1 EA LOCKSET SG-49-8265 LNL LB 630

1 EA CLOSER 1431 P10 689



1 EA STOP 400 626

HARDWARE SET 8

3 EA HINGES T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 630

1 EA LOCKSET SG-49-8265 LNL LB 630




1 EA STOP 400 626

HARDWARE SET 9

3 EA HINGES TA2314 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630

1 EA LOCKSET 8215 LNL 630

1 EA OVERHEAD HOLDER

1023 630






HARDWARE SET 10

3 EA HINGES T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 630



1 EA CLOSER 1431-O 689

1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 434 APKL LAR K430MPA KIT AL




1 EA STOP 400 626



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

HARDWARE SET 11

6 EA HINGES T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630



2 EA CLOSER 1431 CPSH 689

1 EA FLUSH BOLT 1949 TOP ONLY 626

1 EA COORDINATOR 2600 LAR 600

1 EA MEETING STILE 369AP LAR AL

1 EA THRESHOLD 271A LAR AL

2 EA DOOR BOTTOM 434ARL LAR K430MPA KIT AL

1 EA SEALS 332CR LAR AL

NOTES: 1. COORDINATOR FILLER BARS AND MOUNTING SHALL BE PROVIDED BRACKETS AS REQ’D

HARDWARE SET 12

3 EA HINGES TA2314 4.5 X 4.5 630





1 EA STOP 400 626

HARDWARE SET 13

1 EA HINGE NOTE 1 630

1 EA REX KIT 855- NOTE 2 630



1 EA DOOR POSITION SWITCH

NOTE 6

NOTES:1. PROVIDE A MCKINNEY 630 HINGE TO MATCH EXISTING SIZE AND WEIGHT

A. FOR HEAVY WEIGHT USE- T4A3386 630 QC12B. FOR STANDARD WEIGHT USE- TA2314 630 QC12

2. PROVIDE SARGENT REX KIT TO WORK WITH THE EXISTING EXIT DEVICE3. THE HINGES AND WIRE HARNESSES SHALL HAVE A FACTORY MOLEX

CONNECTOR. DO NOT CUT OR REMOVE THE MOLEX CONNECTORS4. DOOR HARNESS-FROM EXIT TO HINGE5. FRAME HARNESS-FROM HINGE TO JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED ABOVE DOOR OPENING6. DOOR POSITION SWITCH SHALL BE PROVIDED TO WORK IN THE EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. FOR CONCEALED MOUNT APPLICATIONS USE A INTERLOGIX 1076B. FOR A SURFACE MOUNT APPLICATION USE A INTERLOGIX 2700

7. SUPPLIER SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND FIELD CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING MATERIAL



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

HARDWARE SET 14

1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE

9500 FAIL SECURE NOTE 1 630

1 EA WIRE HARNESS AS REQ’D LAR NOTES 2

NOTES:1. PROVIDE A HES ELECTRIC STRIKE TO WORK IN EXISTING CONDITIONS2. FRAME HARNESS FROM ELECTRIC STRIKE TO JUNCTION BOX. THE WIRE HARNESS SHALL

HAVE FACTORY MOLEX CONNECTORS.3. SUPPLIER SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND FIELD CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING

MATERIAL4. EXISTING DPS SHALL BE REUSED

HARDWARE SET 15





1 EA DOOR POSITION SWITCH

NOTE 6




CONNECTOR. DO NOT CUT OR REMOVE THE MOLEX CONNECTORS4. DOOR HARNESS-FROM EXIT TO HINGE5. FRAME HARNESS-FROM HINGE TO JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED ABOVE DOOR OPENING6. DOOR POSITION SWITCH SHALL BE PROVIDED TO WORK IN THE EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. FOR CONCEALED MOUNT APPLICATIONS USE A INTERLOGIX 1076B. FOR A SURFACE MOUNT APPLICATION USE A INTERLOGIX 2700

7. SUPPLIER SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND FIELD CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING MATERIAL



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

HARDWARE SET 16

2 EA HINGES T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630

1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE

T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 QC12 630

1 EA EXIT DEVICE LD-12-19-55-8876

ETL LC QC12 630









1 EA DPS 1076D BLK

NOTES:1. INTEGRATION WITH ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM REQUIRED.2. FAIL SECURE ELECTRIC TRIM3. THE HINGES AND WIRE HARNESSES SHALL HAVE A FACTORY MOLEX CONNECTOR. DO NOT CUT OR REMOVE THE MOLEX CONNECTORS4. DOOR HARNESS-FROM EXIT TO HINGE5. FRAME HARNESS-FROM HINGE TO JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED ABOVE DOOR OPENING

HARDWARE SET 17

2 EA HINGES T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630

1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE

T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 QC12 630











1 EA STOP 400 626

NOTES:1. INTEGRATION WITH ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM REQUIRED.2. REQUEST TO EXIT AND DPS INTEGRATED INTO LOCKSET.3. THE HINGES AND WIRE HARNESSES SHALL HAVE A FACTORY MOLEX CONNECTOR. DO NOT CUT OR REMOVE THE MOLEX CONNECTORS4. DOOR HARNESS-FROM EXIT TO HINGE5. FRAME HARNESS-FROM HINGE TO JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED ABOVE DOOR OPENING

HARDWARE SET 18



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

1 EA DOOR CORD LAR NOTE 1 630




1 EA DOOR CLOSER TB 1431 CPS NOTE 6 EN

NOTES:1. PROVIDE A SECURITRON TSB-DOOR CORD2. PROVIDE SARGENT REX KIT TO WORK WITH THE EXISTING EXIT DEVICE3. THE HINGES AND WIRE HARNESSES SHALL HAVE A FACTORY MOLEX

CONNECTOR. DO NOT CUT OR REMOVE THE MOLEX CONNECTORS4. DOOR HARNESS-FROM EXIT TO HINGE5. FRAME HARNESS-FROM HINGE TO JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED ABOVE DOOR OPENING6. DOOR CLOSER SHALL HAVE A DROP PLATE TO COVER THE EXISTING DOOR PREPS7. SUPPLIER SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND FIELD CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING

MATERIAL

HARDWARE SET 19

2 EA HINGES T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630

1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE

T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 QC12 630











1 EA STOP 400 626

NOTES:1. INTEGRATION WITH ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM REQUIRED.2. REQUEST TO EXIT AND DPS INTEGRATED INTO LOCKSET.3. THE HINGES AND WIRE HARNESSES SHALL HAVE A FACTORY MOLEX CONNECTOR. DO NOT CUT OR REMOVE THE MOLEX CONNECTORS4. DOOR HARNESS-FROM EXIT TO HINGE5. FRAME HARNESS-FROM HINGE TO JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED ABOVE DOOR OPENING

HARDWARE SET 20








CONNECTOR. DO NOT CUT OR REMOVE THE MOLEX CONNECTORS4. DOOR HARNESS-FROM EXIT TO HINGE5. FRAME HARNESS-FROM HINGE TO JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED ABOVE DOOR OPENING6. SUPPLIER SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND FIELD CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING

MATERIAL



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

HARDWARE SET 21








CONNECTOR. DO NOT CUT OR REMOVE THE MOLEX CONNECTORS4. DOOR HARNESS-FROM EXIT TO HINGE5. FRAME HARNESS-FROM HINGE TO JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED ABOVE DOOR OPENING6. SUPPLIER SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND FIELD CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING

MATERIAL

HARDWARE SET 22

2 EA CONT HINGE CFMHD1 LAR QC-12 SER AL

1 EA EXIT DEVICE LD-19-55-56-AD-8410

106 LC QC12 630

1 EA EXIT DEVICE LD-19-55-56-AD-8410

EO QC12 630


2 EA PULLS BF 158 12-HD 630



NOTES:1. INTEGRATION WITH ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM REQUIRED.2. THRESHOLD, DOOR SWEEPS AND GASKETING SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE DOOR SUPPLIER 3. THE HINGES AND WIRE HARNESSES SHALL HAVE A FACTORY MOLEX CONNECTOR. DO NOT CUT OR REMOVE THE MOLEX CONNECTORS4. DOOR HARNESS-FROM EXIT TO HINGE5. FRAME HARNESS-FROM HINGE TO JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED ABOVE DOOR OPENING6. THE EXISTING AUTO DOOR OPERATOR SHALL BE REUSED

HARDWARE SET 23



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

2 EA HINGES T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630

1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE

T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 QC12 630











NOTES:1. INTEGRATION WITH ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM REQUIRED.2. REQUEST TO EXIT AND DPS INTEGRATED INTO LOCKSET.3. THE HINGES AND WIRE HARNESSES SHALL HAVE A FACTORY MOLEX


END OF 087100

GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1


SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Glass for interior doors, interior borrowed lites, and interior storefront framing. 2. Glazing sealants and accessories.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.




A. Product Certificates: For glass.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Guardian Industries Corp.; SunGuard. 2. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope™. 3. PPG Flat Glass; PPG Industries, Inc. 4. Viracon, Inc.

B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.

D. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.

GLAZING 08 80 00 - 3


2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.

GLAZING 08 80 00 - 4



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.

C. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

D. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

E. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

F. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

G. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

H. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

I. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

GLAZING 08 80 00 - 5


3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

3.6 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type [GL-1]: Clear fully tempered float glass.

1. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm. 2. Safety glazing required.


NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 1


SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. 2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits. 3. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated on Drawings, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645.

1. Steel Studs and Tracks:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. Provide .0312 inch at walls scheduled to receive tile finishes and at nested studs located on each side of door jambs.

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:



1. Single Long-Leg Track System: ASTM C 645 top track with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top track and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

D. Firestop Tracks: Top track manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. Where not indicated on drawings, minimum base-metal thickness to be 0.033 inch.

F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.

D. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.


a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation. c. United States Gypsum Company.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened.

C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.



D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.5 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension



system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 5. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.


GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1


SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels.


1. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.

2. Section 07 21 00 “Thermal Insulation” for glass-fiber blanket used as acoustic insulation.




A. Mockups: Build mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups for the following:

a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.

2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.

3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.



B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.


a. Continental Building Products, LLC. b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. c. National Gypsum Company. d. Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific. e. United States Gypsum Company.

2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered.

B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.


a. Continental Building Products, LLC. b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products.



c. National Gypsum Company. d. Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific. e. United States Gypsum Company.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

3. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.


a. Continental Building Products, LLC. b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. c. National Gypsum Company. d. Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific. e. United States Gypsum Company.

2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.

3. Long Edges: Tapered. 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges.


a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. c. National Gypsum Company. d. Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific. e. United States Gypsum Company.

2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.

3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet.

2. Shapes:



a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. Expansion (control) joint.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.

2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

C. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

D. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.




a. Hilti, Inc. b. Pecora Corporation. c. United States Gypsum Company.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.



I. Assemblies indicated to receivedsound attenuation blankets: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Locate and install control joints according to ASTM C 840.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated.



3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.


CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13 - 1


SECTION 09 30 13 - CERAMIC TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Ceramic mosaic tile. 2. Glazed wall tile. 3. Stone thresholds. 4. Waterproof membrane for thinset applications.


1. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces.

2. Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board" for glass-mat, water-resistant backer board.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."

C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.

D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.



1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades.



B. Samples for Verification:

1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths.




A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from single source or producer.

1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer.

1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer.

2. Obtain waterproof membrane, except for sheet products, from manufacturer of setting and grouting materials.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer:

1. Stone thresholds.

2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.



C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Basis-of-Design Products: Floor and wall tiles are based on products manufactured by Daltile Corporation. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. American Olean; a division of Dal-Tile Corporation. 2. Crossville, Inc.

B. Ceramic Tile Type [PFT]: Factory-mounted unglazed ceramic mosaic tile.

1. Product: Daltile Keystones.

2. Composition: Porcelain. 3. Module Size: 2 by 2 inches. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 5. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with cushion edges. 6. Surface: Slip resistant, with abrasive admixture. 7. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 8. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range from color

Groups 1 & 2. 9. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Ceramic Tile Type [CT-1]: Glazed wall tile.

1. Product: Daltile Semi-gloss.

2. Module Size: 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches. 3. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 4. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 5. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 6. Finish: Bright, opaque glaze. 7. Tile Color and Pattern: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s price groups 1 &

2. 8. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 9. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable.

Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:

a. Base for Thinset Mortar Installations: Straight, module size 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches. b. External Corners for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, same size as

adjoining flat tile. c. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle

pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.

D. Ceramic Tile Type [CT-2]: Glazed wall tile.







a. External Corners for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, same size as adjoining flat tile.

b. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.

E. Ceramic Tile Type [CT-3]: Glazed wall tile.





a. Base for Thinset Mortar Installations: Straight, module size 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches. b. External Corners for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, same size as

adjoining flat tile. c. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle

pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.

2.4 THRESHOLDS

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes.

1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.

B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503/C 503M, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 according to ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241/C 241M and with honed finish.

1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining.



2.5 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

B. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Laticrete International, Inc ; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane. or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Custom Building Products. b. MAPEI Corporation.

2.6 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide MAPEI Corporation; Ultraflex™ 2 or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Custom Building Products. b. Laticrete International, Inc.

2.7 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, consisting of white or gray cement and white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.

B. Standard Cement Grout - Floors: ANSI A118.6.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide MAPEI Corporation; Keracolor™ S or a comparable product by one of the following:


C. Standard Cement Grout – Walls: ANSI A118.6.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide MAPEI Corporation; Keracolor™ U or a comparable product by one of the following:



A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.



B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

2.9 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified.

b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding.

3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.

4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from



other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush.

F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints.

3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.

G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:

1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/8 inch. 2. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.

H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them.

J. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated.



1. Do not extend waterproofing under thresholds set in modified dry-set mortar. Fill joints between such thresholds and adjoining tile set on waterproofing with elastomeric sealant.

3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate.

B. Allow waterproofing to cure and verify by testing that it is watertight before installing tile or setting materials over it.


A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written

instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.

3.7 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F122; thinset mortar on waterproof membrane.

a. Ceramic Tile Type: PFT. b. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: Standard sanded cement grout.

B. Interior Wall Installations, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring:



1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W245 or TCNA W248; thinset mortar on glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum backer board.

a. Ceramic Tile Type: CT-1, CT-2 and CT-3. b. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout.


ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 1


SECTION 09 51 13 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings.





B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size.

C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of sizes indicated below:

1. Acoustical Panels: Set of 6-inch-square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.

2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- long Samples of each type, finish, and color.


A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.



3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and its supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS [ACT-1]

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World Industries, Inc; FINE FISSURED 1728 or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Chicago Metallic Corporation.

2. United States Gypsum Company.

B. Classification: Provide panels as follows:



1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted .

2. Pattern: CE (perforated, small holes and lightly textured).

C. Color: White.

D. Light Reflectance (LR): Not less than 0.85.

E. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 30.

F. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.55.

G. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.

H. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.

J. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard broad spectrum, antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273, ASTM D 3274, or ASTM G 21 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

2.4 ACOUSTICAL PANELS [ACT-2]

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World Industries, Inc; ULTIMA VECTOR or a comparable product by one of the following:



B. Classification: Provide panels as follows:

1. Type and Form: Type IV, mineral base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2, water felted, with DuraBrite® acoustically transparent membrane.

2. Pattern: E (lightly textured).

C. Color: White.

D. Light Reflectance (LR): Not less than 0.90.

E. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 30.

F. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.70.

G. Edge/Joint Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system members.

H. Thickness: 3/4 inch.

I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.



J. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard broad spectrum, antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273, ASTM D 3274, or ASTM G 21 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

K. Location: Install at upper 12’-0” high ceilings on 1st and 2nd floors where either existing acoustical ceiling panels have been damaged from either selective demolition operations or new work, or where new panels are required.

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM [MSP-1]

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World Industries, Inc; PRELUDE XL 15/16” EXPOSED TEE or a comparable product by one of the following:



B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized, G30 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch-wide metal caps on flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.

2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Match existing type.

3. Face Design: Flat, flush.

4. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel.

5. Cap Finish: Painted white.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

1. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

2. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but not less than 0.106-inch-diameter wire.



2.7 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Armstrong World Industries or one of the following:

1. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 2. United States Gypsum Company.

B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

1. Edge moldings shall fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant. 2. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable,

synthetic-rubber sealant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.

B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.

7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.

8. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.

9. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with postinstalled anchors.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.



F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide precise fit.

1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings.

2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.

3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage.

B. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.


RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 - 1


SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Thermoplastic-rubber base. 2. Rubber molding accessories.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long.



1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.



C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 THERMOPLASTIC-RUBBER BASE (RWB)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Johnsonite; a Tarkett company; or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Roppe Corporation, USA.

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).

1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous). 2. Style and Location:

a. Style A, Straight: Provide in areas with carpet. b. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient floor coverings.

C. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D. Height: 4 inches.

E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

H. Colors: 48 Grey.

2.2 RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORIES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Johnsonite; a Tarkett company; or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Roppe Corporation, USA.

B. Rubber Adaptor:

1. Product: CTX-XX-A. 2. Location: Carpet to luxury vinyl tile (LVT) or vinyl composition tile (VCT). 3. Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s full range of colors.

C. Rubber Wheeled Traffic Transition:

1. Product: CTX-XX-P. 2. Location: Carpet to concrete. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s full range of colors.



2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.



D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

G. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.


RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19 - 1


SECTION 09 65 19 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Luxury vinyl floor tile. 2. Recycled rubber floor tile.



B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.




A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.



1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated.

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required.


A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.




A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUXURY VINYL FLOOR TILE (LVT)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mohawk Group, Select Step – Wood.

B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700.

1. Class: Class III, Printed Film Vinyl Tile. 2. Type: B, Embossed Surface.

C. Gauge: .118 inch (3 mm).

D. Wear Layer: 20 mil (0.5 mm).

E. Size: 6 by 48 inches.

F. Colors and Patterns: P012S Natural Wheat.

2.2 RECYCLED RUBBER FLOOR TILE (RFT)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Amorim Rubber Flooring, Standard SportsFloor or comparable product.

B. Thickness: .25 inch.

C. Size: 36 by 36 inches.

D. Colors and Patterns: 425-10 Gray (10% Gray).




A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by floor tile manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives

and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas.

a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.



D. Do not install floor tiles until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles square with room axis.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

G. Adhere floor tiles to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.



D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply two coat(s).

E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.


TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 1


SECTION 09 68 13 - TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes modular carpet tile.


1. Section 02 41 19 "Selective Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings. 2. Section 09 65 13 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and

accessories installed with carpet tile.



1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures. b. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. c. Review subfloor preparation procedures.



1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance.

2. Include manufacturer's written installation recommendations for each type of substrate.

B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch-long Samples.



B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.




A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.



1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd..


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level.


A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard."


A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.




a. More than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, and runs. b. Dimensional instability. c. Excess static discharge. d. Loss of tuft-bind strength. e. Loss of face fiber. f. Delamination.

3. Warranty Period: As follows:

a. Lifetime antimicrobial protection. b. Lifetime face fiber wear. c. Lifetime antistatic. d. Lifetime floor compatability. e. Lifetime color pattern permanency. f. Lifetime floor release. g. Lifetime cushion resiliency. h. Lifetime moisture resistance. i. Lifetime delamination of backing. j. Lifetime staining/soiling. k. Lifetime dimensional stability. l. Lifetime tuft bind. m. Lifetime edge ravel.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET TILE (CPT)

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

1. Milliken & Company; Theory 2.0, Stacks 2.0.

B. Design: Stacks 2.0.

C. Color: STK03-118-97-48-Grey Matter.

D. Construction: Tufted, textured loop.

E. Tile Size: 39.4 inch x 39.4 inch (1 m x 1 m).

F. Yarn Type: Milliken-Certified WearOn Nylon Type 6,6.

G. Tufted Face Weight: 20 oz./ sq. yd..

H. Gauge: 1/10.

I. Stiches: 10.3 per inch.

J. Tufts: 103/sq. in.

K. Finished Pile Height: 0.14 inch.

L. Finished Pile Thickness: 0.11 inch.



M. Average Density (Finished): 7,793.

N. Nominal Total Thickness: 0.35 inch.

O. Nominal Total Weight: 104 oz./sq. yd.

P. Primary Backing/Backcoating: PVC-free Comfort Plus ES Cushion.

Q. Backing System: <Insert proprietary name>.

R. Applied Treatments:

1. Soil-Resistance Treatment: StainSmart. 2. Antimicrobial Treatment: AlphaSan AF Built-In Protector.

S. Performance Characteristics:

1. Appearance Retention Rating: Severe traffic, 3.5 minimum according to ASTM D 7330. 2. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm according to NFPA 253. 3. Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch of specified size dimensions, as determined by

physical measurement. 4. Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less according to ISO 2551 (Aachen Test). 5. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, according to AATCC 165. 6. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 80 hours AFU (AATCC fading units)

according to AATCC 16, Option E. 7. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV according to AATCC 134.

2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile, and are recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance.

B. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

C. Concrete Slabs: Verify that finishes are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.



1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas.

a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

c. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standards" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers.

D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 18, "Modular Carpet" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

C. Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

D. Maintain pile-direction patterns recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.



H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standard," Section 20, "Protecting Indoor Installations."

C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.


SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS 09 84 33 - 1


SECTION 09 84 33 - SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes shop-fabricated, acoustical panel units tested for acoustical performance, including the following:

1. Sound-absorbing wall panels.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

B. SAA: Sound Absorption Average.





1. Include fabric facing, panel edge, core material, and mounting indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For unit assembly and installation.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting devices and details. 2. Include details at panel head, base, joints, and corners; and details at ceiling, floor base,

and wall intersections. Indicate panel edge profile and core materials. 3. Include details at cutouts and penetrations for other work. 4. Include direction of fabric weave and pattern matching.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fabric facing.

1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving color or finish selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Fabric: Full-width by approximately 36-inch- long Sample, but not smaller than required to show complete pattern repeat, from dye lot to be used for the Work, and with specified treatments applied. Mark top and face of fabric.

2. Panel Edge: 12-inch-long Sample(s) showing each edge profile, corner, and finish. 3. Core Material: 12-inch-square Sample at corner. 4. Mounting Devices: Full-size Samples. 5. Assembled Panels: Approximately 36 by 36 inches, including joints and mounting

methods.




A. Product Certificates: For each type of unit.

B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of unit to include in maintenance manuals. Include fabric manufacturers' written cleaning and stain-removal instructions.


A. Furnish extra materials from same production run that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fabric: For each fabric, color, and pattern installed, provide length equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 10 sq. yd., full width of bolt.

2. Mounting Devices: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than five devices, including unopened adhesives.


A. Comply with fabric and unit manufacturers' written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and handling.

B. Deliver materials and units in unopened bundles and store in a temperature-controlled dry place with adequate air circulation.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install units until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work at and above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Air-Quality Limitations: Protect units from exposure to airborne odors, such as tobacco smoke, and install units under conditions free from odor contamination of ambient air.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace units and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Acoustical performance. b. Fabric sagging, distorting, or releasing from panel edge. c. Warping of core.



2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain wall units specified in this Section from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Units shall comply with "Surface-Burning Characteristics" or "Fire Growth Contribution" Subparagraph below, or both, as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

2. Fire Growth Contribution: Comply with acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 265 Method B Protocol or NFPA 286.

2.3 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS

A. Sound-Absorbing Wall Panel: Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of facing material laminated to front face, edges, and back edge border of core.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Conwed Designscape Wall Technology; an Ownens Corning Corporation, Respond A Series Acoustical Panels or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Acoustical Panel Systems (APS, Inc.). b. Acoustical Solutions, Inc. c. Armstrong World Industries. d. AVL Systems, Inc. e. Decoustics Limited; a Saint Gobain company. f. Lamvin, Inc. g. Sound Management Group LLC.

2. Mounting: Back mounted with manufacturer's standard metal clips or bar hangers, secured to substrate.

3. Core: Composite core of dimensionally stable rigid fiberglass. 4. Edge Construction: Manufacturer's standard chemically hardened core with no frame. 5. Edge Profile: Chamfered (beveled). 6. Corner Detail in Elevation: Square with continuous edge profile indicated. 7. Facing Material: Recycled polyester fabric.



8. Acoustical Performance: Sound absorption NRC of not less than 0.70 according to ASTM C 423 for Type A mounting according to ASTM E 795.

9. Nominal Thickness: 3/4 inch. 10. Panel Width: 32 inches. 11. Panel Height: 40 inches.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Core Materials:

1. Glass-Fiber Board: ASTM C 612; of type standard with manufacturer; nominal density of 6 to 7 lb/cu. ft., unfaced, and dimensionally stable, molded rigid board; and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

B. Facing Material: Fabric from same dye lot; color and pattern as indicated by manufacturer's designations.

1. Manufacturer <Insert manufacturer>: 2. Product Line/Pattern: <Insert product name or designation>. 3. Style Number: <Insert number>. 4. Color: <Insert name or number, or both>. 5. Fiber Content: 100 percent recycled polyester. 6. Width: [54 inches] [66 inches] <Insert dimension>. 7. Source: <Insert fabric-vendor's name>. 8. Applied Treatments: Stain resistance and flame retardant.

C. Mounting Devices: Concealed on back of unit, recommended by manufacturer to support weight of unit, and as follows:

1. Metal Clips or Bar Hangers: Manufacturer's standard two-part metal "Z" clips, with one part of each clip mechanically attached to back of unit and the other part to substrate, designed to permit unit removal.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Standard Construction: Use manufacturer's standard construction unless otherwise indicated; with facing material applied to face, edges, and back border of dimensionally stable core; and with rigid edges to reinforce panel perimeter against warpage and damage.

B. Edge Hardening: For glass-fiber board cores, chemically harden core edges and areas of core where mounting devices are attached.

C. Facing Material: Apply fabric facing fully covering visible surfaces of unit; with material stretched straight, on the grain, tight, square, and free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive, or other visible distortions or foreign matter.

1. Square Corners: Tailor corners. 2. Fabrics with Directional or Repeating Patterns or Directional Weave: Mark fabric top and

attach fabric in same direction so pattern or weave matches in adjacent units.

D. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Plus or minus 1/16 inch for the following:

1. Thickness.



2. Edge straightness. 3. Overall length and width. 4. Squareness from corner to corner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fabric, fabricated units, substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting unit performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in locations indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, install units with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other units, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installation of units using type of mounting devices indicated. Mount units securely to supporting substrate.

C. Align fabric pattern and grain [with adjacent units] [as indicated on Drawings].

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/16 inch in 48 inches, noncumulative.

B. Variation of Joint Width: Not more than 1/16-inch variation from hairline in 48 inches, noncumulative.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials.

B. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.


INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 1


SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:

1. Concrete. 2. Steel and iron. 3. Galvanized metal. 4. Wood. 5. Gypsum board.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

2. Indicate VOC content.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.



C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.



1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Products: Product selections listed in the Interior Painting Schedule are based on products manufactured by Sherwin-Williams Company (The). Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named products or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Glidden Professional. 3. PPG Architectural Coatings.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Wood: 15 percent. 3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

H. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood

filler. Sand smooth when dried.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed

surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.



5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:

1. Water-Based Concrete Floor Sealer System:

a. First Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, matching topcoat.

b. Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99.

1) SW H&C Concrete Sealer Wet Look Water-Based.



B. Steel Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134.

1) SW Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer Off White B66W00310.

b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #153.

1) SW Pro Industrial High Performance Acrylic Semi-Gloss Extra White B66W00651.

2) Color: Verify color with Architect.

C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates – Hollow Metal Door Frames:







2) Color: SW 2017 Dorian Gray.

D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates - Miscellaneous:







2) Color: Verify color with Architect.

E. Wood Substrates: Windows.



1. Latex over Latex Primer System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39.

1) SW PrepRite ProBlock Latex Primer/Sealer White B51W00620.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss

Level 5), MPI #153.


2) Color: SW 6126 Navajo White.

F. Gypsum Board Substrates - Walls:

1. Latex over Latex Sealer System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.

1) SW Promar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer White B28W02600.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #44.

1) SW Promar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-Shel Extra White B20W02651.

2) Color: SW 6126 Navajo White.

G. Gypsum Board Substrates - Ceilings:

1. Latex over Latex Sealer System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.

1) SW Promar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer White B28W02600.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #53.

1) SW Promar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat Extra White B30W02651.

2) Color: SW 7005 Pure White.


ROOM-IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE 10 14 2313 - 1


SECTION 10 14 23.13 - ROOM-IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes room-identification signs that are directly attached to the building.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard.



B. Shop Drawings: For room-identification signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille,

and layout for each sign at least half size.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish.

1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows:

1. Room-Identification Signs: Full-size Sample. 2. Full-size Samples, if approved, will be returned to Contractor for use in Project.

E. Product Schedule: For room-identification signs. Use same designations indicated on Drawings or specified.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.



1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image. c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the 2012 Florida Accessibility Code for Building Construction.

2.2 ROOM-IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

A. Room-Identification Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mohawk Sign Systems; Graphic Process Series 200A – Sand Carved using Format D or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. b. Best Sign Systems, Inc. c. InPro Corporation (IPC). d. Nelson-Harkins Industries.

2. Sign Material: Melamine plastic laminate, approximately 1/8” thick with contrasting color core. The melamine shall be non-static, fire-retardant and self-extinguishing. The plastic laminate shall be impervious to most acids alkalis, alcohol, solvents, abrasives and boiling water.

a. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.

a. Edge Condition: Square cut. b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Rounded to radius indicated.

4. Mounting: Surface mounted to wall with two-face tape. 5. Letterform: As indicated on drawings.. 6. Copy Position: As indicated on drawings. 7. Text and Typeface: Accessible raised characters and Braille. Finish raised characters to

contrast with background color, and finish Braille to match background color. 8. Size: As indicated on drawings.



2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch thick, with adhesive on both sides.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

B. Signs with Changeable Message Capability: Fabricate signs to allow insertion of changeable messages as follows:

1. For slide-in changeable inserts, fabricate slot without burrs or constrictions that inhibit function. Window inserts by Owner.

2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that

would impair installation.

B. Accessibility: Install signs in locations on walls as indicated on Drawings.

C. Mounting Methods:

1. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage tape adhesive.




A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.

END OF SECTION 10 14 23.13

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 1


SECTION 10 28 00 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Custodial accessories.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.



1. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation.

B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify accessories using designations indicated.


A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, visible silver spoilage defects.



2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Source Limitations: Obtain public-use washroom accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser (TBA-1):

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc; B-2740 or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. American Specialties, Inc. b. Bradley Corporation.

2. Description: Double-roll dispenser. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with theft-resistant spindle. 5. Capacity: Designed to accommodate up to 6-inch- diameter tissue rolls. 6. Material and Finish: Satin-finish aluminum bracket with plastic spindle.

C. Paper Towel (Roll) Dispenser (TBA-2):

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Bay West; 76500 Silohouette® OptiServ Hand Free Dispenser.

1) Note: Design intent is to match Owner’s existing paper towel dispensers located in the existing 1st and 2nd floor Men’s and Women’s toilet rooms. If product specified does not match existing, notify Architect during submittal process and provide product data for the correct model.

2. Description: Lever-actuated mechanism permitting controlled delivery of paper rolls in preset lengths per stroke.

3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Minimum Capacity: 8-inch- (203-mm-) wide, 800-foot- (244-m-) long roll. 5. Material and Finish: ABS plastic, black. 6. Lockset: Tumbler type.

D. Waste Receptacle (TBA-3):

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc; B--43644 or a comparable product by one of the following:


2. Mounting: Open top, recessed. 3. Minimum Capacity: 12.8 gallon. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).



5. Liner: Reusable molded plastic bag holder sleeve with 20-gauge stainless steel, U-shaped support strap.

E. Liquid-Soap Dispenser (TBA-4):

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. GOJO Foaming Soap Push Dispenser.

1) Note: Design intent is to match Owner’s existing soap dispensers located in the existing 1st and 2nd floor Men’s and Women’s toilet rooms. If product specified does not match existing, notify Architect during submittal process and provide product data for the correct model.

2. Description: Designed for dispensing antibacterial soap in foam form. 3. Mounting: Vertically oriented, surface mounted. 4. Capacity: 1,250 mL. 5. Materials: ABS plastic, dove gray. 6. Refill Indicator: Window type.

F. Grab Bar (TBA-5):



2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin).

4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches. 5. Configuration and Length: Straight, 36 inches long.

G. Grab Bar (TBA-6):



2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed 3. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 4. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin).

5. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches. 6. Configuration and Length: Straight, 42 inches long.

H. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit (TBA-7):





2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover. 4. Receptacle: Removable. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

I. Seat-Cover Dispenser (TBA-8):



2. Mounting: Surface mounted.

3. Minimum Capacity: 500 seat covers. 4. Exposed Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

J. Mirror Unit (TBA-9):



2. Frame: Stainless-steel channel.

a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below.

a. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove.

4. Size: 18-inches x 36-inches.

K. Robe Hook (TBA-10):



2. Description: Single-prong unit.

3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).



2.2 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES

A. Source Limitations: Obtain custodial accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Mop and Broom Holder (TBA-11):

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc; B224 or a comparable product by one of the following:


2. Description: [Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf] <Insert description>.

3. Length: 36 inches. 4. Hooks: Three. 5. Mop/Broom Holders: Four, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch-thick stainless steel, 8 inches deep. b. Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch-diameter stainless steel.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

C. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

D. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446.




A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.


FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 44 13 - 1


SECTION 10 44 13 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fire-protection cabinets for the following:

a. Portable fire extinguishers.


1. Section 10 44 16 "Fire Extinguishers."


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semirecessed-, or surface-mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction.

B. Product Schedule: For fire-protection cabinets. Indicate whether recessed, semirecessed, or surface mounted. Coordinate final fire-protection cabinet schedule with fire-extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function.


A. Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.



2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET (FEC)

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsens Manufacturing Company; Architectural Series 2409-6R or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.

C. Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.

1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.

D. Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth.

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet.

F. Door Material: Steel sheet.

G. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame.

H. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).

I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.

J. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

K. Materials:

1. Cold-Rolled Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

a. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat. b. Color: White.

2. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear).



2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick.

2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.

2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated



B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

1. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.


FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 44 16 - 1


SECTION 10 44 16 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.


1. Section 10 44 13 "Fire Protection Cabinets."


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets.

B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire-extinguisher schedule with fire-protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global.

2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsens Manufacturing Company; MP Series or a comparable product by one of the following:


2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,

Appendix B.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.

2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsens Manufacturing Company; 546 Standard Bracket or a comparable product by one of the following:


B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

a. Orientation: Vertical.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Mounting Brackets: 47 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.

B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.


PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 12 36 2313 - 1


SECTION 12 36 23.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes plastic-laminate countertops.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including high-pressure decorative laminate and adhesive for bonding plastic laminate.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures installed in plastic-laminate countertops.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each color, pattern, and surface finish. 2. Wood-grain plastic laminates, 12 by 24 inches, for each pattern and surface finish.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.

B. Product Certificates: For the following:

1. Composite wood and agrifiber products. 2. High-pressure decorative laminate. 3. Adhesives.





A. Do not deliver countertops until painting and similar operations that could damage countertops have been completed in installation areas. If countertops must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.




A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Established Dimensions: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where countertops are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements.

B. Grade: Custom.

C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Formica Corporation. b. Nevamar; a Panolam Industries International, Inc. brand. c. Wilsonart.

D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range in the following categories:

a. Solid colors, gloss or matte finish. b. Wood grains, matte finish. c. Patterns, matte finish.

2. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts.

E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.

F. Core Material: Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue, or exterior-grade plywood.

G. Core Material at Sinks: Marine-grade plywood.

H. Core Thickness: 3/4 inch.



1. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches at front, back, and ends with additional layers of core material laminated to top.

I. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate.

2.2 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent.

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130 . 2. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 3-inch OD, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Doug Mockett & Company, Inc.; EDP Flip-Top Series or a comparable product an alternate manufacturer.

a. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of available colors.


A. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets. If applicable, insert subparagraph to describe conditions where eased edges are not required.

B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

C. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in



diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing countertops, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

B. Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop.

1. Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items.

C. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings.

1. Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed clamping devices located within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints.

D. Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

E. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

F. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop.

1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive. 3. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or

another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer.




A. Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean countertops on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.


SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 6116 - 1


SECTION 12 36 61.16 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid surface material countertops.


A. Product Data: For countertop materials.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

1. Show locations and details of joints. 2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Countertop material, 6 inches square.




A. Maintenance Data: For solid surface material countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements before countertop fabrication is complete.



1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS

A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company; Corian or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. LG Chemical, Ltd. b. Wilsonart.

2. Type: Provide Standard type unless Special Purpose type is indicated. 3. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

2.2 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION

A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Grade: Custom.

B. Configuration:

1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top.

C. Countertops: 3/4-inch- thick, solid surface material.

D. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints.


A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates to receive solid surface material countertops and conditions under which countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet, 1/4 inch maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between planes of adjacent units.

B. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

C. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."


QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS 12 36 6119 - 1


SECTION 12 36 61.19 - QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Quartz agglomerate countertops.


A. Product Data: For countertop materials.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

1. Show locations and details of joints. 2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Countertop material, 6 inches square.




A. Maintenance Data: For quartz agglomerate countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements before countertop fabrication is complete.



1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS

A. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled plastic resin and complying with ICPA SS-1, except for composition.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company;Zodiak or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. LG Chemical, Ltd. b. Wilsonart.

2. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

2.2 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION

A. Fabricate countertops according to quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions and the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Grade: Custom.

B. Configuration:

1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top.

C. Countertops: 3/4-inch- thick, quartz agglomerate.

D. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints.


A. Adhesive: Product recommended by quartz agglomerate manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates to receive quartz agglomerate countertops and conditions under which countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet, 1/4 inch maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between planes of adjacent units.

B. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

C. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."



SECTION 21 00 02 - FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS – PERFORMANCE BASED

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design and provide automatic wet pipe fire sprinkler system in accordance with but not limited to NFPA 101, NFPA 13, local and county codes and all applicable codes set forth by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Discharge from individual heads in the hydraulically most remote area shall be hydraulically calculated to provide a minimum of 10 psi safety margin for the system demand pressure margin of safety for future growth as approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Each system shall include materials, accessories, and equipment inside and outside the building to provide each system complete and ready for use. Design and provide each system to give full consideration to blind spaces, piping, electrical equipment, ducts, HVAC equipment, and access space needed for maintenance of equipment and other construction and equipment in accordance with detailed working drawings to be submitted for approval. Locate sprinkler heads in a consistent pattern with ceiling grid, lights, diffuser, registers and grilles. Provide sprinkler heads and piping system layout. Devices and equipment for fire protection services shall be U.L. listed and/or F.M. approved for use in wet pipe system.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualification of installers.

1. The entire fire protection system shall be fabricated, installed and tested by a company approved by Construction Manager. Contractor shall qualify himself as to experience, insurability and capability by submitting an AIA Document A305, Contractor’s Qualification Statement. Satisfactory completion of similar projects is required.

2. Contractor shall be a state certified contractor to install fire protections systems. 3. Contractor shall submit a copy of the certification for their scope of work.

B. All fire protection systems and equipment shall conform to the applicable standards and requirements of the following:

1. Sprinkler systems: NFPA 13, 2010 Edition 2. Florida Administrative code 61G15-32.003 and 61G15-32.004. 3. Florida Building Code, 2014 Edition 4. Life Safety Code - NFPA 101, 2012 Florida Specific Edition 5. Florida Fire Prevention Code, 2014, 5th Edition 6. Local codes or standards incorporated by the authority having jurisdiction. 7. All components shall be U.L. listed and FM (Factory Mutual) approved and

labeled where applicable. 8. Installation of sprinkler system components shall be per the more stringent or

either U.L. listed or FM (Factory Mutual) approved installation requirements. 9. The entire fire protection system shall be approved by the authority having

jurisdiction. Any adjustments or additions to this system required to secure the approvals, shall be part of the work of this Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Any Requirements by the authority having jurisdiction for shop drawings to be sealed and signed by a professional engineer or registered fire protection engineer shall be the

FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS - PERFORMANCE BASED 21 00 02 - 1


responsibility of the installer. B. Working plans shall be drawn on sheets of uniform size at a scale of not less than 1/8" -

ft., with plan of each floor on reproducible material, and shall show the following data:

1. Name of Owner and Occupant. 2. Location, including street address. 3. Point of compass. 4. Full height cross section, or schematic diagram, including structural member

information if required for clarity and including ceiling construction and method of protection for nonmetallic piping.

5. Location of partitions. 6. Location of fire walls. 7. Occupancy class of each area or room. 8. Location and size of concealed spaces, closets, attics, and bathrooms. 9. Any questionable small enclosures in which no sprinklers are to be installed. 10. Size of city main in street, pressure and whether dead-end or circulating and, if

dead-end, direction and distance to nearest circulating main, city main test results

11. Other sources of water supply, with pressure or elevation. 12. Make, type model, and nominal k-factor of sprinklers, including sprinkler

identification (SIN) number. 13. Temperature rating and location of high temperature sprinklers. 14. Total area protected by each system on each floor. 15. Number of sprinklers on each riser per floor. 16. Total number of sprinklers on each dry pipe system, pre-action system,

combined dry pipe-pre-action system, or deluge system. 17. Approximate capacity in gallons of each dry pipe system. 18. Pipe type and schedule of wall thickness. 19. Where nominal pipe size and cutting lengths of pipe (or center to center

dimensions) are typical it shall be necessary to size only one line. 20. Location and size of riser nipples 21. Type of fittings and joints and location of all welds and bends. The contractor

shall specify on drawing any sections to be shop welded and the type of fittings or formations to be used.

22. Type and locations of hangers, sleeves, braces, and methods of securing sprinklers where applicable.

23. All control valves, check valves, drain pipes and test connections 24. Make, type, model, and size of each alarm or dry pipe valve. 25. Make, type, model, and size of each pre-action or deluge valve. 26. Make, type, and location of each interior and exterior alarm as required by local

Code. 27. Size and location of standpipes, risers, hose outlets, hand hose, monitor nozzles

and related equipment. 28. Underground pipe sizes, lengths, locations, weights, materials, points of

connection to city mains; type and locations of valves, valve indicators, regulators, meters and valve pits; and the depth that the top of pipe is laid below finished grade.

29. Piping provisions for flushing. 30. Where the equipment is to be installed as an addition to an existing system,

enough of the existing system shall be indicated on the plans to make all conditions clear.

31. Hydraulic data nameplate with name and address of contractor. 32. A graphic representation of the scale used on all plans. 33. Name, phone number and address of installing contractor. 34. Hydraulic reference points shown on the plan that correspond with comparable



reference points on the hydraulic calculation sheets. 35. The minimum rate of water application (density), the design, in-rack sprinkler

demand, and the demand required for hose stream, both inside and outside. 36. The total quantity of water and the pressure required noted at a common

reference point for each system. 37. Relative elevations of sprinklers, junction points, and supply or reference points. 38. If room design method is used, all unprotected wall openings throughout the floor

protected. 39. Calculations of loads for sizing and details of sway bracing. 40. The settings for pressure reducing valves. 41. Make, type, model and size of all fire department connections. 42. Information about backflow preventers (type and size). 43. Information about anti-freeze solution used (type and amount). 44. Size and location of hydrants, showing size and number of outlets, and if outlets

are to be equipped with independent gate valve. Whether hose houses and equipment are to be provided and by whom, shall be indicated. Static and residual hydrants that were used in the flow test shall be indicated.

45. Size, location, and piping arrangement of fire department connections 46. In addition to submittals to the authority having jurisdiction furnish to the Architect

copies of working plans in quantities as designated in Division 1 for review and comment. Any adjustments to the installation or materials of the system required by the Architect as noted on the plans shall be part of the work of this section.

C. Approval of the complete system shall be obtained from the authorities having

jurisdiction, and a copy of the same shall be delivered to the Owner’s representative for delivery to owner.

1.4 APPROVAL

A. The installer shall perform all required acceptance tests, complete the contractor’s material and test certificate and forward the certificates to the authority having jurisdiction prior to asking for approval of the installation.

B. When the authority having jurisdiction desires to be present during the conduct of

acceptance tests, the installer shall give advance notification of the time and date the testing will be performed.

C. All acceptance tests shall be in strict compliance with NFPA 13, Latest Edition Chapter

16 ‘Systems Acceptance’ including, but not limited too the following:

1. All piping and attached appurtenances subjected to system working pressure shall be hydrostatically tested at 200 psi (13.8 bar) and shall maintain that pressure without loss for 2 hours.

2. Contractor must fill out the “Contractor’s Material and Test Certification for Aboveground Piping” and submit to the Building Department and Engineer, as stated in NFPA 13, Latest Edition, Chapter 16.

3. Portions of systems normally subject to system working pressures in excess of 150 psi (10.4 bar) shall be tested as described in NFPA 13, Latest Edition, Chapter 16 at a pressure of 50 psi (3.5 bar) in excess of system working pressure.

4. Loss shall be determined by a drop in gauge pressure or visual leakage. 5. The test pressure shall be read from a gauge located at the low elevation point of

the system or portion being tested. 6. Additives, corrosive chemicals such as sodium silicate, or derivates of sodium

silicate, brine, or other chemicals shall not be used while hydrostatically testing systems or stopping leaks.



7. Provisions shall be made for the proper disposal of water used for flushing or testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT

A. Provide sprinkler heads of type indicated and to suit each location.

B. Sprinkler heads in areas with ceilings shall be the recessed pendent type white plated with two pieces and white escutcheon plates. All heads to be brass, chrome, or polyester finish. Sprinkler head guards are to be installed in areas where heads are exposed to damage.

C. Sprinkler heads in areas with no ceiling (no tiles or gypsum board) shall be brass,

chrome, or polyester finish upright sprinkler type. Sprinkler head guards shall be installed in areas where heads are exposed to damages.

D. Side wall heads mounted on a wall or soffit shall be provided with white with two piece

escutcheons.

E. Wax coated/Teflon pendent sprinklers shall be installed in areas prone to high moisture (showers, locker Rooms, etc).

F. Corrosion resistant sprinklers shall be installed in areas prone to corrosion.

G. Pendent sprinklers shall be installed in all areas with lay-in ceilings. Sprinkler shall be

located in the center of the tile.

H. Orifice size for all sprinkler heads shall be a minimum of 1/2 inches.

I. Sprinkler pipe hangers and supports shall be subject to applicable requirements of NFPA 13, Latest Edition.

J. Provide a surface mounted cabinet located in the mechanical equipment or riser room

with spare heads of each type used and wrenches to fit heads in accordance with NFPA 13, Latest Edition.

K. Provide a 4” x 2-1/2” x 2-1/2” siamese connection branded “AUTO. SPKR." with caps and

chains, check valve and ball drip as directed by the local official for connection by the fire department. Siamese to be equal to Potter Roemer series 5521-5522-5023 rough brass finish.

L. Provide water motor gong on the outside wall of the riser location.

M. Provide all appropriate signage to properly identify all fire protection system components.

N. All Manufacturer’s instructions on installation, operation and maintenance shall be

provided to owner upon completion of installation. 2.2 MATERIALS

A. Product Handling:

1. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect fire sprinkler system materials

before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work of all other



trades.

2. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Piping:

1. Pipe shall be new, designed for 175 psi working pressure, conforming to ASTM

specifications and have the manufacturers name and brand, along with the applicable ASTM standard, marked on each length of pipe.

a. Overhead – Steel piping shall be black or galvanized steel.

1) Standard Wall: Overhead piping to be black steel, electric resistance welded and shall comply with the specifications of ASTM-135. Piping 2-1/2” and larger to be schedule 10 and 2” and smaller to be Schedule 40. Threadable thinwall piping may be utilized in lieu of Schedule 40 for 2” and smaller. All pipe and fittings to be in accordance with NFPA-13, latest edition. Cut grooved piping shall not be used with schedule 10 piping.

2) Thin Wall: Overhead pipe of the welded and seamless type specified in ASTM A 53-80 used in welded systems shall have a minimum pipe wall thickness for pressures up to 300 psi as follows: Schedule 10 in sizes up to 5-inch; 0.134 inches for 6-inch; and 0.188 inches for 8-inch pipe. Pipe ends shall be roll grooved or welded in accordance with NFPA 13, Latest Edition. .

b. Underground: All underground pipe and fittings shall be C-900 plastic as

approved by NFPA 24 latest edition. Ductile iron pipe is to be utilized under the building to a point 5’-0” outside the building line. All underground fittings to be mechanical joint per NFPA 24 latest edition.

c. One piece in-building riser, used to transition form fire main supply to the over head fire system. Shall have a CIPS (Cast Iron Pipe Coupler) connection to the underground supply (AWWA C900 PVC and ductile iron pipe, and standard grooved end connection (AWWA C606 or AWWA C207 class D flange) on the building side for connection to the over head system. The in-building riser shall meet the requirements for AWWA C-900 pressure class 200 DR-14 pipe.

C. Fittings:

1. Changes in direction shall be accomplished by the use of fittings suitable for use in sprinkler systems and defined in NFPA 13 Latest Edition. Bushings shall not be used unless written approval is obtained from the Engineer.

a. Steel Pipe Fittings:

1) Fittings shall withstand a cold water working pressure of not less than 175 psi and shall be cast or malleable iron in compliance with the NFPA 13, Latest Edition. Victaulic fittings are equally acceptable.

2) Fittings for pipe size 2-1/2” and under shall be screwed and for pipe sizes 3” and over may be flanged or grooved to suit the NFPA 13, Latest Edition.

3) Flanged fittings shall be cast iron, short body, Class 125, black and in accordance with ANSI B 16.1. Gaskets shall be full face



on 1/8 inch minimum thickness red sheet rubber. Flange bolts shall be hexagon head nuts, cadmium plated, having dimensions in accordance with NSI B 18.2.

4) Weld fittings shall be steel, standard weights, black and in accordance with ANSI B 16.9, ANSI B 16.25, ANSI B16.11 and ASTM A 234.

5) Grooved couplings and mechanical fittings shall be malleable iron, 500 psi working pressure, in accordance with ASTM A 47. The couplings gasket material shall be butyl rubber. Grooved couplings and mechanical fittings shall be tested and listed by UL and/or FM and products of the same manufacturer.

6) Push-on fittings shall not be used.

D. Shut-Off Valves:

1. Except as hereinafter specified, valves used on the system shall be 175 lbs. UL listed and approved by FM Insurance Group.

2. All control valves shall be (a) butterfly type with grooved or wafer body or (b) thread able type. Valves shall be of the indicator type and UL/FM approved. Tyco BFV-N Butterfly Valve or (b) threaded Nibco T-104-0 or approved equal.

3. Check valves shall be UL and FM approved swing check type for 175 psi pressure, as manufactured by Victaulic Crane, or Jenkins.

4. Valves, where noted, shall be supervised type. Supervisory switches at the valve shall be connected to the supervisory circuit of a fire alarm control panel in accordance with NFPA 72 Latest Edition. The “auxiliary switch” is intended for the unsupervised connection to auxiliary equipment in accordance with NFPA-70, National Electric Code. Remote monitoring switches shall be UL and FM approved.

5. Wiring form the supervised valve up to and including the supervisory enunciators will be done under the Electrical Division 16 or 26.

E. Alarm Check Valves and Flow Indicators:

1. Alarm check valve assemblies shall be provided complete with gate valves, test connections, pressure gauges and flow switches.

2. Provide flow indicators where shown and as manufactured by Grinnell Co., or Potter Electric.

3. Flow switches shall be provided with two (2) sets of form ‘C’ (SPDT) contacts. 4. Alarm check valves and flow indicators will be connect to the fire alarm system

under Electrical Division 16 or 26. 5. Alarm check valves for wet, dry or pre-action system shall be as manufactured by

Tyco Fire Products, Viking Sprinkler Company, Grinnell Company, Star Sprinkler Corporation and/or Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Company.

F. Drains for Test Connections: Provisions shall be made to run drain line from sprinkler

test connection to the outside of the building or to the nearest drain. Drain discharge shall comply with all local codes and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Provisions shall be made to facilitate the attachment of drain hose. Drain discharge water away from concrete walkways, etc.

G. Alarm Systems:

1. Provide two normally open and two normally closed 120 volt A.C., rated alarm

contacts on the alarm valves. 2. Alarm contacts to the fire alarm will be connected under Electrical Division 16 or

26, including wiring, conduit and enunciator.



H. Fire Pumps:

1. If required due to available water pressure from utility at the Project Site, this

contractor must furnish and install a set of fire pumps with the following general requirements.

a. The fire pump must be selected, designed, to specifications selected by

Matern Professional Engineering, Inc. b. The following are acceptable manufacturers/suppliers; Aurora Pumps,

Fairbanks Morse Pumps, ITT Pumps. c. Standard fire pumps having capacity and other characteristics scheduled

on the drawings shall be Diesel Motor or Electric Motor driven single stage, double suction, horizontal split case with pump and engine assembled on a common base. Electric pump motor shall be connected to an emergency generator.

d. The pumping units shall be listed by UL and FM approved. Pumping unit shall meet all requirements of NFPA 20, Latest Edition.

e. The Fire Pump shall deliver not less than 150% of rated capacity at a pressure not less than 65% of the rated pressure. Shut-off pressure shall not exceed 120% of rated pressure, Pump shall be given a complete performance test and certified performance curves submitted for approval prior to shipment. Pump shall be hydrostatically tested to twice shut-off pressure, but in no case less than 250 psig.

f. Pump shall be rated to deliver the required system pressure and flow. g. Manufacturer of the main fire pump shall assume single individual

responsibility for the entire fire pumping system including main fire pump, jockey pump, pump controllers, alarm panels and system accessories.

h. Pump manufacturer shall provide the services of a trained representative to supervise the installation and upon completion supervise start up, adjustment and conduct final field acceptance test as required by the AHJ. Representative shall instruct the Owner in operation and maintenance of the system. Contractor and pump manufacturer shall certify in writing, compliance with the above.

I. Pumps:

1. Pump shall have bronze impeller and casing wearing rings, carbon steel shaft, stainless steel shaft sleeves, stuffing boxes with graphite asbestos packing, grease lubricated bearings and flexible drive coupling and coupling guard.

2. Pump and driver shall be mounted on a common base plate of either cast iron of fabricated steel and directly connected through a flexible coupling protected by a suitable guard.

3. Provide name and capacity plate with pump. 4. Prior to shipment, the pump and motor for this project shall be thoroughly shop

tested as a complete unit by the pump manufacturer in conformance with the requirements of NFPA 20 Latest Edition. This shall include a hydrostatic test to twice working pressure, but in no case to less than 250 psig. A certified characteristic curve showing the pump performance based upon the results of the shop test shall be furnished to the purchaser. The test data shall include a plot of engine speed vs. pump capacity over the entire range from shut off beyond 150% of design capacity.

J. Pump Accessories:

1. The following accessories as required by NFPA 20 Latest Edition shall be



furnished with the pumps:

a. Concentric discharge increaser. b. Eccentric suction reducer. c. Suction and discharge pressure gauges. d. Test header with vales. e. Automatic air release valve. f. Coupling guards. g. Casing relief valve. h. Main relief valve. i. Enclosed cone.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SYSTEM DESIGN CONDITIONS

A. The sprinkler piping shall be hydraulically designed and shall be governed by NFPA 13 Latest Edition, Chapter 11, Hydraulically Designed Sprinkler Systems.

B. Installation of the fire protection systems shall be entrusted to none but fully experienced

workers. The fire protection system shall be installed by responsible parties equipped to do the work under the approved detailed plans and specifications.

C. The contractor for the work of this section shall meet all requirements of NFPA 13 Latest

Edition, "Qualifications".

D. Provide sleeves and escutcheon plates at all pipe/wall penetrations.

E. During progress of work, maintain an accurate record of all changes made in the fire system installation from layout materials shown on the approved shop drawings. Provide the owner with copies of a drawing with all field changes indicated by a cloud, and labeled “As-Builds” to be included with close out documents.



SJC BUILDING SERVICES RENOVATION & REMODELING ARCHITECT'S PROJECT #15056ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 05 01 - 1

SECTION 22 05 01 - GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. General requirements for plumbing systems.

B. Trench excavation, pumping, backfilling and compaction for underground piping & plumbing.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. The scope of work shall include complete plumbing systems as shown on the Drawings andspecified herein.

1.3 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Prior to start of any work, the successful Contractor shall meet with the Architect to determine thatno questions remain concerning the intent of the Drawings or Specifications. The Contractor shalloutline his method of procedure and bring up for discussion and decision any questions concerningthe project. No work shall be performed prior to this meeting. The Architect shall set the date, timeand place of conference.

1.4 CODES, ORDINANCES AND PERMITS:

A. Comply with the Florida Plumbing Code, latest edition.

B. Obtain information on all code restrictions and requirements. In case of conflict between theContract Documents and a governing code or ordinance, such conflict shall be immediately broughtto the attention of the Architect for resolution. Extra payment will not be allowed for Work requiredby code restrictions except through written agreement with the Owner.

C. Apply for, obtain, and pay for all required permits and inspection certificates. Final payment iscontingent upon delivery of such certificates to the Architect.

D. All materials and equipment shall be new and first class in every respect. As far as is practical,similar products shall be by one manufacturer. Where applicable, all materials and equipment shallbear the Underwriters' Laboratories seal or ASME code stamp. Certificates to this effect shall befurnished to the Architect upon request.

1.5 SITE INSPECTION

A. Visit the site and thoroughly inspect conditions affecting the Work before submitting Bid. Assumeresponsibility for meeting all existing conditions including access and work space limitations.



1.6 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS:

A. Refer to the general Construction Drawings which are bound with the Drawings of this Work forconstruction details, elevations, etc. Architectural and Structural Drawings shall take precedenceover Plumbing Drawings. It is the intent of the Plumbing Drawings to show the generalarrangement of the system and not to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories which may berequired, nor to show exact locations of piping or equipment except where actual dimensions aregiven. All vertical piping shall be located in walls in finished spaces unless otherwise noted.

B. It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications to call for finished Work, tested, and ready foroperation, and in complete conformance with all applicable codes, rules and regulations. Minordetails not usually shown or specified, but manifestly necessary for the proper installation andoperation of the various systems, shall be included in the Work and in the proposal, the same as ifspecified or shown on the Drawings.

C. If any departures from the Drawings and Specifications are deemed necessary, details of suchdepartures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the Architect for approval. Nodepartures shall be made without prior approval of the Architect.

D. Specific reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture or type ofconstruction, etc., by proprietary name, make or catalog number shall be interpreted asestablishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. Substitutesmay be used subject to compliance with requirements set forth in the General Requirements,Division I, and as approved by the Architect.

1.7 MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS

A. Where the name of a concern or manufacturer is mentioned on the Drawings or in Specifications inreference to his required service or product, and no qualifications or specification of such isincluded, then the material gauges, details of manufacturer, finish, etc., shall be in accordance withhis standard practice, directions or specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for anyinfringement of patents, royalties, or copyrights which may be incurred thereby.

B. Equipment scheduled on Drawings was used to arrive at space, maintenance, and utility service. Ifother equipment is submitted and approved, take responsibility for maintaining these space,maintenance, and utility service requirements and cost for any resulting changes including cost tochange electrical service required by substituted equipment.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples plumbing equipment or materials shall be submitted if requested by the Architect. If asample is requested, have the sample delivered to the Architect or arrange for the Architect toexamine it elsewhere. Failure to comply may be cause for rejection.

B. Submit shop drawings or catalog data for Architects approval before purchasing or installing thefollowing items:1. Plumbing Fixtures2. Water Heaters3. Water Coolers4. Piping



5. Insulation

1.9 PERFORMANCE DATA

A. All performance data specified herein shall be considered actual performance of equipment asinstalled. Make suitable allowances if installation details are such that actual operating conditionsunfavorably affect performance as compared to conditions under which the equipment was rated.

1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Provide a minimum of four (4) complete sets of a compilation of catalog data of each manufactureditem of equipment used in the Plumbing Work. In addition to the catalog data, installation, operatingand maintenance data and bill of materials for all operating equipment shall be submitted. Each ofthe four sets of data shall be bound in loose leaf binders and submitted to the Architect before finalpayment is made. A complete double index shall be provided as follows:1. Listing the Products alphabetically by name.2. Listing the names of manufacturer's alphabetically by name together with their addresses and

the names and addresses of local sales representatives.

B. It is the intent of this catalog, operation and maintenance data to provide the Owner with completeinstructions on the proper operation and use, lubrication and periodic maintenance, together withthe source of replacement parts and service, for the items of equipment covered.

1.11 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION

A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish, set and wire all disconnect devices and starters as requiredfor all equipment except for those items furnished with integral disconnect devices and/or starters.

B. Furnish detailed information to the Electrical Contractor on power wiring requirements for allplumbing equipment actually purchased as soon as practical. This shall include all diagrams andinstructions necessary for the Electrical Contractor to make connections properly. If equipmentactually purchased requires larger electrical service than equipment scheduled, arrange and payfor required electrical service change.

C. Coordinate location of equipment and piping with Electrical and HVAC Contractors to maintainclearance for equipment maintenance, avoid interference with duct and HVAC piping runs, and toprevent piping from being installed over electrical panels. If interference develops, the Architect willdecide which equipment, conduit, duct, piping, etc., must be relocated regardless of installationorder. Take responsibility for relocating Plumbing Work, if so ordered, including all associatedcosts.

D. Within 30 days following award of the Contract, report to the Architect, in writing, all real or potentialerrors, ambiguities and/or conflicts on the Plumbing Work or between the trades and obtain anagreement with the Architect on a solution. Those reported after 30 days, except as a result ofunforeseen circumstances, shall be resolved at the discretion of the Architect. Report conflictsresulting from the progress of Work to the Architect immediately or accept the expense ofcorrective work caused by failure to report such a conflict.



1.12 CHANGES

A. Do not make any changes in design without the written approval of the Engineer. Changes indesign means any change which may affect the capacity, reliability, operation or safety of thesystems or any parts thereof, including changes which may be required to conform to localregulations or codes. Minor routing changes that do not alter the general configuration orparameters noted above are acceptable. Notify Engineer when in question.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection, with not less than three years of documented experience.

B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purposespecified and indicated.

C. Products requiring gas or propane connection: Listed and classified by AGA as suitable for thepurpose specified and indicated.

1.14 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Protect all materials and equipment against damage and vandalism during construction. Replaceany damaged material or equipment and place the systems in perfect working condition.

1.15 WARRANTY

A. Provide written warranties as specified in the General Requirements, Division 1, and repair anydefects becoming apparent within the warranty period as directed by the Architect.

B. The warranty shall not cause an obligation to repair damage resulting from accident or improperoperation or care on the part of the Owner.

1.16 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Division 01 for additional general requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION.

A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrastingbackground color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.

B. Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printedmarkings.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Examine the site and all Drawings before proceeding with the layout and installation of the Work.

B. Arrange the Work essentially as shown, exact layout to be made on the job to suit actual conditionsencountered. Confer and cooperate with other trades on the job so all Work will be installed inproper relationship and coordinate precise location of parts with the Work of others.

C. Arrange for required chases, slots and openings with the General Contractor including locations ofrequired pipe sleeves through walls and foundations. Assume liability for cutting or patching madenecessary by failure to make proper arrangements in this respect.

D. Indicated equipment connections are necessarily based on equipment of a given manufacturer. Assume responsibility for proper arrangement of pipes, etc., to connect approved equipment in aproper and approved manner. Follow equipment manufacturer's detailed instructions andrecommendations in the installation and connection of all equipment. In case of conflict betweenmanufacturer's instructions and the Contract Documents, notify the Architect before proceeding. No equipment installation or connections shall be made in a manner that voids the manufacturerswarranty.

E. Install all Work in a neat and workmanlike manner, using only workmen thoroughly qualified in thetrade or duties they are to perform. Rough Work will be rejected.

3.2 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING AND PUMPING

A. Perform all excavation, backfilling and pumping necessary for the completion of the Work inaccordance with the requirements of Excavation and Backfill, Division 02.

B. Excavate trenches suitable in width to provide a minimum of 6" clear space between the barrel ofthe pipe and the trench wall on both sides of the pipe. Accurately grade the trench bottom toprovide uniform bearing and support for each section of the pipe on undisturbed soil at every pointalong its entire length. Take care not to excavate below the depth necessary and excavate bellholes to ensure proper bedding. Backfill over-depths with loose, granular, moist material andthoroughly compact to the depth required.

C. Place and compact backfill material in 6" layers until the pipe has a minimum cover of 12". Placeand compact the remaining material in 12" layers. Grade the surface to a reasonable uniformityand leave the mounding in neat condition as approved by the Architect.

D. Backfill all trenches passing under foundations with concrete to the underside of the foundation andat a 2:1 slope away from each side of the foundation. Backfill all trenches that are parallel anddeeper than foundations with concrete to a point that will place the top of the concrete on a 2:1slope away from the foundation bottom. Do not backfill trenches until all required tests andinspections are completed.

E. Repair or replace all topsoil, shrubbery, sod, sidewalks, streets, walls, etc. disturbed by theexcavation, backfilling or pumping to the satisfaction of the Architect. Repair sidewalks in completeblocks; partial patching will not be accepted.



3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings andvalves. Carefully investigate all conditions affecting the Work to avoid interferences between pipes,ducts, valves, conduits, electrical fixtures and equipment and install as conditions may dictate aspart of this Contract.

3.4 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Permanently identify plumbing equipment such as water heaters, pumps, etc. with permanentplastic tags. Indicate tag identifier used on equipment schedule on plans.

B. Provide pipe tape markers for water piping indicating system and direction of flow. Where pipe sizeis too small for tape markers, provide tags. Separately indicate the following systems as applicablefor the given project:1. Cold Water2. Hot Water3. Hot Water Recirculation4. Compressed Air

3.5 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE

A. After final acceptance of all Work and occupancy of building, provide service to make systemadjustments to suit conditions created by the occupancy; instruct Owner's operating personnel inoperation adjustment and maintenance procedures of system components and acquaint them withlocations and functions of valves, control devices, etc., in the system.

B. The actual time of this service shall be as directed but shall not be less than 4 hours nor exceed 1day. Additional time, if required, to fully prepare Owners operating personnel to operate andmaintain the system shall be as directed by the Owner at the Owner's expense. Quote rates forthis additional time in the Bid Proposal.

3.6 CLEANING AND RUBBISH

A. During the Work, keep the premises clear of rubbish created as a result of the Work. Protect andprevent unnecessary induction of dirt into piping, fixtures and equipment. On completion of theWork, remove all rubbish and debris resulting from the Work and dispose of same.

3.7 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. The Architect will furnish one set of signed and sealed prints of the Drawings and Specifications asissued for this Contract to the prime construction contractor. Use these prints to indicate accuratelyand neatly any deviation in the actual installation from the Drawings as issued. At the completionof the job, deliver the marked-up Drawings to the Architect for a permanent record of the exactlocation of all equipment, pipe runs, etc., as incorporated in the job.



3.8 COMPLETE SYSTEMS

A. Leave all systems completely operative in all details and in satisfactory working condition, asdetermined by the Architect. Furnish and install as part of this Contract all apparatus and materialobviously a part of the systems and necessary for their operation.

END OF SECTION


PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION 22 07 19 - 1

SECTION 22 07 19 - PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Piping insulation.

B. Jackets and accessories.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and ThermalTransmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2013.

B. ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular ThermalInsulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2014.

C. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2015.

D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2014.

E. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.

F. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;National Fire Protection Association; 2006.

G. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; UnderwritersLaboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thicknessfor each service, and locations.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanshipand installation standards will be achieved.


A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.



B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION

A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, whentested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.

2.2 GLASS FIBER

A. Insulation: ASTM C547 ; rigid molded, noncombustible.1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F.2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F.3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisturevapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02 perm-inches.

C. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.

2.3 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION

A. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTMC534/C534M Grade 3; use molded tubular material wherever possible.1. 'K' value: ASTM C 177; 0.27 at 75 degrees F.2. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F.3. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F.4. Maximum Moisture Absorption - Pipe Insulation: 3.5 percent, by weight, when tested in

accordance with ASTM D 1056.5. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.05 perm-inches, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96.6. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.

B. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.

2.4 JACKETS

A. PVC Plastic.1. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.

a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F.b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with

ASTM E96/E96M.d. Thickness: 10 mil.e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Insulate entire system including fittings, valve bodies, unions, flanges, strainer bodies, flexibleconnections, and expansion joints. Insulate using like materials of adjacent piping, or otherinsulation methods as approved. Pump bodies are not required to be insulated.

C. Glass fiber insulated cold water pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing

longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinchexpanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness asadjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

D. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied.

Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoiningpipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

E. Inserts and Shields:1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger.2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.4. Insert configuration: Comply with MSS SP 69, minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and

contour as adjoining insulation.

F. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish atsupports, protrusions, and interruptions. Do not extend through rated walls.

3.3 SCHEDULES

A. Plumbing Systems, Interior:1. Domestic Hot Water Supply (140F or less):

a. Fiberglass insulation with standard jacket, preformed fittings and PVC fitting covers.1) Pipe Size Range: 1-1/4" and smaller: 1" thickness.2) Pipe Size Range: 1-1/2" and larger: 1-1/2" thickness.

2. Domestic Cold Water:a. Fiberglass insulation with vapor barrier jacket, preformed fittings and PVC fitting covers.



b. Insulate cold water piping in areas outside of building insulation system as freezeprotection and condensation protection.

1) Pipe Size Range: All pipe sizes: 1/2" thickness.

END OF SECTION


PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05 - 1

SECTION 22 10 05 - PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.1. Sanitary sewer.2. Domestic water.3. Flanges, unions, and couplings.4. Pipe hangers and supports.5. Valves.


A. Section 22 07 19 - PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION.

B. Section 15146 - Plumbing Specialties


A. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2014(ANSI/ASME B31.9).

B. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) PlasticPiping Systems; 2012.

C. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, andVent Pipe and Fittings; 2014.

D. ASTM D2846/D2846M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) PlasticHot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems; 2009b.

E. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2010).

F. ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe andFittings; 2014.

G. ASTM F437 - Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) PlasticPipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 2009.

H. ASTM F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; 2009.

I. ASTM F439 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic PipeFittings, Schedule 80; 2013.



J. ASTM F441/F441M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) PlasticPipe, Schedules 40 and 80; 2013.

K. ASTM F442/F442M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) PlasticPipe (SDR-PR); 2013.

L. ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2010.

M. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application,and Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.;2009.

N. MSD SP-69 - Manufacturer's Standardized Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection andApplications.

O. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014.

P. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Providemanufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.


A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes.

B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices.

B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installationof backflow prevention devices.


A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.



D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections ofthe work, and isolating parts of completed system.


A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings, and solder and flux (if used), thatcomply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.

2.2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. PVC Pipe: PVC DWV Schedule 40, ASTM D 2665.1. Fittings: PVC.2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

2.3 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665.1. Fittings: PVC.2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

2.4 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. CPVC Pipe: 2" and smaller: ASTM D 2846; larger than 2": F441 Sch 80.1. Fittings: ASTM D 2846; ASTM F 437, ASTM F 438, ASTM F 439; compatible with pipe.2. Joints: Solvent weld with ASTM F 493 solvent cement, with approved primer where required

by code.

2.5 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. CPVC Pipe: 2" and smaller: ASTM D 2846; larger than 2": F441 Sch 80.1. Fittings: ASTM D 2846, ASTM F 437, ASTM F 438, ASTM F 439; compatible with pipe.2. Joints: Solvent weld with ASTM F 493 solvent cement, with approved primer where required

by code.

2.6 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS

A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under:1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions.2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.



B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch:1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed

neoprene gaskets.2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets.

C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end,water impervious isolation barrier.

2.7 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type

using MSS SP- 69 recommendations.2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze hangers.3. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure.4. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp.5. Floor Supports: Concrete pier or steel pedestal with floor flange; fixture attachment.

B. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent:1. Conform to MSS SP-58. Field fabricated components shall conform to MMS SP-89.2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel

clamp.6. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete

pier or steel support.7. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

C. Plumbing Piping - Water:1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.2. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.3. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 Inches to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.5. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange,

and concrete pier or steel support.6. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut,

nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

D. Upper Attachments1. Beam Clamps

a. Beam clamps shall be used where piping is to be suspended from building steel. Clamptype shall be selected on the basis of load to be supported, and load configuration.

b. C-Clamps shall have locknuts and cup point set screws. Top flange c-clamps shall beused when attaching a hanger rod to the top flange of structural shapes. Refer tomanufacturer's recommendation for setscrew torque. Retaining straps shall be used tomaintain the clamps position on the beam where required.

c. Center loaded beam clamps shall be used where specified. Malleable iron or forged steelbeam clamps with cross bolt shall be as required to fit beams.

2. Concrete inserts



a. Cast in place spot concrete inserts shall be used where applicable, either steel ormalleable iron body. Spot inserts shall allow for lateral adjustment and have means forattachment to forms. Select inserts to suit threaded hanger rod sizes.

b. Continuous concrete inserts shall be used where applicable. Channels shall be 12 gauge,ASTM A 570 Grade 33 structural quality carbon steel, complete with styrofoam inserts andend caps with nail holes for attachment to forms. The continuous concrete insert shallhave a load rating of 2,000 lbs/ft. in concrete. Select channel nuts suitable for strut androd sizes.

E. Supplementary Strucrural Supports1. Design and fabricate supports using pre-manufacturered structural quality steel bolted framing

materials suitable for application. Channels shall be roll formed, 12 gauge ASTM A570 Grade33 steel, 1-5/8" x 1-5/8" or greater as required by loading conditions. Use clamps and fittingsdesigned for use with the strut system.

F. Vibration Isolation Supports1. For larger tubing or piping subjected to vibration, use neoprene or spring hangers as required.

G. Accessories1. Hanger Rods shall be threaded both ends, or continuous threaded rods of circular cross

section. Use adjusting locknuts at upper attachments and hangers. No wire, chain, orperforated straps are allowed.

2. Shields shall be 180 degree galvanized sheet metal, 12 inch minimum length, 18 gaugeminimum thickness, designed to match outside diameter of the insulated pipe.

3. Pipe protection saddles shall be formed from carbon steel, 1/8 inch minimum thickness, sizedfor insulation thickness. Saddles for pipe sizes greater than 12 inch shall have a centersupport rib.

H. Finishes1. Indoor Finishes

a. Hangers and clamps for support of bare copper piping shall be coated with copper colored epoxy paint. Additional PVC coating of the epoxy painted hanger shall be used wherenecessary.

b. Hangers for other than bare copper pipe shall be zinc plated in accordance with ASTMB633 or shall have an electro-deposited green epoxy finish.

c. Strut channels shall be pre-galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653 G90 OR have anelectro-deposite epoxy finish.

2. Outdoor and Corrosize Area Finishesa. Hangers and strut located outdoors shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication in

accordance with ASTM A123. All hanger hardware shall be hot dip galvanized or stainlesssteel. Zinc plated hardware is not acceptable for outdoor or corrosive use.

b. Hangers and strut located in corrosive areas shall be type 304 [316] stainless steel withstainless steel hardware.

2.8 BALL VALVES

A. For pipe sizes 2" and Smaller

B. Valves handles in domestic water systems shall have the following colors: red for hot water service;blue for cold water service.

C. Construction: MSS SP-110, 150 psi SWP and 600 psi WOG, full port cast bronze two piece body(no yellow brass containing more than 15% zinc), ASTM B-61, ASTM B-62, or ASTM B-584,



stainless steel ball and stem, TFE seats and seals, blow-out proof stem, lever handle, adjustablememory stops, solder or threaded ends with union.

2.9 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS

A. Sleeves through non-load bearing walls and floors of non-masonry construction shall be 18 gaugegalvanized steel or pre-formed plastic.

B. Sleeves through masonry shall be galvanized steel pipe (load bearing wall) or PVC pipe (non-loadbearing wall or floor). Sleeves through floor slabs shall extend 2" above the finished floor.

C. Sleeves are not required where DWV piping passes through concrete floor slab on grade. Coredrilling of masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in core drilled hole are grouted smooth.

D. Sleeves shall be sized to allow approximately 1/8" gap around the pipe or its insulation.

E. Escutcheon plates for finished spaces will be nickel-plated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls,unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space.

E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

F. Final routing of all piping shall allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, orconnected equipment. Vent piping roof penetrations shall be made using flashing collars which aredesigned to allow for expansion and contraction (Stoneman or equal). Where expansion of ventstack or stack vent exceeds flashing manufacturer's recommendations, provide suitable offset orapproved expansion device to accomodate expansion. Risers shall be securely anchored asrequired and where otherwise indicated. Horizontal runs of more than 50' shall anchored to thestructure about midway to force expansion evenly towards the ends. Flexibility shall be provided



on runouts from mains and risers by installing one or more turns so that piping will spring enough toallow for expansion without straining. Allow adequate space at tees and elbows to avoid shearingof branch lines at structural members or otherwise overstressing joints. If the above conditionscannot be used to avoid overstressing pipe, provide AHJ approved expansion fittings as required indomestic water and DWV lines.

G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulationand access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 07 19.

H. Provide access panels where valves and fittings are not exposed. Panels shall be provided inlocations approved by the Architect and where indicated on the plans, and shall meet fire ratings ofwalls or ceilings. Adjust location of valves/piping when requested.

I. Install all piping in lavatory cabinets and vanities as tight to the rear of the cabinet or vanity aspossible to provide full utilization of the cabinet or vanity for storage.

J. Install all piping so as not to interfere with any electric lighting outlets, duct work, other piping, orequipment. Do not install piping in front of any door or window and avoid interference with anysuch openings. Do not install any piping over any motors, transformers, electrical panels, or otherelectrical equipment.

K. Establish elevations of buried sanitary piping outside the building to ensure not less than 1.5 ft ofcover @ 1/4" per foot grade unless otherwise indicated.

L. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. Flash all ventspassing through roof.

M. All fire rated assembly piping penetrations must be made in accordance with the fire ratedassemblies UL Listing, and approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

N. Refer to Section 220501 for excavation, backfilling and pumping requirements.

O. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

P. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood.

Q. Buried water piping shall be at least 12" deep.

R. Install trap primers in accessible locations. Provide access panels as necessary.

S. Maintain water/sewer horizontal separation of 5', or as allowed by local codes.

T. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855.

U. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors as specified in Part 2. Secure sleeves inposition and location during construction, with sufficient length to pass entirely through walls, floorsor roofs. Sleeves are not required where DWV piping passes through concrete floor slab on grade. Core drilling of masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in core drilled hole are grouted smooth Seal the annular space between the pipe/insulation and the sleevewith sealant conforming to ASTM C 920. For fire rated penetrations, refer to specifications forFirestopping. See also limitations in structural specifications as applicable.



V. Prior to locating building drain and branch lines, confirm piping will not be placed so as to runlengthwise under load bearing portions of or in footings. Adjust placement of pipe as necessary toavoid this condition.

W.Inserts:1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced

concrete beams.3. Comply with requirements and/or limitations on structural plans and specifications. Where

conflict exists, structural requirements shall take priority.4. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.5. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.6. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt

with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.

X. Pipe Hangers and Supports:1. Select and install in accordance with MSS-SP-69, and MSS SP-89 guidelines.2. Support horizontal and vertical piping in accordance with Florida Plumbing Code/International

Plumbing Code spacing requirements.3. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.4. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe

movement without disengagement of supported pipe.5. Hanger rods shall be sized as follows:

a. 2" & less 3/8" diameterb. 2-1/2" to 3" 1/2" diameterc. 4" 5/8" diameterd. 6" 3/4" diameter

6. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connectedhorizontal piping.

7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple ortrapeze hangers.

8. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.9. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09 90 00. Hangers and

supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are notconsidered exposed.

10. Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation.11. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.

Y. Exposed Exterior Piping.1. PVC pipe exposed to sunlight shall be painted (color by architect) with exterior grade paint.

CPVC shall not be left exposed to sunlight.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Fixtures, Floor Drains and Cleanouts: Provide all fixtures and floor drains with traps to comply withlocal regulations and as hereinafter specified. Provide exposed traps with brass cleanout plugs. Provide cleanouts in soil and waste lines as shown on the Plans and as required by the governingcodes. Extend cleanouts for piping concealed in floor or ceiling construction through the floorabove and provide with adjustable floor level cleanout set flush with the finished floor. Use wallcleanouts for piping concealed in wall construction only where indicated on the Drawings

B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.



C. Install ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or verticalrisers. Use ball valves for pipe sizes 2" and less; butterfly for pipe sizes greater than 2".

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated and slopeto drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot slope.

B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at low points.

3.5 TESTS

A. Testing requirements are minimum and are not intended to be limiting where additional testingmethods are required by the authority having jurisdiction.

B. All drainage, vent and inside conductor piping shall be tested before fixtures are installed bycapping or plugging the openings and filling the entire system with water, allowing it to stand thusfilled for 3 hours. If required to test system in sections, provide necessary test tees, plugs andstand pipe to test the system with at least 10 feet of pressure. Remake all leaking joints and retest.

C. Test all water supply piping before fixtures, equipment and/or hydrants are connected. Cap or plugthe openings, fill the system with water and apply a hydrostatic pressure of 125 PSIG. Hold testpressure for at least 2 hours. Remake all leaking joints and retest.

D. Test each fixture for soundness, stability of support and satisfactory operation of all its parts.

3.6 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Disinfect the domestic water piping system in accordance with local municipality requirements. Inthe absence of a locally adopted municipality procedure, after all plumbing work has beencompleted and the system tested, disinfect the system as follows:1. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.2. After tests are completed, fill all water supply systems with a solution containing 50 PPM of

chlorine and allow to stand for a period of at least 24 hours. As an alternate, fill the systemwith a solution containing 200 PPM of chlorine and allow to stand for 3 hours.

3. Following the standing time, the systems shall be flushed with clean potable water until thechlorine is purged from the system.

4. The procedure shall be repeated where shown by a bacteriological examination thatcontamination remains present in the system.

B. Deliver a dated letter certifying sterilization to the Owner.

3.7 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm invertsand ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover.



B. See Civil plans for water service protection and meter requirements.

END OF SECTION


PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06 - 1

SECTION 22 10 06 - PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Floor Drains.

B. Cleanouts.

C. Trap Primers.

D. Backflow preventers.

E. Water hammer arrestors.

F. Thermostatic mixing valves.


A. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping.

B. Section 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures.

C. Section 22 30 00 - Plumbing Equipment.


A. ASME A112.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001(R2007).

B. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2012.

C. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.

D. PDI-WH 201 - Water Hammer Arresters; Plumbing and Drainage Institute; 2010.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in thissection with not less than three years documented experience.



1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

B. Supply for use in maintenance of project:1. Two loose keys for outside hose bibbs and hydrants.2. Two hose end backflow devices for hose bibbs and hydrants.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Specialties in Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide products that comply with NSF 61 and NSF372 for maximum lead content.

2.2 DRAINS

A. Floor Drain:1. ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron two piece body (adjustable housing) with double

drainage flange, weep holes, and round, adjustable and removable nickel-bronze strainer. Outlet size shall match connecting waste pipe size.

2. Where indicated, provide sediment bucket.3. Provide additional accessories where indicated on fixture schedules.4. Provide trap primers connections where indicated on drawings.

2.3 CLEANOUTS

A. All cleanouts shall have plugs of nylon or brass with raised or countersunk heads and shall conformto WW-P-401.

B. Cleanouts at Exterior Surfaced Areas:1. Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover.

C. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas:1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round

stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.

2.4 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

A. Water Hammer Arrestors:1. Stainless steel or copper construction, bellows or piston type sized in accordance with

PDI-WH 201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees Fand maximum 250 psi working pressure.



2.5 TRAP PRIMERS

A. Trap primers shall conform to ASSE 1018 or 1044, and shall be provided for all floor drains unlessotherwise indicated on drawings.

2.6 MIXING VALVES

A. Thermostatic Mixing Valves:1. Valve: ASSE 1017 and 1070 chrome plated cast brass body, stainless steel or copper alloy

bellows, integral temperature adjustment.2. Minimum and maximum flow rates as scheduled on plans.3. Accessories:

a. Check valve on inlets.b. Volume control shut-off valve on outlet.c. Stem thermometer on outlet.d. Strainer stop checks on inlets.

4. Cabinet: 16 gage prime coated steel, for recessed mounting with keyed lock.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixtureof graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.

C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete or cast iron access box (paved areas) or pvc access box(unpaved areas) flush with grade.

D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.

E. Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination ofdomestic water may occur; on boiler and chiller makeup water lines, fire sprinkler systems,irrigation systems, interior and exterior hose bibs.

F. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.

G. Provide manual air vents on high points of recirculation systems and as required on other systems.

H. Provide flow control balancing devices on branch lines of recirculation systems and on pumpdischarge where indicated on the plans.

I. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valves on hot and cold watersupply piping to lavatories, flush valves, sinks, , dental equipment connections, makeup waterconnections and refrigerator outlets in accordance with PDI WH 201 guidelines as outlined indrawings.



J. Coordinate with general contractor to ensure all roof drains are installed watertight using approvedflashing.

K. Install ASSE 1070 temperature limiting devices for all water delivered to public hand washingfacilities.

END OF SECTION


PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 - 1

SECTION 22 40 00 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Flush valve water closets.

B. Lavatories.

C. Sinks.

D. Service sinks.

E. Electric water coolers.


A. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Seal fixtures to walls and floors.

B. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping.

C. Section 22 10 06 - Plumbing Piping Specialties.

D. Section 22 30 00 - Plumbing Equipment.


A. ANSI Z124.2 - American National Standard for Plastic Shower Units; 1995.

B. ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;2012.

C. ASME A112.19.1M - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures; The American Society of MechanicalEngineers; 2008 (R2011).

D. ASME A112.19.2 - Ceramic Plumbing Fixtures; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;2013.

E. ASME A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use); TheAmerican Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2008 (R2013).

F. ASME A112.19.4M - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures; The American Societyof Mechanical Engineers; 1994 (R2004).

1.4 SUBMITTALS




B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim,and finishes.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and procedures.

D. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists.

E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner'sname and registered with manufacturer.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for electric water cooler.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. The following specifications supplement the fixtures as scheduled on the drawings. See schedulefor pre-approved manufacturer's/models.

B. Prior to ordering fixtures, confirm dimensional fit-up requirements for DWV piping layouts,framing/millwork, faucet trim holes, etc., and coordinate any required adjustments to ensure properfit, form and function of each fixture.

C. Potable Water Systems: Provide plumbing fittings and faucets that comply with NSF 61 and NSF372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.

2.2 WATER CLOSETS (FLUSH VALVE TYPE)

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all water closets shall comply with the following requirements: floormounted or or wall mounted as scheduled vitreous china (ASME A112.19.2M), syphon jet withelongated rim. Provide open front, white plastic seat, hinged, without cover, compatible with toilet. Provide all required fittings for complete installation including, but not limited to, 1-1/2" top spud orback spud, as applicable, & bolt caps. Wall hung units shall have compatible ASME A112.6.1M orASME A112.6.2 floor mounted carriers. Water closets shall support flush rates as scheduled;including dual flush applications where indicated.

B. Flush Valves (ASME A112.19.2, ASSE 1037)1. Exposed Flush Valve:

a. Exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with oscillating handle, escutcheon, seat bumper,integral screwdriver stop and vacuum breaker; flush rate as scheduled. Provide dual flushwhere indicated.

2.3 LAVATORIES

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all lavatories shall comply with the following requirements: Vitreouschina (ASME A112.19.2M) with front overflow, drillings for required trim, ASME A112.18.6



compliant 1/2" flexible supplies, escutcheon plates and stop valves. Countertop lavatories shall besealed, self rimming. Exposed traps and arms shall be brass with cleanout. Provide removableP-traps. Faucets (ASME A112.18.1M) shall limit flow to 0.5 GPM at 80 PSI. Waste fittings shallconform to ASME A112.18.2.

B. All lavatories identified on drawings as "ADA" or "Handicapped" shall be selected and mounted tomaintain rim heights, clearances to bottom of apron, and knee & toe clearance as identified inlocally adopted accessibility codes. Provide offset waste as required. Controls shall be operablewith one hand and shall not require tight grasping, pinching or twisting of the wrist, and shallactivate with less than 5 lbs of force. Provide ADA compliant protective shielding for piping and allsharp or abrasive surfaces under lavatory.

2.4 SINKS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all sinks shall comply with the following requirements: Stainless steel(ASME A112.19.3M), sealed, self rimming or undermount as scheduled, undercoated with requireddrillings for required trim, ASME A112.18.6 compliant 1/2" flexible supplies, escutcheon plates andstop valves. Exposed traps and arms shall be brass with cleanout. Provide removable P-traps. Faucets (ASME A112.18.1M) shall limit flow to flow rate indicated on schedule at 80 PSI. Wastefittings shall conform to ASME A112.18.2.

2.5 SERVICE SINKS

A. Bowl:1. ASME A112.19.1M, white molded stone, floor mounted, size as indicated on plans, with one

inch wide shoulders, vinyl bumper guard, stainless steel strainer, integral molded drain.

B. Trim:1. ASME A112.18.1M exposed wall type supply with cross or lever handles, spout wall brace,

ASSE 1011 vacuum breaker, hose end spout, strainers, eccentric adjustable inlets, integralscrewdriver stops with covering caps and adjustable threaded wall flanges.

C. Accessories:1. 5 feet of 1/2 inch diameter plain end reinforced plastic hose.2. Hose clamp hanger.3. Mop hanger.

2.6 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS

A. ARI 1010, ASME A112.19.1M, and NSF 61, Section 9; surface handicapped mounted electricwater cooler with stainless steel top, galvanized structural steel chassis elevated anti-squirt bubblerwith stream guard, automatic stream regulator, push bar, mounting bracket, refrigerated withintegral air cooled condenser .

B. Capacity: 8 gallons per minute of 50 degrees F water with inlet at 80 degrees F and roomtemperature of 90 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASHRAE Std 18.

C. Electrical: 115 V, 60 Hertz compressor, 6 foot cord and plug for connection to electric wiringsystem including grounding connector.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.

B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

C. Confirm with cabinet makers and framers in advance to properly size cutouts and make otherprovisions necessary for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks prior to purchasing.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-inschedule for particular fixtures.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.

B. Provide rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with reducers and escutcheons.

C. Install components level and plumb.

D. Install and secure off the floor fixtures in place with chair carriers and bolts. Support plates may beused for support of lavatories only in masonry wall construction and where steel studs arereinforced with cross members and additional studs where necessary.

E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Architectural Specifications,color to match fixture. Confirm color of fixtures with Architect.

F. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws.

G. Independently support riser to structure from shower valve to shower head.

H. Fasten shower pan liners to waste outlet at seepage entrance.

I. Provide temperature limiting devices (Section 22 10 06) for hot water supply to public hand washingfixtures.

J. Provide dedicated stop valves for isolation of all fixtures.

K. Mount fixtures at heights required by governing codes and as indicated in architectural interiorelevations.



3.4 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS

A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-inand installation.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust shower shower mixing valves to limit outlet temperature to 110 degrees F.

B. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations.

B. Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Do not permit use of fixtures until all required testing, sterilization, and final inspections arecompleted and acceptable.

3.8 SCHEDULES

A. See Drawings for fixture schedule.

END OF SECTION


GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 05 10 - 1

SECTION 23 05 10 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. General requirements for heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems.

B. Miscellaneous material and execution requirements (pipe hangers, sleeves, escutcheons,equipment supports, etc.)

C. Trench excavation, pumping, backfilling and compaction for underground piping.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. The scope of work shall include complete heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems asshown on the Drawings and specified herein.

1.3 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Prior to start of any work, the successful Subcontractor(s) shall thoroughly review the plans andspecifications to determine that no questions remain concerning the intent of the contractdocuments, and shall bring concerns to the attention of the Architect and Engineer. Subcontractors shall meet with the Architect when requested. Each Subcontractor shall outline hismethod of procedure and bring up for discussion and decision any questions concerning theproject. No work shall be performed prior to this meeting. The Architect shall set the date, timeand place of conference.

1.4 CODES, ORDINANCES AND PERMITS

A. Comply with all codes applying to the Work of this Contract including the Florida Energy Code. Obtain information on all code restrictions and requirements. In case of conflict between theContract Documents and a governing code or ordinance, such conflict shall be immediately broughtto the attention of the Architect for resolution. Extra payment will not be allowed for Work requiredby code restrictions except through written agreement with the Owner.

B. Apply for, obtain, and pay for all required permits and inspection certificates. Final payment iscontingent upon delivery of such certificates to the Architect.

C. All materials and equipment shall be new and first class in every respect. As far as is practical,similar products shall be by one manufacturer. Where applicable, all materials and equipment shallbear the Underwriters' Laboratories seal or ASME code stamp. Certificates to this effect shall befurnished to the Architect upon request.

1.5 STANDARDS

A. Unless modified by these Specifications, the design, manufacture, testing and method of installingall materials, apparatus and equipment shall conform to the following:



1. ASHRAE Standard 90.1, Energy Standard for Buildings.2. ANSI B9. 1, Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.3. NFPA, Standards of National Fire Protection Association.4. ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.5. SMACNA Standards for Duct Work.6. Associated Air Balance Council Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation.7. Underwriters' Laboratories.8. National Electrical Code.9. Air Moving and Conditioning Association.10. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.

1.6 SITE INSPECTION


1.7 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Refer to the general Construction Drawings which are bound with the Drawings of this Work forconstruction details, elevations, etc. Bring any discrepancies between Mechanical/Plumbingdrawings and Architectural/Structural/Civil to the attention of the Architect prior to initiating work. Itis the intent of the Mechanical and Plumbing Drawings to show the general arrangement of thesystem and not to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories which may be required, nor to showexact locations of piping, ductwork or equipment except where actual dimensions are given. Allvertical piping shall be located in walls in finished spaces unless otherwise noted.

B. It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications to call for finished Work, tested, and ready foroperation, and in complete conformance with all applicable codes, rules and regulations. Minordetails not usually shown or specified, but manifestly necessary for the proper installation andoperation of the various systems, shall be included in the Work and in the proposal, the same as ifspecified or shown on the Drawings.

C. If any departures from the Drawings and Specifications are deemed necessary, details of suchdepartures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Nodepartures shall be made without prior approval of the Engineer.

D. Specific reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture or type ofconstruction, etc., by proprietary name, make or catalog number shall be interpreted asestablishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. Substitutesmay be used subject to compliance with requirements set forth in the General Requirements,Division I, and the requirements of this section.

1.8 APPROVED ALTERNATE MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Equipment substitutions other than the basis of design scheduled on drawings shall comply inevery respect with the applicable schedules and specifications contained in the contractdocuments, and shall meet the requirements of any relevant architectural administrativespecification requirements on product substitutions. Equipment scheduled on Drawings was usedto arrive at performance, space, maintenance, and utility service requirements. If other equipmentis submitted and approved, take responsibility for providing the space, maintenance, and utilityservice requirements of this substituted equipment, and ensure the capacities, accessories andfeatures as indicated for the scheduled manufacturer are provided. This responsibility shall include



the costs associated with any resulting changes during and following installation, including costs tochange electrical service required by substituted equipment, to obtain required clearances, or toprovide missing accessories and features. Approval of equipment substitutions during thesubmittal review process or listing of alternate approved manufacturers in these specificationsrepresents an acceptance of the general level of product quality and reliability, and does not implythat the alternate manufacturer's have been reviewed for compliance with the performance,features, materials and accessories already specified for the equipment scheduled on thedrawings. It is the ultimate responsibility of the contractor to ensure any equipment substituted forwhat was scheduled on the drawings meets the contract document requirements.

B. Where the name of a concern or manufacturer is mentioned on the Drawings or in Specifications inreference to his required service or product, and no qualifications or specification of such isincluded, then the material gauges, details of manufacturer, finish, etc., shall be in accordance withhis standard practice, directions or specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for anyinfringement of patents, royalties, or copyrights which may be incurred thereby.

1.9 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings or catalog data for Engineers approval before purchasing or installing thefollowing items.1. VAV Terminal Units2. Grilles, Diffusers and Registers3. Exhaust Fans4. Insulation5. Duct Shop Drawings (where different from design drawings)6. Test and Balance Report

1.10 DATA

A. All performance data specified herein shall be considered actual performance of equipment asinstalled. Make suitable allowances if installation details are such that actual operating conditionsunfavorably affect performance as compared to conditions under which the equipment was rated.

1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Provide four (4) complete sets of a compilation of catalog data of each manufactured item ofequipment used in the Mechanical and Plumbing Work. In addition to the catalog data, installation,operating and maintenance data and bill of materials for all operating equipment shall besubmitted. Each of the four sets of data shall be bound in loose leaf binders and submitted to theArchitect before final payment is made. A complete double index shall be provided as follows:1. Listing the Products alphabetically by name.2. Listing the names of manufacturer's alphabetically by name together with their addresses and

the names and addresses of local sales representatives.

B. Include the following information where applicable: Name and Mark number, Location, CompleteNameplate Data, Certified Record Drawings and Shop Drawings, Parts List, Performance Curves,Wiring Diagrams, Lubrication Charts, Manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions withall non-applicable information deleted.

C. Maintenance instruction manuals shall include complete oiling, cleaning, and servicing datacompiled in clearly and easily understandable form. Data shall show all serial numbers of eachpiece of equipment, complete list of replacement parts, motor ratings, and actual loads.



D. It is the intent of this catalog, operation and maintenance data to provide the Owner with completeinstructions on the proper operation and use, lubrication and periodic maintenance, together withthe source of replacement parts and service, for the items of equipment covered.

E. Include submittal data stating equipment size and selected options for each peice of equipmentrequiring maintenance.

F. Required routine maintenance actions shall be clearly identified and included with manufacturer'soperation and maintenance manuals for each peice of equipment requiring maintenance providedas a part of this project.

G. Include the name and address of at least one qualified service agency capable servicing thesystems involved in the project.

H. Provide HVAC control system maintenance and calibration information, including wiring diagrams,schematics, and control sequence descriptions. Desired or field determined setpoints shall berecorded on control drawings at control devices or in system programming instructions wheredigital control systems are provided.

I. Provide a narative of how each system is intended to operate, including recommended setpoints.

1.12 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION

A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish, set and wire all disconnect devices and starters as requiredfor all equipment except for those items furnished with integral disconnect devices and/or starters.

B. Furnish detailed information to the Electrical Contractor on power wiring requirements for allmechanical and plumbing equipment actually purchased as soon as practical. This shall include alldiagrams and instructions necessary for the Electrical Contractor to make connections properly. Ifequipment actually purchased requires larger electrical service than equipment scheduled, arrangeand pay for required electrical service change.

C. Provide all air conditioning control devices, including thermostats, and complete all control wiring,including final connections.

D. Coordinate location of equipment, piping, and duct work with other trades to maintain clearance forequipment maintenance, prevent interference with duct and piping runs, and to prevent ducts andpiping from being installed over electrical panels. If interference develops, the Architect will decidewhich equipment, conduit, duct, piping, etc., must be relocated regardless of installation order. Take responsibility for relocating the work of your trade, if so ordered, including all associatedcosts.

E. Within 30 days following award of the Contract, report to the Architect, in writing, all real or potentialerrors, ambiguities and/or conflicts on the Mechanical and Plumbing Work or between the tradesand obtain an agreement with the Architect on a solution. Those reported after 30 days, except asa result of unforeseen circumstances, shall be resolved at the discretion of the Architect. Reportconflicts resulting from the progress of Work to the Architect immediately or accept the expense ofcorrective work caused by failure to report such a conflict.



1.13 CHANGES

A. Do not make any changes in design without the written approval of the Engineer. Changes indesign means any change which may affect the capacity, reliability, operation or safety of thesystems or any parts thereof, including changes which may be required to conform to localregulations or codes.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection, with not less than three years of documented experience.

B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purposespecified and indicated.

1.15 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Protect all materials and equipment against damage and vandalism during construction. Replaceany damaged material or equipment and place the systems in perfect working condition.

1.16 WARRANTY

A. Provide written warranties as specified in the General Requirements, Division 1 for additionalwarranty requirements.

B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for refrigeration compressors against defects in materialsand workmanship. Repair any defects becoming apparent within the warranty period as directed bythe Architect. The warranty shall not cause an obligation to repair damage resulting from accidentor improper operation or care on the part of the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MOTORS

A. All permanently wired polyphase motors 1 HP or more shall be classified under the NationalElectric Manufacturer's Associations Standard as "energy efficient".

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Examine the site and all Drawings before proceeding with the layout and installation of the Work. Locate all vertical piping within walls in finished spaces unless specifically noted otherwise. Suchpiping cannot always be shown within walls on Drawings due to their small scale.



B. Arrange the Work essentially as shown, exact layout to be made on the job to suit actual conditionsencountered. Confer and cooperate with other trades on the job so all Work will be installed inproper relationship and coordinate precise location of parts with the Work of others.

C. Arrange for required chases, slots and openings with the General Contractor including locations ofrequired pipe sleeves through walls and foundations. Assume liability for cutting or patching madenecessary by failure to make proper arrangements in this respect.

D. Indicated equipment connections are necessarily based on equipment of a given manufacture. Assume responsibility for proper arrangement of pipes, ducts, etc., to connect approved equipmentin a proper and approved manner. Follow equipment manufacturer's detailed instructions andrecommendations in the installation and connection of all equipment. In case of conflict betweenmanufacturer's instructions and the Contract Documents, notify the Architect before proceeding. No equipment installation or connections shall be made in a manner that voids the manufacturerswarranty.

E. Install all Work in a neat and workmanlike manner, using only workmen thoroughly qualified in thetrade or duties they are to perform. Rough Work will be rejected.

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Install all equipment to permit removal of coils, fan shafts and wheels, filters, belt guards, sheavesand drives, and all other parts requiring periodic replacement or maintenance.

B. Arrange equipment to permit ready access to valves, cocks, traps, starters, motors and controlcomponents, and to clear the openings of swinging and overhead doors and of access panels.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Securely attach manufacturers nameplate to all equipment giving data as to design and operatingcharacteristics. Securely attach permanent metal tags identifying each major plumbing and HVACcomponent (i.e. air handlers, condensing units, rooftop units, pumps, exhaust fans, water heaters,circulators, etc.) with the original equipment tag assigned to the component by the equipmentschedule on the drawings.

B. Securely attach nameplates to all switches, starters, gauges, control devices and similar items,giving the name and number of the item of equipment to which it is connected.

3.4 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Accurately locate and set required sleeves for pipe and duct. Where more than one pipe isnecessarily passed through a singe sleeve as to a unit piping enclosure or other conditionsresulting in larger than 1 /8" gap within the sleeve, tightly pack space with proper material to form abarrier against sound, vermin, fire, etc.



3.5 MACHINERY GUARDS

A. Provide all belts, couplings, wheels, fan blades and other moving parts of machinery withremovable metal guards. Provide tachometer openings for all belt driven or variable speedmachinery.

3.6 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING AND PUMPING

A. Perform all excavation, backfilling and pumping necessary for the completion of the Work inaccordance with the requirements of Excavation and Backfill, Division 2.

B. Excavate trenches suitable in width to provide a minimum of 6" clear space between the barrel ofthe pipe and the trench wall on both sides of the pipe. Accurately grade the trench bottom toprovide uniform bearing and support for each section of the pipe on undisturbed soil at every pointalong its entire length. Take care not to excavate below the depth necessary and excavate bellholes to ensure proper bedding. Backfill over-depths with loose, granular, moist material andthoroughly compact to the depth required.

C. Place and compact backfill material in 6" layers until the pipe has a minimum cover of 12". Placeand compact the remaining material in 12" layers. Grade the surface to a reasonable uniformityand leave the mounding in neat condition as approved by the Architect.

D. Backfill all trenches passing under foundations with concrete to the underside of the foundation andat a 2:1 slope away from each side of the foundation. Backfill all trenches that are parallel anddeeper than foundations with concrete to a point that will place the top of the concrete on a 2:1slope away from the foundation bottom. Do not backfill trenches until all required tests andinspections are completed.

E. Repair or replace all topsoil, shrubbery, sod, sidewalks, streets, walls, etc. disturbed by theexcavation, backfilling or pumping to the satisfaction of the Architect. Repair sidewalks in completeblocks; partial patching will not be accepted.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Thoroughly review Architectural plans and provide approved Firestopping at penetration of everyfire rated wall, floor or ceiling system.

B. Refer to Architectural specifications for Firestopping product and installation requirements. In theabsence of relevant Architectural specifications, Firestopping shall comply with the requirements ofthe Authority Having Jurisdiction and the following as a minimum:1. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs which provide the specified fire

ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated.a. Listing in the current classification or certification books of UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock

Hersey) will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.2. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.

a. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 thathas F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to FRating and that meets all other specified requirements.



3. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which mayaffect bond of firestopping material. Remove incompatible materials which may affect bond. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.

4. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions, completely closing openings. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspectedby authority having jurisdiction. Install labelling required by code. Clean adjacent surfaces offirestopping materials. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

3.8 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE

A. After final acceptance of all Work and occupancy of building, provide service to make systemadjustments to suit conditions created by the occupancy; instruct Owner's operating personnel inoperation adjustment and maintenance procedures of system components and acquaint them withlocations and functions of valves, control devices, etc., in the system.

B. The actual time of this service shall be as directed but shall not be less than 4 hours nor exceed 1day. Additional time, if required, to fully prepare Owners operating personnel to operate andmaintain the system shall be as directed by the Owner at the Owner's expense. Quote rates forthis additional time in the Bid Proposal.

3.9 CLEANING AND RUBBISH

A. During the Work, keep the premises clear of rubbish created as a result of the Work. Protect andprevent unnecessary induction of dirt and thoroughly clean all equipment used for temporary heatand/or ventilation, as well as piping, fixtures, and plumbing equipment.

B. Use and maintain adequate filters in all fan coil equipment used for temporary heat and/orventilation. Replace with new filters after construction and before units are placed in service. Close all air duct openings to effectively prevent the entrance of dust and construction debris duringconstruction.

C. On completion of the Work, remove all rubbish and debris resulting from the Work and dispose ofsame. Thoroughly clean and leave in a satisfactory condition for use all equipment, pipe, fixtures,duct work, etc.

3.10 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. The Architect will furnish one set of blue line prints of the Mechanical Drawings as issued for thisContract. Use these prints to indicate accurately and neatly any deviation in the actual installationfrom the Drawings as issued. At the completion of the job, deliver the marked-up Drawings to theArchitect for a permanent record of the exact location of all equipment, pipe runs, etc., asincorporated in the job.

3.11 COMPLETE SYSTEMS

A. Leave all systems completely operative in all details and in satisfactory working condition, asdetermined by the Architect. Furnish and install as part of this Contract all apparatus and materialobviously a part of the systems and necessary for their operation.

END OF SECTION


TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC23 05 93 - 1

SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.

B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.


A. Section 23 05 10: General Mechanical Requirements (including commissioning).


A. AABC MN-1 - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated Air BalanceCouncil; 2002.

B. ASHRAE Std 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of BuildingHeating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating,Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2008.

C. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems;National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2005, Seventh Edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Qualifications: Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency, TAB supervisor, and TABtechnicians along with qualifications for approval within 30 days after award of Contract.

C. Test Equipment:1. Submit a list of test equipment to be used on the project. Identify make and model of each

device.2. For each device, submit manufacturer's tolerances for measurement ranges.3. For each device, submit manufacturer's correction factors as applicable.4. Submit latest calibration date for each device as well as manufacturer's recommended

calibration interval.

D. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to befollowed and the specific approach for each system and component.1. Include at least the following in the plan:

a. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency measurements tobe performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to beused.

b. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to betested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each.



c. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and piping drawingsduring the process.

d. Final test report forms to be used.e. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution.

E. TAB Report:1. Submit Preliminary TAB report if required to document any tolerances cannot be met.2. Submit Final TAB. Include any followup corrective actions from preliminary submittal.


A. Perform total system balance in accordance with AABC MN-1, ASHRAE Std 111, or NEBBProcedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.

B. TAB Agency Qualifications: Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing ofsystems specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience certified byAABC.

C. Perform Work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer or NEBB CertifiedTesting, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor experienced in performance of this Work and licensedat the Florida.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Furnish AABC National Performance Guaranty for this project.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following:1. AABC MN-1, AABC National Standards for Total System Balance.2. ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building

Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.3. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems.

B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete workprior to Substantial Completion of the project.

C. TAB Agency Qualifications:1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this

section.



3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the followingconditions:1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final

filters.5. Duct systems are clean of debris.6. Fans are rotating correctly.7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.10. Air outlets are installed and connected.11. Duct system leakage is minimized.

B. Confirm the proper functions of all components as noted in the sequence of operations including,but not limited to, interlocks, overrides, and damper positions & equipment operations based onoccupied and unoccupied modes of operation.

C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instrumentsavailable to Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.

B. Provide additional balancing devices as required.

3.4 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES

A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust system level airflows to within plus or minus 10 percent of design forsupply, outside air and exhaust system. Independently measure and record system return air.

B. Building Pressurization: Adjust systems to ensure the total of outside air is not less than 5 percentgreater than the total exhaust for the building.

C. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent ofdesign.

3.5 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING

A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.

B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings tobe restored. Set and lock memory stops.



C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that suchdisruption has been rectified.

D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doorsto electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. After building occupation,recheck points or areas (up to 20%) as selected and witnessed by the Engineer, at no additionalcost.

3.6 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, andexhaust air quantities .

B. Make system level air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire crosssectional area of duct.

C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets using the airflow measuring device with the highestdegree of accuracy for the condition encountered. Use correction factors where recommended bydevice manufacturer.

D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts andnoise.

E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not createobjectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such asdampers and splitters.

F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required andbid accordingly. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.

G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.

H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops,and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.

I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for designconditions.

J. Where low exhaust rates are indicating when using am airflow hood, confirm the measurementswith duct traverse or other alternate means.

K. For energy recovery devices, measure and record airflow data for both entering airstreams as wellas both leaving airstreams.

L. Upon completion of test and balance work, insert all data into a complete type written report up tosubmit six copies of this report, including a copy to the owner and a copy to the design engineer.



3.7 SCOPE

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all phases of test and balance activitities shall apply to all equipment asscheduled on the plans.

3.8 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED

A. Electric Motors:1. Manufacturer 2. Model/Frame 3. HP/BHP 4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load5. RPM 6. Service factor7. Starter size, rating, heater elements8. Sheave Make/Size/Bore

B. Electric Heaters (Terminal Units):1. Manufacturer 2. Identification/number 3. Location 4. Model number5. Design kW6. Number of stages7. Phase, voltage, amperage8. Test voltage (each phase)9. Test amperage (each phase)10. Air flow, specified and actual11. Temperature rise, specified and actual

C. Air Moving Equipment:1. Location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number4. Serial number5. Arrangement/Class/Discharge 6. Supply air flow, specified and actual7. Return air flow, specified and actual8. Return air temperatures, drybulb and wetbulb9. Outside air flow, specified and actual10. Outside air temperatures, dry bulb and wet bulb11. Total static pressure, specified and actual12. External static pressure, specified and actual13. Inlet pressure14. Discharge pressure15. Sheave Make/Size/Bore16. Number of Belts/Make/Size17. Fan RPM

D. Exhaust Fans:1. Location



2. Manufacturer 3. Model number4. Serial number5. Air flow, specified and actual6. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual7. Inlet pressure8. Discharge pressure9. Sheave Make/Size/Bore10. Number of Belts/Make/Size11. Fan RPM

E. Duct Traverses:1. System zone/branch2. Duct size3. Area 4. Design velocity5. Design air flow6. Test velocity7. Test air flow8. Duct static pressure9. Air temperature10. Air correction factor

F. Terminal Unit Data:1. Manufacturer.2. Type, constant, variable, single, dual duct.3. Identification/number.4. Location.5. Model number.6. Inlet size.7. Minimum static pressure.8. Minimum air flow. Design/Test9. Maximum air flow. Design/Test10. Heating air flow. Design/Test11. Inlet static pressure.

G. Air Distribution Tests:1. Air terminal number2. Room number/location3. Terminal type4. Terminal size5. Area factor6. Design velocity7. Design air flow8. Test (final) velocity9. Test (final) air flow10. Percent of design air flow

H. Vibration Tests:1. Unusual conditions at time of test.

END OF SECTION


DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 - 1

SECTION 23 07 13 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Duct insulation and vapor barrier jackets.


A. Section 23 31 00 - Ductwork.


A. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Meansof the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.

B. ASTM C553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial andIndustrial Applications; 2013.

C. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2014.


E. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;National Fire Protection Association; 2006.

F. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; UnderwritersLaboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thicknessfor each service, and locations.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures necessary to ensure acceptableworkmanship and that installation standards will be achieved.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specifiedin this section with not less than three years of documented experience.




A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E 84.


A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification,including product density and thickness.

B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanicaldamage, by storing in original wrapping.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION

A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, whentested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.

2.2 GENERAL

A. Duct insulation shall be the required thickness and material to provide a minimum thermalresistance "R" as scheduled herein. Rating shall be at 75 degrees F, tested in accordance withASTM C-518 or ASTM C-177.

B. Coverings and linings shall have a flamespread rating of not over 25 without evidence of continuedprogressive combustion and a smoke developed rating of not over 50, and shall not flame, flow,smolder or smoke when tested in accordance with ASTM C 411 at the designated maximumservice temperature.

2.3 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE

A. For determination of thermal performance of flexible duct wrap, the installed wrap shall have anassumed thickness of 75% of the nominal thickness, allowing for 25% compression.

B. Manufacturer:1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com.2. Johns Manville: www.jm.com.3. Owens Corning Corporation: www.ocbuildingspec.com.4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.5. 'K' value (min): 0.25 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518.6. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F.7. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket:1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E 96; 0.05 perm.



3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.

D. Vapor Barrier Tape:1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure

sensitive rubber based adhesive.

E. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage.

2.4 GLASS FIBER, RIGID

A. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket.1. 'K' value: 0.24 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.2. Maximum service temperature: 450 degrees F.3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent.4. Density: 3.0 lb/cu ft.

B. Vapor Barrier Jacket:1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E 96; 0.04 perm.3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.

C. Vapor Barrier Tape:1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure

sensitive rubber based adhesive.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. All systems:1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.3. Seal all joints with fabric and mastic.4. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.5. Factory insulate the backs of all diffusers. Field insulate all other backpans and transitions.

C. External Duct Insulation Application:1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier

adhesive or tape to match jacket.2. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.



3.3 SCHEDULES

A. Supply and Return (concealed):1. Insulate ductwork using 2" external ductwrap with vapor barrier, 1.0 pcf (R-6.0 minimum).

B. Supply and Return (exposed in mechanical rooms): Insulate ductwork in mechanical spaces usingfiberglass insulation board with vapor barrier, 1" thick. 3.0 pcf (minimum R-4.2).

C. General Exhaust: Insulate using 1-1/2" external duct wrap with vapor barrier, 1.0 pcf (R-4.2minimum).

END OF SECTION


DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS - BACNET 23 09 25 - 1

SECTION 23 09 25 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS - BACNET

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 PRODUCT INSTALLATION

A. All products included in this specification are furnished and installed by the controls contractor andhis subcontractor(s). A Certified Class A Air Conditioning Contractor or a Certified MechanicalContractor as defined and licensed by the State of Florida Department of Business andProfessional Regulation shall install all components in piping and duct systems other than ductmounted temperature sensors. All power wiring to control panels shall be accomplished by anElectrician licensed in the State of Florida for the level of work involved.

1.2 INTEGRATED EQUIPMENT AND SITE INTERFACE

A. The exsiting building DDC System is an Alerton BacNet system. All new and relocated VAVTerminal Units shall be fully intergrated into the exisitng DDC system. All existing VAV Temrinalunits shall be verified to ber fully functional and adjusted as necessary to the new scheduled airflow rates.

B. See controls drawings for system architecture and integration with existing DDC system.

C. Contractors shall review the conditions at the site and interview building management personnel asnecessary prior to bidding to establish the exact means of configuring and routing the local areanetworks within each building and the wide area network between buildings. Additional funding willnot be provided to cover changes in anticipated configuration and routing which have not beendiscussed with and submitted to the Owner in writing prior to bidding.

1.3 DESCRIPTION

A. General: The control system shall be as indicated on the drawings and described in thespecifications. All control components including control valves, motorized dampers, flow meters,and all sensors shall be provided as new unless otherwise indicated on plans.

B. The control system shall be as shown and consist of a high speed, peer-to-peer network of DDCcontrollers. The system will allow a user to interface with the network via dynamic color graphics. Each mechanical system and control device shown on plans will be depicted by point and clickgraphics.

C. Manufacturer shall offer web based operator interface for future expansion capability.

D. Operators shall have two levels of interface. The highest level will enable the operator to performall normal operator functions with proper password protected security. A ‘read only’ level ofinterface, also password protected, will enable different operators to access the system formonitoring purposes only.

E. The PC interface will be as indicated in the system architecture detail on the plans.

F. The system shall directly control HVAC equipment as detailed in the control sequences,schematics, and points lists on the plans.



G. The system shall use the BACnet protocol for communication to the operator workstation and forcommunication between control modules on the LAN (native BACnet). Schedules, setpoints,trends and alarms detailed on the plans shall be BACnet Objects.

H. The control system shall be designed such that each mechanical system will be able to operateunder stand-alone control. As such, in the event of a network communication failure, or the loss ofany other controller, the control system shall continue to independently operate under control usingits current setpoints.

I. Communication between the control panels and the work-station shall be over a high speednetwork. All nodes on this network shall be peers. The operator shall not have to know the panelidentifier or location to view or control an object. Custom application Controllers and ApplicationSpecific Controllers shall be constantly scanned by the network controllers to update pointinformation and alarm information.

J. The documentation is schematic in nature. The Contractor shall provide hardware and softwarenecessary to implement the functions and sequences shown.

1.4 APPROVED CONTROL SYSTEM CONTRACTORS AND MANUFACTURERS

A. The following are approved control system suppliers, manufacturer’s, and product lines:

InstallerManufacturerProduct Line

Alerton Technologies, Inc.Webtalk

B. The above list is alphabetical and does not indicate preference. Inclusion on this list does notguarantee acceptance of products or installation. Control systems shall comply with the terms ofthis specification.1. The Installing Contractor shall have an established working relationship in its current business

entity with the Control System Manufacturer with the product line indicated of not less thanfive years. A subsidiary company drawing on experience from a parent company is notacceptable.

2. The Installer shall have successfully completed Control System Manufacturer's classes on thecontrol system. The Installer shall present for review the certification of completed training,including the hours of instruction and course outlines upon request.

3. The Installing Contractor’s main office shall be within a 50 mile radius of the project site andprovide 24 hour response in the event of a customer call for the period of warranty.

4. Not Used.5. The Contractor shall use only operator workstation software, controller software, custom

application programming language, and controllers from the corresponding manufacturer andproduct line unless Owner approves use of multiple manufacturers.

6. Other products specified herein (such as sensors, valves, dampers, and actuators) need notbe manufactured by the above manufacturers.




A. Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the most restrictive of local, state, and federalauthorities' codes and ordinances. Such codes, when more restrictive, shall take precedence overthese plans and specifications. As a minimum, the installation shall comply with current editions ineffect 30 days prior to receipt of bids of the following codes:1. Underwriters Laboratories: Products shall be UL-916-PAZX listed.2. National Electrical Code -- NFPA 70.3. Federal Communications Commission -- Part J.4. ASHRAE/ANSI 135-2001, Data Communications Protocol for Building Automation and Control

Systems (BACnet)5. Florida Building Code (FBC), including subchapters and references.

B. All products used in this installation shall be new, currently under manufacture, and shall be appliedin similar installations for a minimum of 3 years. This installation shall not be used as a test site forany new products unless explicitly approved by the Owner's representative in writing prior to biddate. Spare parts shall be available for at least 5 years after completion of this contract.

1.6 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Performance Standards. The system shall conform to the following:1. Graphic Display, The system shall display a graphic with a minimum of 20 dynamic points. All

current data shall be displayed within 10 seconds of the request.2. Graphic Refresh. The system shall update a graphic with 20 dynamic points with current data

within 8 seconds.3. Object Command. The maximum time between the command of a binary object by the

operator and the reaction by the device shall be 2 seconds. Analog objects shall start toadjust within 2 seconds.

4. Object Scan. All changes of state and change of analog values shall be transmitted over thehigh-speed network such that any data used or displayed at a controller or work-station will becurrent, within the prior 6 seconds.

5. Alarm Response Time. The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to when it isannunciated at the work-station shall not exceed 45 seconds.

6. Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be capable ofrunning as often as once every 5 seconds. The Contractor shall be responsible for selectingexecution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.

7. Performance. Programmable Controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID control loops at aselectable frequency from at least once per second. The controller shall scan and update theprocess value and output generated by this calculation at this same frequency. Time of dayscheduling shall be capable of running once every 60 seconds.

8. Configuration and Tuning Screens. Screens used for configuring, calibrating or tuning points,PID loops, and similar control logic shall automatically refresh within 6 seconds.

9. Multiple Alarm Annunciation. Each work station on the network shall receive alarms within 5seconds of other work stations.

10. Reporting Accuracy. Table 1 below lists minimum acceptable reporting accuracies for allvalues reported by the specified system.

11. Stability of Control. Control Loops shall maintain measured variables at set point within thetolerances listed in Table 2 below.

Table 1Reporting Accuracy



Measured VariableReported AccuracySpace Temperature±0.5ºC (±1ºF)Ducted Air±0.5ºC (±1ºF)Outside Air±1.0ºC (±2ºF)Dew Point±1.5ºC (±3ºF)Water Temperature±0.5ºC (±1ºF)Delta-T±0.15ºC (±0.25ºF)Relative Humidity±3% RHWater Flow±2% of full scaleAirflow (terminal)±10% of full scale (see Note 1)Airflow (measuring stations)±5% of full scaleAirflow (pressurized spaces)±3% of full scaleAir Pressure (ducts)±25 Pa (±0.1 in. w.g.)Air Pressure (space)±3 Pa (±0.01 in. w.g.)Water Pressure±2% of full scale (see Note 2)Electrical (A, V, W, Power Factor)±1% of reading (see Note 3)Carbon Monoxide (CO)±5% of readingCarbon Dioxide (CO 2) ±50 ppm

Note 1: 10% - 100% of scaleNote 2: For both absolute and differential pressureNote 3: Not including utility-supplied meters

Table 2Control Stability and Accuracy

Controlled VariableControl AccuracyRange of Medium

Air Pressure±50 Pa (±0.2 in. w.g.) 0-1.5 kPa (0-6 in. w.g.)3 Pa (±0.01 in. w.g.) -25 to 25 Pa (-0.1 to 0.1 in. w.g.)Airflow±10% of full scaleSpace Temperature±1.0ºC (±2.0ºF)Duct Temperature±1.5ºC (±3ºF)Humidity±3% RHFluid Pressure±10 kPa (±1.5 psi) MPa (1-150 psi)250 Pa (±1.0 in. w.g.) 0-12.5 kPa (0-50 in. w.g.) differential

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data and shop drawings shall be submitted on all hardware, software, and installationbeing provided. Equipment shall not be ordered until submittals have been approved. Four copiesin binders are required. All drawings shall be prepared in ACAD 2000 or later and submitted on CDand hard copy. When manufacturer’s cut sheets apply to a product series rather than a specificproduct, the options, features and other data specific to this project shall be clearly indicated. Submittal approval does not relieve contractor of compliance with these Plans and Specifications. Submittals shall include the following:1. Direct Digital Control System Hardware.

a. Complete bill of material with quantities, manufacturers and model numbers.



b. Manufacturer’s technical data sheets for all controllers, transducers/transmitters, sensors,actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, power supplies, batteries, operatorinterface equipment and wiring.

c. Wiring Diagrams and layouts for each control panel with terminals numbered.d. Schematic diagrams for all field sensors and controllers.e. Site plans and/or floor plans indicating physical location of control panels.f. Riser Diagrams showing control network layout, communication protocol and wire types.

2. Central System Softwarea. Description of operator interface software, color graphic software and third party software.b. A list of color graphic screens to be provided. Provide a conceptual layout of each screen,

indicating how other screens can be accessed. Indicate how alarms are indicated,specifically when occurring on a different system than is being indicated on current screenbeing displayed.

c. Schematic diagrams of control, communication, and power wiring for central systeminstallation. Show interface wiring to control system.

d. Network riser diagrams of wiring between central control unit and control panels.3. Controlled Systems

a. Schematic diagram of each controlled system. Label control points with point names.Graphically show locations of control elements.

b. Schematic wiring diagram of each controlled system. Label control elements andterminals. Where a control element is also shown on control system schematic, use thesame name.

c. Instrumentation list (Bill of Materials) for each controlled system. List each control systemelement in a table. Show element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, andproduct data sheet number.

d. Complete description of control system operation including sequences of operation.Include and reference schematic diagram of controlled system. List I/O points andsoftware points indicated on plans. Indicate alarmed and trended points.

4. Description of process, report formats, and checklists to be used in paragraph coveringControl System Demonstration and Acceptance.

5. Protocol Implementation Performance Statement for each type of controller and operatorinterface.

B. Project Record Documents. Submit three copies of record (as-built) documents upon completion ofinstallation for approval prior to final completion. Submittal shall consist of:1. Project Record Drawings. As-built versions of submittal shop drawings provided as AutoCAD

2004 (or newer) compatible files on magnetic or optical disk (file format: .DWG, .DXF, .VSD,or comparable) and 6 prints of each drawing on 11" x 17" paper.

2. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists. Completed versions of reports,checklists, and trend logs used to meet requirements of Control System Demonstration andAcceptance. See Section 01400.

3. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual. Printed, electronic, or online help documentationof the following:

a. As-built versions of submittal product data.1) Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of installing contractors and service

representatives for equipment and control systems.2) Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems: logging on and

off, handling alarms, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computercontrol, and changing setpoints and variables.

3) Programming manual or set of manuals with description of programminglanguage and syntax, of statements for algorithms and calculations used, ofpoint database creation and modification, of program creation and modification,and of editor use.

4) Engineering, installation, and maintenance manual or set of manuals thatexplains how to design and install new points, panels, and other hardware; how



to perform preventive maintenance and calibration; how to debug hardwareproblems; and how to repair or replace hardware.

5) Documentation of programs created using custom programming languageincluding setpoints, tuning parameters, and object database. Electronic copies ofprograms shall meet this requirement if control logic, setpoints, tuningparameters, and objects can be viewed using furnished programming tools.

6) Graphic files, programs, and database on magnetic or optical media.7) List of recommended spare parts with part numbers and suppliers.8) Complete original-issue documentation, installation, and maintenance

information for furnished third-party hardware including computer equipment andsensors.

9) Complete original-issue copies of furnished software, including operatingsystems, custom programming language, operator workstation or web serversoftware, and graphics software.

10) Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents for equipment and systems.11) Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for system components,

including schedule of tasks such as inspection, cleaning, and calibration; timebetween tasks; and task descriptions

4. Training Materials: Provide course outline and materials for each class at least 3 weeksbefore first class. Training shall be furnished via instructor-led sessions, computer-basedtraining, or web-based training. Engineer will modify course outlines and materials ifnecessary to meet Owner's needs. Engineer will review and approve course outlines andmaterials at least one week before first class.

5. Contractor shall provide a programming manual which allows other BACnet installers toconnect new building controllers over the WAN and program the central server to and webbased appliances to recognize and fully interface with the new building controllers, allowing allcapabilities described in this projects specifications. Contractor shall provide allreprogramming of such front end servers free of charge if other installers do not haveadequate documentation to do it themselves.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warrant all work as follows:1. Labor and materials for the control system specified shall be warranted free from defects for a

period of 24 months after final completion and acceptance. Control system failures during thewarranty period shall be adjusted, repaired or replaced at no additional cost or reduction inservice to the owner. Response time shall be within 24 hours of normal business hours.

2. All work shall have a single warranty date, even if Owner receives beneficial use due to earlysystem startup.

3. Engineer determines that equipment and systems operate satisfactorily at the end of finalstart-up, testing, and commissioning phase, Engineer will certify in writing that control systemoperation has been tested and accepted in accordance with the terms of this specification.Date of acceptance shall begin warranty period.

4. Provide updates to operator workstation or web server software, project-specific software,graphic software, database software, and firmware that resolve Contractor-identified softwaredeficiencies at no charge during warranty period. If available, Owner can purchase in-warrantyservice agreement to receive upgrades for functional enhancements associated withabove-mentioned items. Do not install updates or upgrades without Owner's writtenauthorization.

5. Exception: Contractor shall not be required to warrant reused devices except those that havebeen rebuilt or repaired. Installation labor and materials shall be warranted. Demonstrateoperable condition of reused devices at time of Engineer's acceptance.



1.9 OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL

A. All project developed software and documentation shall become the property of the owner;including, but not limited to, project graphic images, record drawings, project database, projectspecific application programming code, and all documentation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. All products used in this project specification shall be new and currently under manufacture andshall have been applied in similar installations for a minimum of two years. Spare parts shall beavailable for a period of at least 5 years after completion of this contract.

2.2 COMMUNICATION

A. All control components provided for this project up to and including the new PC Workstation shallcomprise a native BACnet internetwork. All BACnet control component communication shallconform to ASHRAE / ANSI Standard 135-1995, BACnet. Where device profiles are referenced inthis specification, BIBB’s must be supported as indicated in Paragraph L.7 of ASHRAE / ANSIStandard 135-1995, Appx. L, for the following interoperability areas applicable to a given controller:Data Sharing, Alarm & Event Management, Scheduling, Trending, Device & Network Management. See control sequences and points lists on the plans as well as this section for applicability.

B. Each device shall operate on the physical/data link protocols specified for that device as definedearlier in these contract documents.

C. The Controls Contractor shall provide all communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, androuters necessary for the inter-network.

D. All building controllers shall have a communication port for connection with the operator interfacesusing the selected physical/data link protocol for the system.

E. Remote operator interface via a 56k or faster baud modem shall allow for communication with anyand all controllers on this network as described in F below.

F. Communications services over the internetwork shall result in operator interface and value passingthat is transparent to the internetwork architecture as follows:1. Connection of an operator interface device to any one controller on the internetwork will allow

the operator to interface with all other controllers as if that interface were directly connected tothe other controllers. Data, status information, reports, system software, custom programs,etc., for all controllers shall be available for viewing and editing from any one controller on theinternetwork.

2. All database values (i.e., points, software variable, custom program variables) of any onecontroller shall be readable by any other controller on the internetwork. This value passingshall be automatically performed by a controller when a reference to a point name not locatedin that controller is entered into the controller's database. An operator/installer shall not berequired to set up any communications services to perform internetwork value passing.



G. The time clocks in all controllers shall be automatically synchronized daily. An operator change tothe time clock of any controller shall be automatically broadcast to all controllers on theinternetwork. System shall automatically adjust for daylight saving and standard time.

H. The internetwork shall have the following minimum capacity for future expansion:1. Each building controller shall have routing capacity for 20 additional sublevel controllers.2. The building controller network shall have the capacity for 20 building controllers.3. As a minimum, the system shall have an overall capacity for at least 2500 building controller,

custom application controller, and application specific controller input/output objects.

2.3 OPERATOR INTERFACE

A. Operator Interface. Furnish one local PC workstation as shown on the drawings. This workstationshall reside on high-speed network with building controllers. Each standard browser connected toserver shall be able to access all system information.

B. Work-station information access shall use the BACnet Protocol. Communication shall use the ISO8802-3 (Ethernet) Physical/Data Link layer protocol. Remote communications shall use theBACnet Point to Point Physical/Data Link Layer Protocol. Operator Workstation shall comply withAnnex J of the BACnet specification for IP connections. Must support interoprability on wide areanetworks (WAN’s).

C. Hardware. Each workstation or web server shall consist of the following:1. Hardware Base. Industry-standard hardware shall meet or exceed DDC system

manufacturer's recommended specifications and shall meet response times specified inSection 15920 Paragraph 1.05. Hard disk shall have sufficient memory to store systemsoftware, one year of data for trended points specified, and a system database at least twicethe size of the existing database at system acceptance. Configure computers and networkconnections if multiple computers are required to meet specified memory and performance.Web server or workstations shall be IBM-compatible PCs with a minimum of:

a. Intel Pentium IV 1.5 GHz processor or betterb. 256 MB RAM or betterc. 20 GB hard disk or better providing data at 100 MB/secd. High performance graphics adaptere. Ethernet 10/100 network interface cardf. Keyboard, 14” VGA monitor, mouse, 3.5 inch disk drive and CD rom driveg. Windows 2000 Professionalh. Modem, 56Kb Minimumi. Color Printer (Inkjet or Laser)j. Serial, parallel, and network communication ports and cables required for proper system

operation2. Modem. Auto-dial modem and associated cables shall transmit over voice-grade telephone

lines at a nominal 56,000 baud and shall provide communication between workstation or webserver and remote buildings and workstations.

3. The workstation shall use the Read (Iniate) and Write (Execute) Services as defined inClauses 15.5 and 15.8, respectively, of ASHRAE Standard 135-1995 to communicate with theBACnet objects in the internetwork.

D. System Software1. System Graphics. The Operator Work-station software shall be graphically oriented. The

system shall allow display of up to 10 graphic screens at once for comparison and monitoringof system status. Provide a method for the operator to easily move between graphic displays



and change the size and location of graphic displays on the screen. The system graphicsshall be able to be modified while on line. An operator with the proper password level shall beable to add, delete, or change dynamic points on a graphic. Dynamic points shall includeanalog and binary values, dynamic text, static text, and animation files. Graphics shall havethe ability to show animation of equipment. Graphics shall include pop-up windows for criticalalarm conditions such as equipment failures.

2. Custom Graphics. Custom graphic files shall be created with the use of commonly availablegraphics packages furnished with the system. The graphics generation package shall createand modify graphics that are saved in industry standard formats such as PCX, BMP, GIF andJPEG. The graphics generation package shall also provide the capability of capturing orconverting graphics from other programs such as Designer, or AutoCAD.

3. Graphics Library. Furnish a complete library of standard HVAC equipment such as boilers,chillers, cooling towers, air handlers, VAV boxes, FTU’s, fan coil units, unit heaters, etc. Thislibrary shall also include standard symbols for other equipment including fans, pumps, coils,valves, piping, dampers, and ductwork. The library shall be furnished in a file formatcompatible with the graphics generation package program.

4. Units of Measurement shall be English.

E. System Applications. Each work-station shall provide operator interface and off-line storage ofsystem information. Provide the following applications at each work-station.1. Automatic System Database Save and Restore. Each work-station shall store on the hard

disk a copy of the current database of each building controller. This database shall beupdated whenever a change is made in any panel in the system. The storage of this datashall be automatic and not require operator intervention. In the event of a database loss in abuilding management panel, the first work-station to detect the loss shall automatically restorethe database for that panel. This capability may be disabled by the operator.

2. Manual Database Save and Restore. A system operator with the proper password clearanceshall be able to archive the database from any system panel and store on magnetic media.The operator shall also be able to clear a panel database and manually initiate a download ofa specified database to any panel in the system.

3. System Configuration. The work-station software shall provide a graphical method ofconfiguring the system. The user with proper security shall be able to add new devices, andassign modems to devices. This shall allow for future system changes or additions.

4. On-Line Help. Provide a context sensitive, on line help system to assist the operator inoperation and editing of the system. On line help shall be available for all applications andshall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help information shall beavailable through the use of hypertext.

5. Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to the system with a user name andpassword in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable foreach operator. The system supervisor shall have the ability to set passwords and securitylevels for all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the operator’saccess for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen editor, and object. Each operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if no keyboard or mouse activityis detected. This auto logoff time shall be set per operator password. All system security datashall be stored in an encrypted format.

6. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of allwork-stations, printers, modems, network connections, building management panels, andcontrollers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator.

7. Alarm Processing. Any object in the system shall be configurable to alarm in and out ofnormal state. The operator shall be able to configure the alarm limits, warning limits, states,and reactions for each object in the system. Alarm messages shall use the English language.

8. Alarm Reactions. The operator shall be able to determine what actions, if any, are to betaken, by object (or point), during an alarm. Actions shall include logging, printing, startingprograms, displaying messages, dialing out to remote stations, paging, providing audibleannunciation or displaying specific system graphics. Critical alarms such as device failuresshall have pop-up windows in the graphics package. Each of these actions shall be



configurable by work-station and time of day. An object in alarm that has not beenacknowledged within an operator specified time period shall be re-routed to an alternateoperator specified alarm receipt device.

9. Trend Logs. The operator shall be able to define a custom trend log for any data in thesystem. This definition shall include interval, start-time, and stop-time. Trend data shall besampled and stored on the building controller panel, be archivable on the hard disk, and beretrievable for use in spreadsheets and standard database programs.

10. Alarm and Event Logs. The operator shall be able to view all system alarms and change ofstates from any location in the system. Events shall be listed chronologically. An operatorwith the proper security level may acknowledge and clear alarms. All that have not beencleared by the operator shall be archived to the hard disk on the workstation.

11. Object and Property Status and Control. Provide a method for the operator with properpassword protection to view, and edit if applicable, the status of any object and property in thesystem. These statuses shall be available by menu, on graphics, or through customprograms.

12. Clock Synchronization. The real time clocks in all building control panels and work-stationsshall be synchronized on command of an operator. The system shall also be able toautomatically synchronize all system clocks, daily from any operator designated device in thesystem. The system shall automatically adjust for daylight savings and standard time ifapplicable.

13. Reports and Logs. Provide a reporting package that allows the operator to select, modify, orcreate reports. Each report shall be definable as to data content, format, interval, and date. Report data shall be archived on the hard disk for historical reporting. Provide the ability forthe operator to obtain real time logs of designated lists of objects. Reports and logs shall bestored on the PC hard disk in a format that is readily accessible by other standard softwareapplications including spreadsheets and word processing. Reports and logs shall be readilyprinted to the system printer. The operator shall be able to designate reports that shall beprinted or stored to disk at selectable intervals.

14. Custom Reports: Provide the capability for the operator to easily define any system data intoa daily, weekly, monthly, or annual report. These reports shall be time and date stamped andshall contain a report title and the name of the facility.

15. Standard Reports. The following standard system reports shall be provided for this project: AllObjects, Alarm Summary, Disabled Objects, Alarm History. These reports shall be readilycustomized to the project by the owner.

16. Tenant Override Reports. Provide a monthly report showing the daily total time in hours thateach tenant has requested after hours HVAC and lighting services. Provide an annualsummary report that shows the override usage summary on a monthly basis.

17. Weather Report. Provide a monthly report showing the daily minimum, maximum, andaverage outdoor air temperature, as well as the number of heating and cooling degree daysfor each day. Provide an annual report showing the minimum, maximum, and averageoutdoor air temperature, as well as the number of heating and cooling degree days for eachmonth.

F. Workstation Applications Editors. The PC workstation shall support full screen editing of all systemapplications. Provide editors for each application at the PC workstation. The applications shall bedownloaded and executed at the appropriate controller panels.1. Controller. Provide a full screen editor for each type controller and application, that shall allow

the operator with proper password to view and change the configuration, name, controlparameters, and system set-points.

2. Scheduling. An editor for scheduling application shall be provided at each work station. Provide a method of selecting the desired schedule and month. Start and stop times for eachobject shall be adjustable from this master schedule.



2.4 OPERATOR INTERFACE - TOUCHPAD

A. The custom application controller shall include an operator display allowing the user to performbasic daily operations tasks. At a minimum this operator display shall:1. Be installed on the custom application controller and require no additional power source.2. Consist of a one-quarter VGA touch screen with 320 x 240-pixel resolution. The touch screen

shall be backlit. The brightness and contrast shall be adjustable to allow for easy reading ofinformation on the screen.

3. Provide on-screen graphical icons to identify common user functions including viewing pointdata, alarms, scheduling, output overrides, and controller setup.

4. Be capable of having unique user identification and passwords that can be programmed tolimit access to the system and operator functions.

5. Display the current state of all input/output points connected to the controller.6. Allow for up to 24 individual custom display screens that allow 24-character English

descriptions of controller data.7. Give the operator the ability to override the current state of all binary and analog output points

connected to the controller. The controller shall have this capability prior to any on-siteprogramming.

8. Include a time clock which shall maintain correct time for at least 7 days during a power lossto the controller.

9. Allow the operator to modify the start and stop times of the time-of-day schedule within thecontroller. Scheduling function shall provide for 7-day control, with 2 start and stop events perday.

10. Provide a unique visual alarm indicator such as a flashing LED, separate from the displayscreen.

11. Automatically update displayed system information every 10 seconds.

2.5 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

A. Furnish the following applications software for building and energy management. All softwareapplications shall reside and run in the system controllers. Editing of applications shall occur at theoperator workstation.

B. System Security1. User access shall be secured using individual security passwords and user names.2. Passwords shall restrict the user to only the objects, applications, and system functions as

assigned by the system manager.3. User logon/logoff attempts shall be recorded.4. The system shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging off following the

last keystroke. The delay time shall be user definable.

C. Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each object or group of objects in the system. Eachof these schedules shall include the capability for start, stop, optimal start, optimal stop, unoccupiedand night setback sequences, as indicated in the sequences. Each schedule may consist of up to10 events. When a group of objects are scheduled together, provide the capability to defineadvances and delays for each member. Each schedule shall consist of the following:1. Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week.2. Exception Schedules. Provide the ability for the operator to designate any day of the year as

an exception schedule. This exception schedule shall override the standard schedule for thatday. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance. Once an exceptionschedule is executed it will be discarded and replaced by the standard schedule for that day ofthe week.



3. Holiday Schedules. Provide the capability for the operator to define up to 99 special or holidayschedules. These schedules may be placed on the scheduling calendar and will be repeatedeach year. The operator shall be able to define the length of each holiday period.

4. Optimal Start/Stop. The scheduling application outlined above shall support an optimalstart/stop algorithm. This shall calculate the thermal characteristics of a zone and start theequipment prior to occupancy to achieve the desired space temperature at the specifiedoccupancy time. The algorithm shall calculate separate sets of heating and cooling rates forzones that have been unoccupied for less then and greater than 24 hours. Provide the abilityto modify the start/stop algorithm based on outdoor air temperature. Provide an early startlimit in minutes to prevent the system from starting before an operator determined time limit. The optimum start/stop shall be used to transition into and out of the night setback conditions.

D. Alarms. The operator shall be able to determine the action to be taken in the event of an alarm. Alarms shall be routed to the appropriate work-stations based on time and other conditions. Analarm shall be able to start programs, be logged in the event log, printed, generate custommessages graphics. Each analog object shall have both high and low alarm limits. Each binaryshall be set to alarm based on the operator specified state. All alarms shall have the capability tobe automatically or manually disabled.

E. Remote Communications. The system shall have the ability to dial out in the event of an alarm. Receivers shall include telephones and Alpha-numeric pagers. The alarm message shall includethe name of the calling location, the device that generated the alarm, and the alarm message itself. All building controllers connected to the LAN shall have the capability to call out alarm messagesthrough one or more shared modems connected to one or more building controllers on the LAN. Building controllers shall have the capability to call a minimum of 20 different numbers. Numbersmay be controlled by type of alarm or time schedule.

F. Demand Limiting. While not indicated on the points lists, the software shall be capable of beingupgraded at a future date to allow demand limiting software.

G. Maintenance Management. The system shall monitor equipment status and generate maintenancemessages based upon user designated ran time, starts, and/or calendar date limits.

H. Sequencing. Provide application software based upon the sequences of operations specified toproperly sequence chillers, boilers and pumps.

I. PID Control. A PID (proportional-integral-derivative) algorithm with direct or reverse action andanti-wind-up shall be supplied. The algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value used toposition an output or stage a series of outputs. The controlled variable, set-point, and PID gainsshall be user-selectable. The set-point shall optionally be chosen to be a reset schedule.

J. Staggered Start. This application shall prevent all controlled equipment from simultaneouslyrestarting after a power outage. The order in which equipment (or groups of equipment) is started,along with the time delay between starts shall be user-selectable.

K. Anti-Short Cycling. All binary output points shall be protected from short cycling. This feature shallallow minimum on-time and off-time to be selected.

L. Runtime Totalization. Provide software to totalize runtimes as indicated on the points lists. Provideruntime alarms as requested by the Owner.



2.6 BUILDING CONTROLLERS

A. General. Provide an adequate number of Building Controllers to provide the performance specifiedin Part 1 of this specification section. As a minimum, provide the number of Building Controllersindicated in the System Architecture on plans. Each of these panels shall meet the followingrequirements.1. The Building Automation System shall be composed of one or more independent,

stand-alone, microprocessor based Building Controllers to manage the global strategiesdescribed in System software section.

2. The Building Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system,database, and programming requirements.

3. Data shall be shared between networked Building Controllers.4. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output communications

signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point information and allowcentral monitoring and alarms.

5. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real time clock.6. The Building Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits.

If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall:a. Assume a predetermined failure mode.b. Generate an alarm notification.

7. BACnet. The Building Controller shall communicate with other BACnet devices on theinternetwork using the Read (Execute and Initiate) and Write (Execute and Initiate) Propertyservices as defined in Clauses 15.5 through 15.10, respectively, of ASHRAE Standard135-95. Building Controllers shall comply with BACnet device profile B-BC as defined in theASHRAE Standard 135-95, Appx. L.

8. The controller shall provide a communications port for connection of the Portable OperatorsTerminal (Laptop) using Point-to-Point BACnet physical/data link layer protocol.

B. Communications. Each Building Controller shall reside on a BACnet inter-network using the ISO8802-3 (Ethernet) protocol. Each Building Controller shall also perform routing to a network ofCustom Application and Application Specific Controllers. Building Controllers shall as a minimumsupport Point-to-Point (PTP), MS/TP and Ethernet BACnet LAN types. It shall communicatedirectly via these BACnet LANs as a native BACnet device and shall support simultaneous routingfunctions between all supported LAN types.

C. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in NEMA 1 Type rated enclosures, andshall be rated for operation at 32 F to 120 F. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shallbe mounted within NEMA 4 Type waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 0 F to150 F. Controllers mounted in utility spaces shall be NEMA 4.

D. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor. All wiringconnections shall be made to field removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination cardconnected by a ribbon cable.

E. Memory. Controller memory shall support operating system, database and programmingrequirements. The Building Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in theevent of a power loss for at least 72 hours.

F. Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominalvoltage rating and shall perform an orderly shut-down below 80% nominal voltage. Operation shallbe protected from electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 3 feet.



G. Transformer. Power supply for the ASC must be rated at minimum of 125% of ASC powerconsumption, and shall be fused or current limiting type.

2.7 CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS

A. General. Provide native BACnet Custom Application Controllers (CAC) to provide the performancespecified in Part 1 of this section. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements.1. Each central station chilled water air handling unit shall have a dedicated Custom Application

Controller. Hydronic system controllers may be grouped by system served. These controllersshall provide stand-alone control in the event of communication failure using stable andreliable using default values or other method for values normally read over the network.

2. The Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, andprogramming requirements.

3. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real time clock.4. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output communications

signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point information and allowcentral monitoring and alarms.

5. Data shall be shared between networked Controllers.6. The Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If an

abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall:a. Assume a predetermined failure mode.b. Generate an alarm notification.

7. The customer application controller shall communicate with other BACnet devices on theinternetwork using the Read (Execute and Initiate) and Write (Execute and Initiate) Propertyservices as defined in Clauses 15.5 through 15.10, of ASHRAE Standard 135-95. BuildingControllers shall comply with BACnet device profile B-AAC as defined in the ASHRAEStandard 135-95, Appx. L.

B. Communications. Each custom application controller shall reside on a BACnet network using theMS/TP Data Link/Physical Layer protocol. No gateways are allowed. Each controller shall have aBACnet Data Link /Physical layer compatible connection for a laptop computer or portableoperator’s interface tool.

C. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.1. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA 4 Type

waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 0 F to 150 F.2. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in NEMA 1Type rated enclosures,

and shall be rated for operation at 0 C to 50 C [32 F to 120 F]. Controllers used in utilityspaces shall be NEMA 4.

D. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor. All wiringconnections shall be made to field removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination cardconnected by a ribbon cable.

E. Memory. The Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of apower loss for at least 72 hours.

F. Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominalvoltage rating and shall perform an orderly shut-down below 80% nominal voltage. Operation shallbe protected from electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 3 feet.



G. The building operator shall have the ability to make changes to the sequence of operations. Provide supporting documentation on how to implement these changes with O&M data.

H. Spare Capacity. Provide a minimum of 2 each binary input, binary output, analog input, analogoutput, analog value and binary value points for each custom application controller used for airhandler applications. . Provide a minimum of 4 each binary input, binary output, analog input,analog output, analog value and binary value points for each custom application controller used forcentral plant applications. Universal points may be used to meet this requirement.

I. Transformer. Power supply for the ASC must be rated at minimum of 125% of ASC powerconsumption, and shall be fused or current limiting type.

2.8 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS

A. General. Application specific controllers (ASC) are microprocessor-based DDC controllers whichthrough hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a specific piece of equipment. Theyare not fully user programmable, but are customized for operation within the confines of theequipment they are designed to serve.1. Each ASC shall be capable of stand-alone operation and shall continue to provide control

functions without being connected to the network.2. Each ASC will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control the target system.3. ASC’s, if used, must support the sequence of operations and provide the points indicated on

the points list. If not, a CSC must be used.4. The ASC’s shall communicate with other BACnet devices on the internetwork using the Read

(Execute and Initiate) Property services as defined in Clauses 15.5 of ASHRAE Standard135-95. Building Controllers shall comply with BACnet device profile B-ASC as defined in theASHRAE Standard 135-95, Appx. L.

B. Environment. The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.1. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA 4 Type

waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 0 F to 150 F.2. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in NEMA 1 Type rated enclosures,

and shall be rated for operation at 32 F to 120 F. Controllers mounted in utility spaces shallbe NEMA 4.

C. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, and communications. All wiring connectionsshall be made to field removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by aribbon cable.

D. Memory. The Application Specific Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming informationin the event of a power loss for at least 90 days.

E. Immunity to Power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominalvoltage rating and shall perform an orderly shut-down below 80%.

F. Transformer. Power supply for the ASC must be rated at minimum of 125% of ASC powerconsumption, and shall be fused or current limiting type. Operation shall be protected fromelectrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 3 feet.



G. Communications. Each custom application controller shall reside on a BACnet using the MS/TPData Link/Physical Layer protocol. Each controller shall have a BACnet Data Link /Physical layercompatible connection for a laptop computer or portable operator’s interface tool.

2.9 INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE

A. Hard-wired inputs and outputs may tie into the system through Building, Custom, or ApplicationSpecific Controllers.

B. All input points and output points shall be protected such that shorting of the point to itself, anotherpoint, or ground will cause no damage to the controller. All input and output points shall beprotected from voltage up to 24V of any duration, such that contact with this voltage will cause nodamage to the controller.

C. Binary inputs shall allow the monitoring of on/off signals from remote devices. The binary inputsshall provide a wetting current of at least 12 ma to be compatible with commonly available controldevices and shall be protected against the effects of contact bounce and noise. Binary inputs shallsense “dry contact” closure without external power (other than that provided by the controller) beingapplied.

D. Pulse accumulation input points. This type of point shall conform to all the requirements of BinaryInput points, and also accept up to 10 pulses per second for pulse accumulation.

E. Analog inputs shall allow the monitoring of low voltage (0-10 Vdc), current (4-20 ma), or resistancesignals (thermistor, RTD). Analog inputs shall be compatible with, and field configurable tocommonly available sensing devices.

F. Binary outputs shall provide for on/off operation, or a pulsed low voltage signal for pulse widthmodulation control. Binary outputs on custom and building controllers or relays shall have3-position (on/off/auto) override switches and status lights. Outputs shall be selectable for eithernormally open or normally closed operation.

G. Analog outputs shall provide a modulating signal for the control of end devices. Outputs shallprovide either a 0-10 Vdc or a 4-20 ma signal as required to provide proper control of the outputdevice. Analog outputs on bulding or custom application controllers shall have status lights and atwo position (AUTO/MANUAL) switch and manually adjustable potentiometer for manual override. Analog outputs shall not exibit a drift of greater than 0.4% of range per year.

H. Tri-State Outputs. Control three-point floating electronic actuators without feedback with tri-stateoutputs (two coordinated binary outputs). Tri-State outputs may be used to provide analog outputcontrol in zone control and terminal unit control applications such as VAV terminal units,duct-mounted heating coils, and zone dampers.

I. Pulse-Width Modulation. Control actuators designed for pulse-width modulation with a single binaryoutput that cycles with variable on and off times as determined by the application software.Pulse-width modulation may be used to provide analog output control in zone control and terminalunit control applications such as VAV terminal units, duct-mounted heating coils, and zonedampers.



J. Universal Inputs and Outputs. Inputs and outputs that can be designated as either binary or analogin software shall conform to the provisions of this section that are appropriate for their designateduse.

2.10 POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING

A. Power Supplies. Control transformers shall be UL listed. Furnish Class 2 current-limiting type orfurnish over-current protection in primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service in accordancewith NEC requirements. Limit connected loads to 80% of rated capacity.1. DC power supply output shall match output current and voltage requirements. Unit shall be

full-wave rectifier type with output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak-to-peak. Regulation shallbe 1.0% line and load combined, with 100-microsecond response time for 50% load changes.Unit shall have built-in over-voltage and over-current protection and shall be able to withstand150% current overload for at least three seconds without trip-out or failure.

a. Unit shall operate between 0°C and 50°C (32°F and 120°F). EM/RF shall meet FCC ClassB and VDE 0871 for Class B and MILSTD 810C for shock and vibration.

b. Line voltage units shall be UL recognized and CSA listed.

B. Power Line Filtering.1. Provide internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations and

controllers. Surge protection shall have:a. Dielectric strength of 1000 V minimumb. Response time of 10 nanoseconds or lessc. Transverse mode noise attenuation of 65 dB or greaterd. Common mode noise attenuation of 150 dB or greater at 40-100 Hz

C. Isolated Loop Circuit Protector. Install isolated loop circuit protectors on all MS/TP communicationtrunks at the point where the trunk enters and leaves all buildings. This includes protection of linesrouted on external surfaces of the building such as walls and roofs. The loop circuit protector shallbe designed to protect equipment from transient voltage spikes and surges and shall be UL Listedin accordance with UL 497B. Provide devices suitable for the application that meet or exceed thefollowing specifications.

D.Specifications – Operating:Maximum Operating Voltage:12 Volts / 24 VoltsTypical Leakage Current:< 5u AmpsMaximum Data Rate:22 KbsOperation Temperature:- 40 - + 85 CConnection:Dual Terminal BlocksLines Protected:One PairInstallation Configuration:In-Line SeriesSpecifications – Electronic:Maximum Surge Current (8x20us):10,000 Amps Per lineMaximum Surge Voltage (1.2x50us):6,000 VoltsCapacitance:<250 pfClamping Voltage:15 Volts / 30 VoltsClamping Response Time:<5 NanosecondsVoltage:Voltage sensitivePower Dissipation:60,000,000 VAUL497BE158611Pass Voltage (ANSI/IEEE B3 Impulse):19 Volts Peak / 31Volts Peak



First Stage Power Dissipation (8x20us):10,000 AmpsDimension:Depth: 1” Width: 2” Length: 1 ½”Tabs: ½” each

2.11 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES

A. Motorized dampers, unless otherwise specified elsewhere, shall be as follows:1. Outdoor air and return air mixing dampers and face and bypass dampers shall be parallel

blade, arranged to direct airstreams towards each other. Other modulating dampers shall bethe opposed blade type. Two position shut off dampers may be parallel or opposed bladedampers with side seals. Face and Bypass dampers shall be sized to match existingconditions.

2. Damper frames shall be 13 gauge galvanized sheet metal or 1/8" extruded aluminum withreinforced corner bracing.

3. Damper blades shall not exceed 8" in width or 48" in length. Blades are to be suitable formedium velocity performance (2,000 fpm). Blades shall be not less than 16 gauge.

4. Damper shaft bearings shall be as recommended by manufacturer for application, oilimpregnated sintered bronze or better.

5. All blade edges and top and bottom of the frame shall be provided with compressible seals. Side seals shall be compressible stainless steel. The blade seals shall provide for amaximum leakage rate of 10 CFM per square foot at 4.0" w.c. differential pressure. Provideairfoil blades suitable for a wide open face velocity of 1500 fpm.

6. All leakage testing and pressure ratings will be based on AMCA Publication 500.7. Individual damper sections shall not be larger than 48" x 60". Provide a minimum of one

damper actuator per section.8. Modulating dampers shall provide a linear flow charactoristic where possible.9. Dampers shall have exposed linkages.

B. Electronic damper/valve actuators.1. The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent

damage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator.2. Where appropriate, for power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring return

mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing.3. All rotary spring return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise or counter clockwise

spring return operation. Linear actuators shall spring return to the retracted position.4. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 VDC or 0-20 ma control signal and provide a 2- 10

VDC or 4-20 ma operating range.5. All 24 VAC/DC actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring and shall not require more than 10

VA for AC or more than 8 W for DC applications. Actuators operating on 120 VAC or 230VAC shall not required more than 11 VA.

6. All non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow manualpositioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. Spring return actuators withmore than 60 in-lb. torque capacity shall have a manual crank for this purpose.

7. All modulating actuators shall have an external, built-in switch to allow the reversing ofdirection of rotation

8. Actuators shall be provided with a conduit fitting and a minimum 1m electrical cable and shallbe pre-wired to eliminate the necessity of opening the actuator housing to make electricalconnections.

9. Actuators shall be Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873 listed.



10. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuator's ratedtorque.

C. Control Valves1. Control valves shall be two or three-way type as shown on drawings for two-position or

modulating service as shown.2. Close-off (differential) Pressure Rating: Valve actuator and trim shall be furnished to provide

the following minimum close-off pressure ratings:a. Water Valves:

1) Two-way: 150% of total system (pump) head.2) Three-way: 300% of pressure differential between ports A and B at design flow

or 100% of total system (pump) head.3. Water Valves:

a. Body and trim style and materials shall be per manufacturer's recommendations for designconditions and service shown, with equal percentage ports for modulating service.

b. Sizing Criteria:1) Two-position service: Line size.2) Two-way Modulating Service: Pressure drop equal to twice the pressure drop of

the heat exchanger (load), 50% of the pressure difference between supply andreturn mains, or 5 psi, whichever is greater.

3) Three-way Modulating Service: Pressure drop shall be equal to twice thepressure drop through the coil, 5 psi maximum.

4) Valves 1/2" through 2" shall be bronze body or cast brass ANSI Class 250,spring loaded, PTFE packing, quick opening for two-position service. Two-wayvalves shall have replaceable composition disc or stainless steel ball.

5) 2-1/2" valves and larger shall be cast iron ANSI Class 125 with guided plug andPTFE packing.

D. Binary Temperature Devices.1. Low-Voltage Space Thermostats. Low-voltage space thermostats shall be 24 V,

bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealedsetpoint adjustment, 13°C-30°C (55°F-85°F) setpoint range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential,and vented ABS plastic cover.

2. Line-Voltage Space Thermostats. Line-voltage space thermostats shall be bimetal-actuated,open-contact type or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch type or equivalent solid-statetype, with heat anticipator, UL listing for electrical rating, concealed setpoint adjustment,13°C-30°C (55°F-85°F) setpoint range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented ABSplastic cover.

3. Low-Limit Thermostats. Low-limit airstream thermostats shall be UL listed, vapor pressuretype. Element shall be at least 6 m (20 ft) long. Element shall sense temperature in each 30cm (1 ft) section and shall respond to lowest sensed temperature. Low-limit thermostat shallbe manual reset only.

E. Temperature Sensors1. Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) or Thermistor.2. Duct sensors shall be averaging. Averaging sensors shall be a minimum of 5 feet in length

per 10 square feet of duct cross section.3. Space sensors shall be equipped with set-point adjustment, override switch, display, and/or

communication port as shown on the drawings.4. Provide matched temperature sensors for differential temperature measurement. Differential

accuracy shall be within 0.2 F.5. Immersion sensors shall be provided with a separable stainless steel well. Pressure rating of

well shall be same as system in which it is installed. The well must withstand flow velocities inthe pipe.



F. Humidity Sensors1. Duct and room sensors shall have a humidity sensing range of 20% to 80%RH.2. Duct sensors shall be provided with a sampling chamber.3. Outdoor air humidity sensors shall have a sensing range of 20% to 95%RH. They shall be

suitable for ambient conditions of –40F to 170F.4. Humidity sensor’s drift shall not exceed 1% of the full scale per year.

G. Flow Switches. Flow-proving switches shall be paddle (water service only) or differential pressuretype (air or water service) as recommended by manufacturer for application. Switches shall be ULlisted, SPDT snap-acting, and pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum).1. Paddle switches shall have adjustable sensitivity and NEMA 4 enclosure unless otherwise

specified.2. Differential pressure switches shall have scale range and differential suitable for intended

application and NEMA 4 enclosure unless otherwise specified.

H. Flow Meters1. Provide in line electromagnetic flow meters specifically designed for chilled water and heating

water applications meeting the pipe sizes, flow rates and physical contraints of the systems.2. Flow meters used for central plant flow measurements shall have an accuracy of 0.5% or

better through a flow range of 10% to 100% of total flow.3. Meters shall have a 4-20 mA analog output and 2 programmable pulse outputs, and shall be

selected by controls contractor for compatibility with controls system.4. Flow meters shall provide the above performance when installed in horizontal configurations

of straight run of pipe free of bends, tees, valves, transitions and other obstructions fordistances of 3 pipe diameters upstream and 2 pipe diameters downstream. No furtherrestrictions on straight length of piping are acceptable.

5. Basis of design is ONICON F-3000 series.

I. Airflow Measuring Station.1. Provide thermal dispersion technology, high density sensor with NIST traceable calibration

designed for outdoor airflow monitoring and airflow tracking applications. Station shall includeprobe(s) and transmitter with two analog outputs and an RS-485 network output with fieldselectable BACnet MSTP or Modbuys RTU interface.

2. Designed for duct or plenum mount applications, including rooftop unit outside air intakes.3. Arithmetic average multipoint independent sensors. Aluminum or stainless steel probe

construction. Probes/sensor nodes configured for specific mounting application.4. 0-5000 fpm range.5. Optional remote mounted transimitter with plenum rated cabling.6. Accuracy shall be +/- 3%7. UL 873 listed.8. Probes: -20 to 160F, 0-100% RH.9. Transimitter: -20 - 120F, 5-95% RH.10. Ebtron Gold Series or equal.

J. Relays1. Control relays shall be UL listed plug-in type with dust cover. Contact rating, configuration,

and coil voltage suitable for application.2. Time delay relays shall be UL listed solid-state plug-in type with adjustable time delay. Delay

shall be adjustable plus or minus 200% (minimum) from set-point shown on plans. Contactrating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application. Provide NEMA 4 Typeenclosure when not installed in local control panel.

K. Current Transmitters.



1. AC current transmitters shall be self-powered, combination split-core current transformer typewith built-in rectifier and high-gain servo amplifier with 4-20 mA two-wire output. Full-scale unitranges shall be 10 A, 20 A, 50 A, 100 A, 150 A, and 200 A, with internal zero and spanadjustment. Unit accuracy shall be ±1% full-scale at 500 ohm maximum burden.

2. Transmitter shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be UL/CSArecognized.

3. Unit shall be split-core type for clamp-on installation on existing wiring.

L. Current Transformers.1. AC current transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized and shall be completely encased

(except for terminals) in approved plastic material.2. Transformers shall be available in various current ratios and shall be selected for ±1%

accuracy at 5 A full-scale output.3. Use fixed-core transformers for new wiring installation and split-core transformers for existing

wiring installation.

M. Voltage Transmitters.1. AC voltage transmitters shall be self-powered single-loop (two-wire) type, 4-20 mA output with

zero and span adjustment.2. Adjustable full-scale unit ranges shall be 100-130 Vac, 200-250 Vac, 250-330 Vac, and

400-600 Vac. Unit accuracy shall be ±1% full-scale at 500 ohm maximum burden.3. Transmitters shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be UL/CSA

recognized at 600 Vac rating.

N. Voltage Transformers.1. AC voltage transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized, 600 Vac rated, and shall have built-in

fuse protection.2. Transformers shall be suitable for ambient temperatures of 4°C-55°C (40°F-130°F) and shall

provide ±0.5% accuracy at 24 Vac and 5 VA load.3. Windings (except for terminals) shall be completely enclosed with metal or plastic.

O. Power Monitors.1. Power monitors shall be three-phase type and shall have three-phase disconnect and shorting

switch assembly, UL listed voltage transformers, and UL listed split-core current transformers.2. Power monitors shall provide selectable output: rate pulse for kWh reading or 4-20 mA for kW

reading. Power monitors shall operate with 5 A current inputs and maximum error of ±2% at1.0 power factor or ±2.5% at 0.5 power factor.

P. Current Switches1. Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid state with adjustable trip current. The

switches shall be selected to match the current of the application and output requirements ofthe DDC system.

Q. Pressure Transducers.1. Transducers shall have linear output signal and field-adjustable zero and span.2. Continuous operating conditions of positive or negative pressure 50% greater than calibrated

span shall not damage transducer sensing elements.3. Water pressure transducer diaphragm shall be stainless steel with minimum proof pressure of

1000 kPa (150 psi). Transducer shall have 4-20 mA output, suitable mounting provisions, andblock and bleed valves.

4. Water differential pressure transducer diaphragm shall be stainless steel with minimum proofpressure of 1000 kPa (150 psi). Over-range limit (differential pressure) and maximum staticpressure shall be 2000 kPa (300 psi.) Transducer shall have 4-20 mA output, suitablemounting provisions, and 5-valve manifold.



R. Differential Pressure Switches1. (Air or water service) UL listed, SPDT snap acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA

1 enclosure, with scale range and differential suitable for intended application.

S. Pressure-Electric (PE) Switches. PE switches shall be UL listed, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum)or motor control rated, metal or neoprene diaphragm actuated, operating pressure rated for 0-175kPa (0-25 psig), with calibrated scale minimum setpoint range of 14-125 kPa (2-18 psig).1. Provide one- or two-stage switch action (SPDT, DPST, or DPDT) as required by application.2. Switches shall be open type (panel-mounted). Exception: Switches shall be enclosed type for

remote installation. Enclosed type shall be NEMA 4 unless otherwise specified.3. Each pneumatic signal line to PE switches shall have permanent indicating gauge.

T. Local Control Panels (for relays, tranducers, etc.)1. All indoor control cabinets shall be fully enclosed NEMA 4 Type construction with hinged door,

key-lock latch, removable sub-panels. A single key shall be common to all field panels andsub-panels. Outdoor control cabinets, if required, shall be NEMA 4 enclosures with similarfeatures.

2. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices pre-wired with color-codedstranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped. Terminals for fieldconnections shall be UL listed for 600-volt service, individually identified per control/interlockdrawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control termination’s for field connectionshall be individually identified per control drawings.

3. Provide on/off power switch with over-current protection and main air gauge for control powersources to each local panel.

2.12 WIRING AND RACEWAYS

A. Power Wiring1. Provide all power wiring necessary for a complete installation in accordance with the NEC

requirements. Coordinate with Owner’s maintenance staff to locate suitable power or lightingpanels. For bidding purposes assume suitable panels are available within 100’ of point ofneed. All power wiring shall be copper and shall be run in EMT or rigid conduit suitable forinstalled environment. Power wiring shall be installed by a licensed electrician. All insulatedwire to be copper conductors, UL labeled for 90 degree C minimum service. All wiring inoverhead ceiling cavities and mechanical rooms shall be plenum rated.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Thoroughly examine project plans for control device and equipment locations. Reportdiscrepancies, conflicts, or omissions to Design Engineer for resolution before starting rough-inwork or ordering controls.

B. Inspect site to verify that equipment can be installed as shown. Report discrepancies, conflicts, oromissions to Engineer for resolution before starting rough-in work or ordering controls.

C. Examine drawings and specifications for work of others. Report inadequate headroom or spaceconditions or other discrepancies to Engineer and obtain written instructions for changes necessary



to accommodate Section 15920 work with work of others. Controls Contractor shall perform at hisexpense necessary changes in specified work caused by failure or neglect to report discrepancies.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Controls Contractor shall protect against and be liable for damage to work and to material causedby Contractor's work or employees.

B. Controls Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until inspected, tested, andaccepted. Protect material not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporarycovers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects.

3.3 COORDINATION

A. Site.1. Assist in coordinating space conditions to accommodate the work of each trade where work

will be installed near or will interfere with work of other trades. If installation withoutcoordination causes interference with work of other trades, Contractor shall correct conditionswithout extra charge.

2. Coordinate and schedule work with other work in the same area and with work dependentupon other work to facilitate mutual progress.

B. Submittals. See Section 15920 Article 1.10 (Submittals).

C. Test and Balance.1. Provide Test and Balance Contractor a single set of necessary tools to interface to control

system for testing and balancing.2. Train Test and Balance Contractor to use control system interface tools.3. Provide a qualified technician to assist with testing and balancing the first 20 terminal units,

and others as required.4. Test and Balance Contractor shall return tools undamaged and in working condition at

completion of testing and balancing.

D. Life Safety.1. Duct smoke detectors required for air handler shutdown are provided by Controls Contractor

and shall meet the requirements of all applicable codes. Interlock smoke detectors to airhandlers for shutdown as specified in Sequences of Operation.

E. Coordination with Other Controls. Integrate with and coordinate controls and control devicesfurnished or installed by others as follows.1. Communication media and equipment shall be provided as specified in Section 15920

(Communication).2. Each supplier of a controls product shall configure, program, start up, and test that product to

meet the sequences of operation described in plans regardless of where within the contractdocuments those products are described.

3. Coordinate and resolve incompatibility issues that arise between control products providedunder this section and those provided under other sections or divisions of this specification.

4. Controls Contractor shall be responsible for integration of control products provided bymultiple suppliers regardless of where integration is described within the contract documents.



3.4 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP

A. Install equipment, piping, and wiring or raceway horizontally, vertically, and parallel to wallswherever possible.

B. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for piping and equipment vibrationisolation.

C. Install equipment in readily accessible locations as defined by National Electrical Code (NEC)Chapter 1 Article 100 Part A.

D. Verify wiring integrity to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and ground faults.

E. Equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with industry specifications and standards and localcodes for performance, reliability, and compatibility.


A. Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with rules and regulations of applicable local, state,and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Section 15920 (Codes and Standards).

B. Continually monitor field installation for code compliance and workmanship quality

C. Contractor shall arrange for work inspection by local or state authorities having jurisdiction over thework.

3.6 EXISTING EQUIPMENT

A. Wiring. Abandoned wires may be reused. Check wire integrity and ensure proper application toinstallation. Identify and test reused wires according to this specification. Properly identify unusedor redundant wiring.

B. Local Control Panels. Existing local control panels may be used to locate new equipment if suchpanels meet specification requirements and are in acceptable condition to the Owner. Remove anddeliver redundant and unused equipment to Owner. Patch panel face cover to fill holes caused byremoval of unused equipment. Relocate panels as shown.

C. Repair. Unless otherwise directed, Contractor is not responsible for repair or replacement ofexisting energy equipment and systems, valves, dampers, or actuators unless otherwise indicatedon plans. Notify County Construction Manager in writing immediately of existing equipment thatrequires maintenance.

D. Temperature Sensor Wells. Existing temperature sensor wells in piping may be reused if locatedas indicated on plans. Modify wells as required for proper fit of new sensors.

E. Room Thermostats. Remove and deliver unnecessary thermostats to Owner unless otherwisenoted. Patch and finish holes and marks left by removal to match existing walls.



F. Electronic Sensors and Transmitters. Existing sensors and transmitters may not be re-used unlessspecifically noted otherwise. Remove and deliver unnecessary sensors and transmitters madeobsolite to Owner.

G. Controllers and Auxiliary Electronic Devices shall not be reused.

H. Damper Actuators, Linkages, and Appurtenances: Existing damper actuators, linkages, andappurtenances shall not be reused unless specifically noted otherwise. Remove and deliverunnecessary equipment to Owner.

I. Control Valves. See plans.

J. Existing System Operating Schedule. See plans and Division 1 specifications.

K. Modify existing starter control circuits if necessary to provide hand-off-auto control of eachcontrolled starter. Furnish new starters or starter control packages as required.

L. Patch holes and finish to match existing walls.

M. At Owner's request, items to be delivered to Owner shall instead be properly disposed of.Hazardous materials shall be disposed of in accordance with all Federal, State and Localregulations.

3.7 WIRING

A. Control and interlock wiring and installation shall comply with national and local electrical codes andmanufacturer's recommendations.

B. NEC Class 1 (line voltage) wiring shall be UL listed in approved raceway or conduit as required byNEC.

C. Low-voltage wiring shall meet NEC Class 2 requirements. Subfuse low-voltage power circuits asrequired to meet Class 2 current limit.

D. NEC Class 2 (current-limited) wires not in raceway but in concealed and accessible locations suchas return air plenums shall be UL listed for the intended application.

E. Install control wiring in conduit where subject to mechanical damage and at levels below 3 m (10ft)in mechanical, electrical, or service rooms.

F. Do not install Class 2 wiring in raceway containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containinghigh voltage wiring and equipment may not be used for low-voltage wiring except for the purpose ofinterfacing the two (e.g., relays and transformers).

G. Install Class 1 and Class 2 wiring in separate raceways. Boxes and panels containing high-voltagewiring and equipment shall not be used for low-voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacingthe two through relays and transformers.

H. Do not install wiring in raceway containing tubing.



I. Run exposed Class 2 wiring parallel to a surface or perpendicular to it and tie neatly at 30 ftintervals.

J. Use structural members to support or anchor plenum cables without raceway. Do not useductwork, electrical raceways, piping, or ceiling suspension systems to support or anchor cables.

K. Secure raceways with raceway clamps fastened to structure and spaced according to coderequirements. Raceways and pull boxes shall not be hung on or attached to ductwork, electricalraceways, piping, or ceiling suspension systems.

L. Size raceway and select wire size and type in accordance with manufacturer's recommendationsand NEC requirements.

M. Include one pull string in each raceway 2.5 cm (1 in.) or larger.

N. Use color-coded conductors throughout.

O. Locate control and status relays in designated enclosures only. Do not install control and statusrelays in packaged equipment control panel enclosures containing Class 1 starters.

P. Conceal raceways except within mechanical, electrical, or service rooms. Maintain minimumclearance of 15 cm (6 in.) between raceway and high-temperature equipment such as steam pipesor flues.

Q. Adhere to requirements in NEC where raceway crosses building expansion joints.

R. Install insulated bushings on raceway ends and enclosure openings. Seal top ends of verticalraceways.

S. Terminate control and interlock wiring related to the work of this section. Maintain at the job siteupdated (as-built) wiring diagrams that identify terminations.

T. Flexible metal raceways and liquid-tight flexible metal raceways shall not exceed 1 m (3 ft) in lengthand shall be supported at each end. Do not use flexible metal raceway less than ½ in. electricaltrade size. Use liquid-tight flexible metal raceways in areas exposed to moisture including chillerand boiler rooms.

U. Install raceway rigidly, support adequately, ream at both ends, and leave clean and free ofobstructions. Join raceway sections with couplings and according to code. Make terminations inboxes with fittings. Make terminations not in boxes with bushings.

3.8 COMMUNICATION WIRING

A. Communication wiring shall be low-voltage Class 2 wiring and shall comply with Article 3.7 (Wiring).

B. Install communication wiring in separate raceways and enclosures from other Class 2 wiring.

C. During installation do not exceed maximum cable pulling, tension, or bend radius specified by thecable manufacturer.



D. Verify entire network's integrity following cable installation using appropriate tests for each cable.

E. Install lightning arrestor according to manufacturer's recommendations between cable and groundwhere a cable enters or exits a building.

F. Each run of communication wiring shall be a continuous length without splices when that length iscommercially available. Runs longer than commercially available lengths shall have as few splicesas possible using commercially available lengths.

G. Label communication wiring to indicate origination and destination.

H. Ground coaxial cable according to NEC regulations article on "Communications Circuits, Cable,and Protector Grounding."

3.9 INSTALLATION OF SENSORS

A. Install sensors according to manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for operating environment.

C. Install room temperature sensors on concealed junction boxes properly supported by wall framing.

D. Air seal wires attached to sensors in their raceways or in the wall to prevent sensor readings frombeing affected by air transmitted from other areas.

E. Use averaging sensors in mixing plenums and hot and cold decks. Install averaging sensors in aserpentine manner vertically across duct. Support each bend with a capillary clip.

F. Install mixing plenum low-limit sensors in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Supporteach bend with a capillary clip. Provide 3 m (1 ft) of sensing element for each 1 m 2 (1 ft 2) of coilarea.

G. Install pipe-mounted temperature sensors in wells. Install liquid temperature sensors withheat-conducting fluid in thermal wells.

H. Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall at approved location with sun shield.

I. Differential Air Static Pressure.1. Supply Duct Static Pressure. Pipe high-pressure tap to duct using a pitot tube. Make pressure

tap connections according to manufacturer's recommendations.2. Piping to pressure transducer pressure ports shall contain a capped test port adjacent to

transducer.3. Pressure transducers, except those controlling VAV boxes, shall be located in control panels,

not on monitored equipment or on ductwork. Mount transducers in a vibration-free locationaccessible for service without use of ladders or special equipment.

4. Mount gauge tees adjacent to air and water differential pressure taps. Install shut-off valvesbefore tee for water gauges.



J. Smoke detectors, freezestats, high-pressure cut-offs, and other safety switches shall be hard-wiredto de-energize equipment as described in the sequence of operation. Switches shall requiremanual reset. Provide contacts that allow DDC software to monitor safety switch status.

3.10 FLOW SWITCH INSTALLATION

A. Use correct paddle for pipe diameter.

B. Adjust flow switch according to manufacturer's instructions.

3.11 ACTUATORS

A. General. Mount actuators and adapters according to manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Electric and Electronic Damper Actuators. Mount actuators directly on damper shaft or jackshaftunless shown as a linkage installation. Link actuators according to manufacturer'srecommendations.1. For low-leakage dampers with seals, mount actuator with a minimum 5° travel available for

damper seal tightening.2. To compress seals when spring-return actuators are used on normally closed dampers,

power actuator to approximately 5° open position, manually close the damper, then tightenlinkage.

3. Check operation of damper-actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates dampersmoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions.

4. Provide necessary mounting hardware and linkages for actuator installation.

C. Valve Actuators. Connect actuators to valves with adapters approved by actuator manufacturer.

3.12 WARNING LABELS

A. Affix permanent warning labels to equipment that can be automatically started by the controlsystem.1. Labels shall use white lettering (12-point type or larger) on a red background.2. Warning labels shall read as follows.

C A U T I O NThis equipment is operating under automatic control and may start or stop atany time without warning. Switch disconnect to "Off" position beforeservicing.

B. Affix permanent warning labels to motor starters and control panels that are connected to multiplepower sources utilizing separate disconnects.1. Labels shall use white lettering (12-point type or larger) on a red background.2. Warning labels shall read as follows.

C A U T I O NThis equipment is fed from more than one power source with separatedisconnects. Disconnect all power sources before servicing.



3.13 IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING

A. Label wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels, with control systemaddress or termination number at each end within 5 cm (2 in.) of termination.

B. Label pneumatic tubing at each end within 5 cm (2 in.) of termination with a descriptive identifier.

C. Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show instrument or item served.

D. Label control panels with minimum 1 cm (½ in.) letters on laminated plastic nameplates.

E. Label each control component with a permanent label. Label plug-in components such that labelremains stationary during component replacement.

F. Label room sensors related to terminal boxes or valves with nameplates.

G. Manufacturers' nameplates and UL or CSA labels shall be visible and legible after equipment isinstalled.

H. Label identifiers shall match record documents.

3.14 PROGRAMMING

A. Point Naming. Name points as shown on the equipment points list provided with each sequence ofoperation. See Sequences of Operation. Where multiple points with the same name reside in thesame controller, each point name may be customized with its associated Program Object number.For example, "Zone Temp 1" for Zone 1, "Zone Temp 2" for Zone 2.

B. Software Programming. Programming shall provide actions for each possible situation. Graphic- orparameter-based programs shall be documented. Text-based programs shall be modular,structured, and commented to clearly describe each section of the program.1. Application Programming. Provide application programming that adheres to sequences of

operations. Program documentation or comment statements shall reflect language used insequences of operation.

2. System Programming. Provide system programming necessary for system operation.

C. Operator Interface.1. Standard Graphics. Provide graphics as specified in Section 15920 (System Graphics). Show

on each equipment graphic input and output points and relevant calculated points such asindicated on the applicable Points List. Point information on graphics shall dynamically update.

2. Install, initialize, start up, and troubleshoot operator interface software and functions (includingoperating system software, operator interface database, and third-party software installationand integration required for successful operator interface operation) as described in Section15920.



3.15 CONTROL SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TESTING

A. Start-up Testing: All testing listed in this section shall be performed by the contractor and shallmakeup part of the necessary verification of a control system. This testing shall be completedbefore the Engineer is notified of the system demonstration.1. The contractor shall furnish all labor and test apparatus required to calibrate and prepare for

service all instruments, controls, and accessory equipment furnished under this specification.2. Verify that control wiring is properly connected and free of shorts and ground faults. Verify that

terminations are tight.3. Enable control systems and verify each input device's calibration. Calibrate each device

according to manufacturer's recommendations.4. Verify that binary output devices such as relays, solenoid valves, two-position actuators and

control valves, and magnetic starters, operate properly and that normal positions are correct.5. Verify that analog output devices such as I/Ps and actuators are functional, that start and

span are correct, and that direction and normal positions are correct. Check control valvesand automatic dampers to ensure proper action and closure. Make necessary adjustments tovalve stem and damper blade travel.

6. Verify that system operates according to sequences of operation. Simulate and observe eachoperational mode by overriding and varying inputs and schedules. Tune PID loops and eachcontrol routine that requires tuning.

7. Alarms and Interlocks.a. Check each alarm with an appropriate signal at a value that will trip the alarm.b. Trip interlocks using field contacts to check logic and to ensure that actuators fail in the

proper direction.c. Test interlock actions by simulating alarm conditions to check initiating value of variable

and interlock action.

3.16 CONTROL SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Conduct Functional Performance Testing with Consulting Engineer and Owner’s representative(s)of control sequences and inputs as selected by the Consulting Engineer. Allow up to 2 hours oftime for accomplishing the Functional Performance Testing. The contractor shall provide at leasttwo individuals for this duration, one of which shall be the lead programmer for the project. Contractor shall incur all cost overruns associated with rework and retesting as a result ofinstallation or programming deficiencies, including the Consulting Engineer’s cost at $100/hr wherea repeat of the functional performance test is required.1. Controls contractor project manager shall notify the Consulting Engineer in writing when the

contractors own control system checkout and testing is completed and the system is ready forFunctional Performance Testing.

2. Provide at least 10 business days notice to Consulting Engineer prior to the start of FunctionalPerformance Testing.

3. Provide at least two persons equipped with two-way communication.4. Tests that fail to demonstrate proper system operation shall be repeated after Contractor

makes necessary repairs or revisions to hardware or software to successfully complete eachtest.

B. Acceptance.1. After functional perfromance tests are performed to the satisfaction of the Consulting

Engineer, Consulting Engineer will accept control system as meeting completionrequirements. All aspects of the control system shall be under warranty whether specificallytested or not. Unless specifically indicated otherwise in writing, this acceptance will not relieve



the contractor of full compliance with all aspects of the plans and specfications. The warrantyperiod shall start upon receipt of the letter of acceptance from the Consulting Engineer.

3.17 CLEANING

A. Each day clean up debris resulting from work. Remove packaging material as soon as its contentshave been removed. Collect waste and place in designated location.

B. On completion of work in each area, clean work debris and equipment. Keep areas free from dust,dirt, and debris.

C. On completion of work, check equipment furnished under this section for paint damage. Repairdamaged factory-finished paint to match adjacent areas. Replace deformed cabinets andenclosures with new material and repaint to match adjacent areas.

3.18 TRAINING

A. Provide training for a designated staff of Owner's representatives. Training shall be provided viaself-paced training, web-based or computer-based training. Allow for no less than a total of 4 hoursof training at intervals suitable to the Owner.

B. Training shall enable students to accomplish the following objectives.1. Proficiently operate system2. Understand control system architecture and configuration3. Understand DDC system components4. Understand system operation, including DDC system control and optimizing routines

(algorithms)5. Operate workstation and peripherals6. Access graphics, point reports, and logs7. Adjust and change system setpoints, time schedules, and holiday schedules8. Recognize common HVAC system malfunctions by observing system graphics, trend graphs,

and other system tools9. Understand job layout and location of control components10. Create, delete, and modify alarms, including configuring alarm reactions11. Create, delete, and modify point trend logs (graphs) and multi-point trend graphs12. Configure and run reports13. Add new users and understand password security procedures

C. Instructors shall be factory-trained and experienced in presenting this material.

3.19 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A. See Plans.

3.20 POINTS LIST

A. See Plans.



3.21 INSTRUCTIONS TO MECHANICAL CONTRACTORS

A. CONTROL VALVE INSTALLATION1. Valve submittals shall be coordinated for type, quantity, size, and piping configuration to

ensure compatibility with pipe design.2. All control valves shall be installed so that the stem position is not more than 60 degrees from

the vertical up position.3. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.4. Control valves shall be installed so that they are accessible and serviceable, and such that

actuators may be serviced and removed without interference from structure or other pipesand/or equipment.

5. Isolation valves shall be installed such that control valve body may be serviced withoutdraining the supply/return side piping system. Unions shall be installed at all connections toscrewed type control valves.

6. Provide tags for all control valves indicating service and number. Tags shall be brass, 1-1/2"in diameter, with 1/4" high letters. Securely fasten with chain and hook. Match identificationnumbers as shown on approved controls shop drawings.

B. CONTROL DAMPER INSTALLATION1. Damper submittals shall be coordinated for type, quantity, and size to ensure compatibility

with sheet metal design.2. Duct openings shall be free of any obstruction or irregularities that might interfere with blade

or linkage rotation or actuator mounting. Duct openings shall measure 1/4" larger thandamper dimensions and shall be square, straight, and level.

3. Individual damper sections, as well as entire multiple section assemblies, must be completelysquare and free from racking, twisting, or bending. Measure diagonally from upper corners toopposite lower corners of each damper section. Both dimensions must be equal ±1/8".

4. Follow manufacturer's instructions for field installation of control dampers. Unless specificallydesigned for vertical blade application, dampers must be mounted with blade axis horizontal.

5. Install extended shaft or jackshaft per manufacturer's instructions. (Typically, a sticker on thedamper face shows recommended extended shaft location. Attach shaft on labeled side ofdamper to that blade.)

6. Damper blades, axles, and linkage must operate without binding. Before system operation,cycle damper after installation to assure proper operation. On multiple section assemblies, allsections must open and close simultaneously.

7. Provide a visible and accessible indication of damper position on the drive shaft end.8. Support duct-work in area of damper when required to prevent sagging due to damper weight.9. After installation of low-leakage dampers with seals, caulk between frame and duct or opening

to prevent leakage around perimeter of damper.

--END OF SECTION—


DUCTS 23 31 00 - 1

SECTION 23 31 00 - DUCTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Ductwork for Comfort Cooling and Heating Systems, Variable Volume

B. Ductwork for General Exhaust Systems

C. Duct cleaning


A. Section 23 07 13 - Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner.

B. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories.

C. Section 23 36 00 - VARIABLE AIR VOLUME UNITS.

D. Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets.

E. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.


A. ASHRAE (FUND) - ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals; 2013.

B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.

C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-IronAlloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.


E. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2012.

F. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in MasonryElements; 2012.

G. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2013.

H. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements;2013.

I. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National FireProtection Association; 2012.


DUCTS 23 31 00 - 2

J. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; Sheet Metal and Air ConditioningContractors' National Association; 2005.

K. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturer's Association.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data for each duct system including the following information for eachsystem:1. System name and type.2. System material and sheet metal gages.3. System sealant method and materials.4. Transverse joints and longitudinal seams.5. Reinforcement type.

C. Prepare shop drawings for internal use for the purpose of coordination with other trades includingstructural, piping, plumbing, electrical, lighting and architectural. Submit to general contractor forcoordination with other trades.

D. Submit formal shop drawings to Engineer showing significant deviations from drawings uponrequest.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes infitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specifiedin this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in thissection, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.


A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.


A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealantmanufacturers.

B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants.


DUCTS 23 31 00 - 3

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. This section covers duct system application requirements, ductwork materials, field fabricatedductwork, and factory fabricated ductwork. See Air Duct Accessories Section for requirements for the following components: turning vane elbows, spin-in fittings, conical fittings, volume controldampers, fire/smoke dampers, flexible duct connectors, and access doors.

B. Requirements established in these specifications are to be considered minimum requirements. Contractor shall review applicable building code requirements and construct to the more stringentof the two.

2.2 APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Comfort Cooling Systems, Variable Volume1. Primary supply upstream of terminal units:

a. Galvanized Steel, 2 inch w.g. pressure class, Class A duct sealing.2. Secondary supply downstream of terminal units:

a. Galvanized Steel, 1 inch w.g. pressure class, Class A duct sealing.3. Return ductwork

a. Galvanized Steel, 2 inch w.g. pressure class, Class A duct sealing.

B. General Exhaust Systems1. Galvanized Steel, 1 inch w.g. pressure class. Duct sealing: Class A.

2.3 DUCT AND APPLICATION MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M FS Type B, withG60/Z180 coating. Lock forming quality.

B. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant.1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration and

compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class of ducts.2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero, when

tested in accordance with ASTM E84.3. Except as noted, oil or solvent based sealants are prohibited.4. For exterior applications, United McGill Corporation "Uni-weather" solvent based sealant or

Foster 32-19 shall be used.

C. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, orcontinuously threaded.

D. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.


DUCTS 23 31 00 - 4

E. Pressure sensitive tape shall have acrylic based adhesive and shall comply with UL 181A.1. Material shall not exceed a flame spread rating of 25 or a smoke developed rating of 50, and

shall fully comply with requirements of NFPA 90A.2. Water vapor transmission rate shall be less than 0.02 perms.

F. Scrim tape shall be fiberglass open weave, 3 inches wide, with maximum 20/10 thread count.

2.4 DUCTWORK FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metaland Flexible, and as indicated. Select sheet metal gages, duct dimensions and reinforcementspacing based on the pressure class specified as set forth in the Standard.

B. No variation of duct configuration or size is permitted except by written permission. Wheresubstitution is allowed, size round duct installed in place of rectangular ducts for equal pressuredrop.

C. Sheet metal ductwork shall be constructed from steel sheets up to 60" in width. Each sheet shallbe stenciled with the manufacturer's name and gage. Sheet metal must conform to tolerances asoutlined in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards". Provide cross breaking or externalstiffening on dimsensions over 18", where recommended in the Standard and as necessary tominimize oil canning or vibration.

D. Rectangular duct transverse and longitudinal seams shall be selected for the pressure class,materials and other provisions indicated and shall be as shown in SMACNA Duct ConstructionStandards.

E. Round duct transverse and longitudinal seams shall be selected for the pressure class, materialsand other provisions indicated and shall be as shown in SMACNA Duct Construction Standards. Round duct elbows and tee fittings shall be indicated in the Standards.1. Snaplock longitudinal seams, crimp style transverse joints, adjustable round duct elbows and

90 degree tap tee fittings are limited to duct systems with a pressure class of 1 inch w.g. orless; including downstream of terminal units unless otherwise indicated. Transverse jointsshall be screwed per the Standard, not less than 3 places.

2. Duct systems with a pressure class greater than 1 inch w.g. shall be fabricated withpre-manufacturered spiral round duct or continuous weld seam duct, and fitted with saddle taptee fittings and stamped or segmented elbows.

F. Class A sealing shall have all transverse joints, longitudinal seams and duct wall penetrationssealed.1. Unless otherwise indicated, sealing for systems with a pressure class of 1 inch w.g. or less

may be accomplished with pressure sensitive tape. Duct fabric and mastic shall be used as asupplement where necessary. Pressure sensitive tape alone shall not be used for sealingsystems with a pressure class greater than 1 inch w.g..

2. Unless otherwise indicated, systems with a pressure class of 3 inch w.g. or less may besealed by applying one layer of sealant, then immediately spanning the joint with a single layerof 3 inch wide open weave fiberglass scrim tape. Sufficient additional sealant shall then beapplied to completely embed the cloth. As an alternate, sealing may be accomplished usinggasketed joints under compression installed in accordance with SMACNA Duct ConstructionStandards or continuous welded seams.

3. Systems with a pressure class greater than 3" shall be sealed using pre-manufacturerd ductand fittings with gasket joints under compression or continuous welded seams.


DUCTS 23 31 00 - 5

2.5 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK

A. Acoustical Flexible Ducts: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latexadhesive supported by helically wound spring steel wire.1. Insulation: Fiberglass insulation with polyethylene vapor barrier film. Insulate to values

indicated under HVAC Insulation section.2. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches WG negative.3. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.4. Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees F to 210 degrees F.

B. Metal Flexible Duct1. May be used for ceiling exhaust fans.2. Listed and labeled in accorance with UL 2158A. Duct shall be spiral wound into a tube and

spiral corrugated to provide strength and flexibility.3. The duct shall be rated for a minimum positive and negative working pressure of 10 inch w.g.4. Temperature range shall be -40 degrees F to 250 degrees F.5. Duct must comply with the latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed and labeled by

Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., as Class I Air Duct, Standard 181, flame spread less than 25;smoke developed less than 50.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible.

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. Allowances shall be made for duct linerthicknesses where applicable.

D. Provide 45 degree entry on all tees used for branch duct to main duct connections. Splitters andextractors shall not be used unless specifically called for on drawings.

E. Use fittings (no scoop) with manual volume dampers for all diffuser and grille connection takeoffs,unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Refer to section 233300.

F. Make all ductwork connections to air handler units, including fan terminal units, with flexibleconnectors.

G. All elbows shall have turning vanes or shall be radius elbows. See Air Duct Accessories section forturning vane elbows. Radius elbows may be substituted for turning vane elbows unless specificallyotherwise indicated on drawings. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline.

H. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.


DUCTS 23 31 00 - 6

I. Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver frame,provide boxed in plenum with depth to suit field conidtions but not less than 16" deep, same size aslouver opening. Use same material as duct; seal to louver frame and duct.

J. Flexible ducts shall be used where shown on the drawings for connections to air distributiondevices and to terminal units as applicable.1. Terminal ends shall be sealed to metal core insert with adhesive and secured using

compression couplings or stainless steel worm gear type clamp. Collars shall be insertedinto the flexible duct a minimum of 1" before fastening.

2. Insulation on flexible duct shall be slipped over the connection to the point where insulationabuts the terminal unit or insulation on main duct. Seal joints in insulation as specified underDuct Insulation Section.

3. Install flexible duct connections to diffusers and grilles with a minimum run (not to exceed 6'). Bends shall have a minimum radius of 1-1/2 times the diameter of the duct as measured fromthe centerline. Duct shall be fully extended. Do not lay on light fixtures or ceiling.

K. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can withspring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulatedductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.

L. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenanceactivities.

M. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

N. Metal Duct1. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, and reinforcing foroperating external static pressures indicated in Part 2 under Application Requirements.

O. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with two feet maximum length of flexible duct toallow for minor offset (less than 15 degrees). Maintain terminal unit manufacturer'srecommended length of collar size length of straight duct at inlet (and outlet) connections. Provideany required flexible offset upstream of staight duct connection.

P. Where ducts are exposed to view (including equipment rooms) and where ducts pass throughwalls, floors or ceilings; furnish and install sheet metal collars around the duct.

Q. Project inspector shall be notified to allow inspection of field installed ductwork prior to coverup orapplication of field installed insulation.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Before installing ductwork, wipe ductwork to a visibly clean condition.

B. During construction, provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductowrkand duct taps to prevent construction dust or contaminants from entering the system. Seal ends ofductwork prior to installation to keep ductwork interior clean. Remove closures only for installationof the next section.


DUCTS 23 31 00 - 7

C. During the duration of construction, maintain the integrity of all temporary closures until air systemsare activated.

D. Following completion of construction and prior to testing and balancing the system, provide new airfilters as specified for the equipment.

3.3 DUCT AIR LEAK TESTING

A. All low-pressure duct systems (positive or negative) shall be inspected for visible and audible signsof leakage.1. Leaks identified by inspection shall be repaired by:

a. Complete removal of the sealing materials.b. Thorough cleaning of the joint surfaces.c. Installation of multiple layers of sealing materials.

2. Discrepancies found during testing and balancing between duct traverses and diffuser/grillereadings shall result in re-inspection, repair and retest until discrepancies are eliminated.

B. Ductwork leakage testing and/or inspection shall be performed prior to installation of externalductwork insulation.

END OF SECTION


AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 1

SECTION 23 33 00 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Air turning devices.

B. Duct access doors.

C. Duct test holes.

D. Flexible duct connections.

E. Manual volume dampers.


A. Section 23 31 00 - DUCTS.


A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National FireProtection Association; 2012.

B. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.

C. UL 555 - Standard for Fire Dampers; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including AllRevisions.

D. UL 555S - Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems; UnderwritersLaboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide for each type of producted indicated. Include electrical characteristics andconnection requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies for each type of product indicated.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide instructions for products provided.





B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Refer to Specification Section titled HVAC Ducts and Casings for pressure class, sealingrequirements and material requirements of each air system.

B. Duct accessories shall be fabricated from material suitable for duct materials; use stainless steelaccessories for stainless steel ductwork, aluminum accessories for aluminum ductwork, etc. Where galvanized steel is indicated herein, adjust accordingly unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 TURNING VANE ELBOWS, TEES AND OFFSETS

A. Construct elbows, tees, and offsets with turning vanes shall be single or double thickness with 24gauge rails and hollow vanes fabricated/manufactured in accordance with SMACNA DuctConstruction Standards. Vanes shall be securely attached to runners.

2.3 RADIUS ELBOWS, TEES AND OFFSETS

A. Construct tees, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct oncenterline in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards.

B. Radius fittings do not require turning vanes unless specifically indicated otherwise.

2.4 ROUND ELBOWS, TEES AND OFFSETS

A. Round duct elbows and tee fittings shall be as indicated in the SMACNA Duct ConstructionStandards.

B. Adjustable round duct elbows and 90 degree tap tee fittings are limited to duct systems with apressure class of less than 1 inch w.g.; including downstream of terminal units unless otherwiseindicated.

C. Duct systems with a pressure class greater than 1 inch w.g. shall utilize saddle tap tee fittings andstamped or segmented elws, fitted for pre-manufacturered spiral round duct or continuous weldseam duct.



2.5 BRANCH CONNECTIONS

A. Rectangular branch duct entry fittings shall be the 45 degree entry type fabricated and installed inaccordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards.

B. Round duct systems with a pressure class greater than 1 inch w.g. shall utilize saddle tap branchconnections fitted for pre-manufacturered spiral round duct or continuous weld seam duct, with 90degree entires for runouts to diffusers and 45 degree enry type for branch connections.

C. Round branch entry fittings mounted to rectangular mains greater than 1" pressure class shall bebellmouth fittings with one piece bellmouth base and continuous weld round duct collar. Bellmouthflange shall include gasket and pre-drilled mounting holes (3 minimum). Bellmouth radius shall be1/5 the branch duct diameter. Provide integral damper where indicated on plans and specifiedelsewhere.

D. Round branch entry fittings mounted to rectangular mains rated for 1" pressure class and lessshall be straight takeoff spin-in fittings with continuous weld round duct collar, without scoop.

E. Where called for, integral dampers at takeoff fittings shall be constructed with 2" damper standoffhandle to allow clearance for external insulation, locking nut and nylon grommets installed at sleevepenetration. Damper for sizes 6" and smaller shall have a reinforced damper axis. Dampers forsizes 8" and larger shall have a contiuous rod damper.

2.6 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,as applicable for round and rectangular ductwork.

B. Door:1. Double wall, rectangular, fabricated from galvanized sheet metal with sealing gasket and rigid

insulation with R value as specified under Duct Insulation section. Fabricate doors airtightsuitable for pressure class of system.

2. Vision panel.3. 1 by 1 butt hinges or piano hinge.4. Quick fastening locking devices as indicated below.

C. Frame shall be galvanized steel with bend over tabs and foam gaskets. Number of hinges andlocks:1. Less Than 12 inches Square: Secure with two sash locks.2. Up to 18 inches Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks.3. Up to 24 x 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside

handles.4. Larger Sizes: Provide an additional hinge.

D. Access doors for fire and smoke dampers shall be permanently identified on exterior by a labelhaving not less than 1/2 inch high lettering reading "FIRE DAMPER", "SMOKE DAMPER", or"FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER".



2.7 DUCT TEST HOLES

A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neoprene plugs, threaded plugs,or threaded or twist-on metal caps.

B. Instrument Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap cast iron or castaluminum to suit duct material. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.

2.8 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS

A. Fabricate flexible duct connectors used to connect ductwork to motorized equipment in accordancewith SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated.

B. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A,

minimum density 30 oz per sq yd.a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 3 inches to 6 inches wide.

2. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gage thick galvanized steel.

2.9 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside of airstream, rated for duct pressure class indicated.

B. Suitable for vertical or horizontal orientation as indicated on plans.

C. Single blade dampers1. Frames shall be constructed from galvanized steel, 22 gauge minimum thickness channels,

with mitered and welded corners, flanges where required for wall installations.2. Blade width shall not exceeding 12 inches. Blade shall be stiffened for stablility. Blade

construction shall be minimum 22 gauge. Blade axles to be pinned at either end orcontinuous.

3. Adhesives shall be UL 181 Class 1 listed.

D. Multi-blade dampers1. Frames shall be constructed from galvanized steel channels, 16 gauge minimum thickness,

with mitered and welded corners, flanges where required for wall installations. Maximumframe width to be 48 inches; provide sectionalized damper assembly for larger dimensions.

2. Blade width shall not exceeding 12 inches. Provide opposed or parallel blades as indicated. Blades shall be stiffened for stablility. Blade construction shall be minimum 16 gauge. Bladeaxles to be continuous.

3. Tie bars and brackets shall be galvanized steel.

E. Blade axles1. Molded synthetic sleeve type bearings, corrosion resistant.2. Square or hexagonal axles positively locked into the damper blade.3. Operators mounted on 2 inch standoff handles for insulation clearance with position indicators

and wing nut locking device.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNAHVAC Duct Construction Standards. Refer to HVAC Ducts and Casings section for ductconstruction and pressure class.

B. Install duct accessories of material suitable for duct materials used; use stainless steel accessoriesfor stainless steel ductwork, aluminum accessories for aluminum ductwork, etc.

C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before or after filters, coils, fans, automaticdampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide access doors for duct mounted smoke detectors, and other devices where required by theauthority having jurisdiction. Provide for cleaning kitchen exhaust ducts in accordance with NFPA96. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, andas required by authority having jurisdication. Provide 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication. Doors for fire, smoke and combination fire/smoke dampersshall be close enough to allow inspection of damper and resetting or replacing of fusible links. Access for ceiling radiation dampers shall be by removal of grilles or diffusers. Install accesspanels with swing against duct static pressure. Label access doors as indicated under GeneralMechanical Requirements and as specified herein.

D. Provide duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes and where required forinstrumentation.

E. Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and smoke dampers at locationsindicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required byauthorities having jurisdiction. Prior to bidding, review latest architectural plans for finalcoordination on locations of fire rated walls. Install with required perimeter mounting angles,sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hingesin strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and UL listing requirements.

F. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connectorsimmediately adjacent to the equipment.

G. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, outside air and exhaust systems wherebranches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widthsfrom duct take-off to the maximum extent practical.

H. Use splitter dampers only where indicated on plans.

I. Provide single blade balancing dampers at duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, unlessincluded in diffuser or register schedule. If impractical due to space limitations, an opposed bladedamper shall be provided as an accessory to the diffuser, grille or register. Adjust diffuser necksize if noise generated by diffuser damper is unacceptable.

J. Provide opposed blade dampers for all other balancing, mixing, and modulating controlapplications. Provide opposed blade dampers as necessary to supplement multiple speed airhandling units to obtain scheduled total airflow.



K. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting and balancing.


A. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement and proper actuation of motorized dampers.

B. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.

END OF SECTION


HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 34 23 - 1

SECTION 23 34 23 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Cabinet and ceiling exhaust fans.


A. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Backdraft dampers.

B. Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.


A. UL 705 - Power Ventilators; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operatingpoint clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels at rated capacity, and electricalcharacteristics and connection requirements.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions.

D. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare partslist, and wiring diagrams.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Greenheck: www.greenheck.com.

B. Loren Cook Company: www.lorencook.com.

C. Substitutions: As allowed by Section 23 04 00.



2.2 POWER VENTILATORS - GENERAL

A. Electrical Components: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for thepurpose specified and indicated.

2.3 CABINET AND CEILING EXHAUST FANS

A. Centrifugal Fan Unit: Direct driven with steel housing , resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraftdamper in discharge.

B. Cabinet: Square steel design with integral duct collars.

C. Wheel: Constructed of 100% aluminum or high impact plastic, statically balanced.

D. Provide unit mounted variable speed controller allowing a minimum airflow adjustment from 100%to down to 50%.

E. Built-in thermal overload protection.

F. Disconnect Switch: Cord and plug in housing for thermal overload protected motor .

G. Unit shall be convertible for in-line mounting configurations.

H. Grille: Molded white plastic for ceiling mount where scheduled.

I. Fans shall be selected to deliver scheduled airflow through a range of +/- 25% of external staticpressure indicated.

J. Sound performance shall be as scheduled. If not scheduled, sound performance shall be 3 sonesor less, unless otherwise authorized.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Hung Fans:1. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. Refer to Section 23 05 48.2. Install flexible connections specified in Section 23 33 00 between fan and ductwork. Ensure

metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fanwhile running.

C. Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling exhauster fans, and on in-line fans asindicated.



3.2 SCHEDULES

A. See drawings for equipment schedules.

END OF SECTION


VARIABLE AIR VOLUME UNITS 23 36 00 - 1

SECTION 23 36 00 - VARIABLE AIR VOLUME UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Single-duct terminal units.1. Single-duct, variable-volume units.

B. Fan-powered units.


A. Section 23 09 25 - Direct Digital Controls - BacNet

B. Section 23 31 00 - DUCTS.

C. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories.


A. AHRI 880 (I-P) - Performance Rating of Air Terminals; 2011 with Addendum 1.

B. ASHRAE Std 62.1 - Ventilation For Acceptable Indoor Air Quality; 2013.

C. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal andSound Absorbing Material); 2012.

D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2015a.

E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

G. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems; National FireProtection Association; 2012.

H. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data indicating configuration, general assembly, and materials used infabrication. Include catalog performance ratings which indicate air flow, static pressure, and NC



designation. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Controls contractorapproval required prior to purchase.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration, general assembly, and materials used in fabrication, andelectrical characteristics and connection requirements.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate support and hanging details, and serviceclearances required.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operatinginstructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts lists. Include directions for resetting constantvolume regulators.

F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's'sname and registered with manufacturer.



B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. See Division 01 Specifications.

B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for air terminal units.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-DUCT, VARIABLE-VOLUME UNITS

A. Manufacturer:1. Enviro-Tec. To match manufacturer of existing terminal units..

B. General:1. Factory-assembled, AHRI 880 rated and bearing the AHRI seal, air volume control terminal

with damper assembly, flow sensor, externally mounted volume controller, duct collars, and allrequired features.

2. Control box bearing identification, including but not necessarily limited to nominal cfm,maximum and minimum factory-set airflow limits, coil type and coil (right or left hand)connection, where applicable.

C. Unit Casing:1. Minimum 22 gage, 0.0299 inch galvanized steel.2. Air Inlet Collar: Provide round, suitable for standard duct sizes.3. Unit Discharge: Rectangular, with slip-and-drive connections.



4. Acceptable Liners:a. Liner shall not contain pentabrominated diphenyl ether (CAS #32534-81-9) or

octabrominated diphenyl ether.

D. Damper Assembly:1. Heavy-gage, galvanized steel or extruded aluminum construction with solid steel, nickel-plated

shaft pivoting on HDPE, self-lubricating bearings.2. Provide integral position indicator or alternative method for indicating damper position over full

range of 90 degrees.3. Incorporate low leak damper blades for tight airflow shutoff.

E. Electric Heating Coil:1. Listed and provided by the terminal unit manufacturer.2. Coil Casing: 20 gage, 0.0359 inch galvanized steel.3. Heating Elements: Nickel chrome, supported by ceramic insulators.4. Integral Control Panel: NEMA 250, Type 2 enclosure with hinged access door for access to

all controls and safety devices.5. Furnish a primary automatic reset thermal cutout and differential pressure airflow switch for

proof of airflow.6. Provide the following additional components, mounted and/or wired within the control

enclosure:a. Fused or non-fused door interlocking disconnect switch.b. Mercury contactors.c. Fuse block.

7. Factory wired, including all limit switches and steps of control as shown on the equipmentschedule, with the SSR (solid-state relay) proportional heat control.

F. Control Transformers: Factory supplied and mounted for electric and electronic controlapplications.

G. Controls:1. DDC (Direct-Digital Controls):

a. Basis of Design: Alerton .1) The unit level controller to include the following:

(a) 24 VAC power terminal or RJ-12 Power connection.(b) T-Stat Port for thermostat connection.(c) Service Port for Price Linker diagnostic equipment.(d) Damper actuator.(e) Fan output connection.(f) LED indication for troubleshooting.(g) Three binary staged heating outputs.(h) Binary cooling output.(i) S.A.T. sensor input.(j) Contact closure input.(k) Four analog outputs.(l) BACNET expansion module.

b. Bi-directional Damper Actuator: 24 volt, powered closed, spring return open.c. Microprocessor-Based Controller: Air volume controller, pressure-independent with

electronic airflow transducers, factory-calibrated maximum and minimum CFM's.1) Occupied and unoccupied operating mode.2) Remote reset of temperature or CFM set points.3) Proportional, plus integral control of room temperature.4) Monitoring and adjusting with portable terminal.

d. Room Sensor:



1) Compatible with temperature controls specified.2) Wall-mounted, system powered, with temperature set-point adjustment including

connection access for portable operator terminal.

2.2 FAN-POWERED PARALLEL UNITS

A. Manufacturers:1. Enviro-Tec. (To match existing terminal units).

B. General:1. Factory-assembled and wired, AHRI 880 (I-P) rated, horizontal fan-powered terminal unit with

blower, blower motor, mixing plenum, and primary air damper contained in a single unithousing.

C. Unit Casing:1. Minimum 22 gage, 0.0299 inch galvanized steel.2. Primary Air Inlet Collar: Suitable for standard flexible duct sizes.3. Unit Discharge: Rectangular, suitable for flanged duct connection.4. Acceptable Liners:

a. 1/2 inch thick, coated, fibrous-glass complying with ASTM C1071.1) Secure with adhesive.2) Coat edges exposed to airstream with NFPA 90A approved sealant.3) Cover liner with non-porous foil.

b. 3/4 inch thick polyurethane foam adhesive complying with UL 181 erosion requirements inaccordance with ASHRAE Std 62.1, and having a maximum smoke developed index of 50for both insulation and adhesive, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

D. Primary Air Damper Assembly:1. Heavy-gage, galvanized steel or extruded aluminum construction with solid shaft rotating in

bearings.2. Provide indicator on damper shaft or alternative method for indicating damper position over

full range of 90 degrees.3. Incorporate low leak (2 percent) damper blades for tight airflow shutoff.4. Fan(s): Forward curved, centrifugal type.5. Fan Motor:

a. Fan motor shaft directly connected to fan and and isolated from unit casing to preventtransmission of vibration.

E. Electric Heating Coil:1. Listed and provided by the terminal unit manufacturer.2. Coil Casing: Minimum 20 gage, 0.0359 inch galvanized steel.3. Heating Elements: Open wire, nickel chrome, supported by ceramic insulators.4. Integral Control Panel: NEMA 250, Type 2 enclosure, with hinged access door for access to

all controls and safety devices.5. Provide a primary automatic reset thermal cutout and differential pressure airflow switch for

proof of airflow or electrical interlock to prevent heater operation when fan is not running.6. Provide the following additional components, mounted and/or wired within the control

enclosure:a. Fused or non-fused door interlocking disconnect switch.b. Mercury contactors.c. Fuse block.

F. Electrical Requirements:



1. Single-point power connection.2. Equipment wiring to comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

G. Controls:1. DDC (Direct-Digital Controls):

a. Basis of Design: Alerton.1) The unit level controller to include the following:

(a) 24 VAC power terminal or RJ-12 Power connection.(b) T-Stat Port for thermostat connection.(c) Service Port for Price Linker diagnostic equipment.(d) Damper actuator.(e) Fan output connection.(f) LED indication for troubleshooting.(g) Three binary staged heating outputs.(h) Binary cooling output.(i) S.A.T. sensor input.(j) Contact closure input.(k) Four analog outputs.

b. Bi-directional Damper Actuator: 24 volt, powered closed, spring return open.c. Microprocessor-Based Controller: Air volume controller, pressure-independent with

electronic airflow transducers, factory-calibrated maximum and minimum CFM's.1) Occupied and unoccupied operating mode.2) Remote reset of temperature or CFM set points.3) Proportional, plus integral control of room temperature.4) Monitoring and adjusting with portable terminal.

d. Room Sensor:1) Compatible with temperature controls specified.2) Wall-mounted, system powered, with temperature set-point adjustment including

connection access for portable operator terminal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Maintain clearances required by theNational Electric Code.

B. Provide ceiling access doors or locate units above easily removable ceiling components.

C. Support units individually from structure. Do not support from adjacent ductwork.

D. Connect to ductwork in accordance with Section 15810 and manufacturer's recommendations.

E. Provide lined ductwork downstream of units.

F. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics prior to ordering.

END OF SECTION


AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 37 00 - 1

SECTION 23 37 00 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Diffusers.

B. Registers/grilles.


A. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Painting of ducts visible behind outlets and inlets.


A. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets; American Societyof Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2006 (R2011).

B. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as tosize, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inletsshowing type, size, location, application, pressure drop dimensions, construction and noise level.


A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Titus, Nailor, Price, Tuttle & Bailey



2.2 ALL DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND REGISTERS

A. See legend on mechanical plans.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, all diffusers, supply grilles and registers shall meet the following:1. Pressure drop shall fall between the range of 0.035 to 0.80 inches w.g., based on airflows and

neck size shown on plans.2. Based on airflows and neck size shown on plans, noise criteria rating for corridor applications

shall be less than or equal to NC 35. All other applications shall be less than or equal to NC25.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, all return grilles shall meet the following:1. Pressure drop shall be less than 0.035 inches w.g. for the indicated airflows, based on neck

size shown on plans.2. Based on airflows and neck size shown on plans, noise criteria rating for corridor applications

shall be less than or equal to NC 35. All other applications shall be less than or equal to NC25.

D. All diffusers, grilles and registers shall be factory furnished devices of aluminum construction. Exterior and exposed edges shall be rolled, or otherwise stiffened or rounded. .

E. Backs of diffusers shall be factory insulated with fiberglass blanket wrap and scrim kraft vaporbarrier to an installed value of R-6.

F. Color shall be white unless otherwise indicated.

G. Where called for on plans, integral dampers shall be factory fabricated opposed blade .

H. Provide adapter frames to match mounting configurations, and square to round and round to roundadapters as required to match neck sizes indicated on plans.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Coordinate framed opening requirements of roof hoods, goosenecks and louvers with generalcontractor and/or metal building manufacturer.

C. Provide all required flashing/waterproofing for louver installations for a watertight installation.

D. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform witharchitectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.

E. Ensure exhaust outlets are located at least 10' away from air intakes. Adjust location of outlet asnecessary to maintain this separation.



F. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, unlessspecifically excluded and included with diffuser.

G. Coordinate with other trades as necessary to provide door grilles and undercut doors where calledfor. Undercuts shall be 1" minimum clear space above finished floor surface.

H. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section 09 90 00.

3.2 SCHEDULES

A. See drawings for schedules.

END OF SECTION


GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 00 50-1

SECTION 26 00 50 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. General Information on Electrical Installation not covered elsewhere. This section applies to allother electrical sections.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. For the purposes of this contract, the term "Provide" shall mean to provide all labor, material,transportation, and supervision required to furnish and install.

1.3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION:

A. See Project Description in design drawings.

1.4 INTERPRETATION:

A. Specifications and Drawings shall be considered as supplementary to each other, requiringmaterials and labor indicated, specified, or implied by either Specifications or Drawings. Contradictions shall be presented to the Architect for resolution.

B. Interpretation of Specifications or Drawings, where deemed necessary, shall be made only by theArchitect.

1.5 CODES, STANDARDS, ORDINANCES, AND PERMITS:

A. The National Electrical Code (NEC), National Electric Safety Code and OSHA shall establish theminimum requirements for installation, but in addition, all work shall also comply with Federal,State, Local, County or Municipal Code requirements. If there is a conflict between the NEC andthese codes, conform to the more stringent of the two. Similarly, if the local Authority HavingJurisdiction has not adopted the latest revision of the NEC and is still using an earlier version,conform to the more stringent of the two.

B. Be familiar with local Code requirements and local Utility Company Standards for electrical servicerequirements, and make installation in accordance with such requirements.

C. In case of conflict between the Contract Documents and a governing code or ordinance, suchconflict shall be immediately brought to the attention of the General Contractor for resolution. Extra payment will not be allowed for Work required by code restrictions except through writtenagreement with the COUNTY.

D. Apply for, obtain, and pay for all required permits and inspection certificates. Final payment iscontingent upon delivery of such permits and certificates to the General Contractor.



1.6 SITE INSPECTION:


1.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING:

A. Refer to Section on Cutting and Patching.

B. Place all sleeves, inserts, conduit hangers, etc. as construction progresses to avoid anyunnecessary cutting of structural members. Cooperate with other Contractors in location ofelectrical outlets that may conflict with location of other equipment.

C. Obtain authorization from the COUNTY for any necessary cutting of building structure to facilitateinstallation of this work and do not proceed until authorization has been received. Limit necessarycutting and patching to the minimum size required for installation of conduit or apparatus.

1.8 SUBMITTALS:

A. Refer to Submittals Section.

B. Submit Shop Drawings, catalog sheets, or other descriptive data with sufficient information toestablish design, quality and performance. Data shall describe apparatus, equipment, panels,fixtures, and other items requiring descriptive literature. Provide submittals as a single packageincluding all required electrical items. Partial packages will not be reviewed. Submittals itemsshall be in accordance with the individual specification sections. See project general notes indesign drawings for a list of items required for submittal. See Administrative Requirements sectionfor more information on submittals.

1.9 MAINTENANCE DATA:

A. Collect and neatly retain maintenance and service data supplied with equipment furnished andinstalled under this Contract until job completion, at which time deliver to the General Contractorfor inclusion in the Maintenance Manual. All such data must be properly identified as forequipment served.

B. Keep one set of prints current of any changes or variations by marking prints in a legible manner,and upon completion of project, deliver prints to the General Contractor. Do not make changeswithout prior approval of the General Contractor.

1.10 COORDINATION - GENERAL:

A. Drawings are generally diagrammatic. Review all project Drawings and coordinate all work withGeneral Contractor and different trades prior to installing any work so that interferences betweenelectrical work and ducts, piping, equipment, architectural and structural work will be avoided. Donot install conduits, boxes and fittings in spaces required for ductwork or piping.



B. Furnish all necessary offsets in raceways, fittings, etc., required to properly install work so as totake up minimum space. Install all equipment to provide code required "working space". Furnishand install all materials required to accomplish this without additional cost.

C. In case interference develops, the General Contractor will decide which trade work must berelocated regardless of which was installed first. Damage from interference or rework caused byinadequate coordination with other trades shall be rectified without additional cost.

D. Within 30 days following award of Contract, report to the General Contractor in writing all real orpotential errors, ambiguities and/or conflicts on electrical work or between trades. Those reportedafter 30 days, except as a result of unforeseen circumstances, shall be resolved at the discretionof the General Contractor. Report conflicts resulting from progress of work to the GeneralContractor immediately.

1.11 COORDINATION - ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL:

A. Unless specifically required otherwise, all motors, integral starters, control and monitoring devices(including wire and conduit for control circuits), timers, relays, pilot devices and other requiredcontrol components for mechanical systems will be furnished and installed by the MechanicalContractor.

B. Unless specifically required otherwise, make all power wiring connections to all water heaters,pumps, machinery, appliances, water coolers and other electrically-operated equipment asindicated on the Drawings or as required. Furnish and install disconnect switches, starters andprotective devices as indicated on the Drawings, except for items furnished with integraldisconnect switches and/or starters. Coordinate the exact location of receptacles, flexible conduit,and disconnects for mechanical and plumbing equipment with the mechanical or plumbingcontractor.

C. Review approved Shop Drawings and verify final electrical characteristics and wiring beforerough-in of power feeds to any equipment. When electrical data on approved Shop Drawingsdiffers from contemplated design, make necessary adjustments to wiring, disconnect, andbranch-circuit protection for equipment actually installed.

1.12 WORKING CLEARANCES:

A. Working clearances and dedicated space around electrical equipment requiring service shallcomply with NEC requirements. Coordinate and verify clearances from equipment and workfurnished by other trades. Should there be any apparent violations of clearance requirements,notify the ENGINEER before proceeding with connection or placement of equipment. Reworkcaused by inadequate coordination shall be rectified at no extra cost.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS:

2.1 MATERIALS:

A. All materials used in this project shall be new, unless otherwise noted, and listed by theUnderwriters' Laboratories, Inc. as conforming to its standards where such standards have beenestablished. These materials shall bear the UL label.



B. Before purchasing any equipment, the contractor shall reconfirm the availability of the project'svoltage, phase (single phase versus three phase), and service configuration with the electric utility.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CLEANUP

A. After electrical installation, remove all rubbish, trash and debris from the site and dispose of in anapproved manner.

END OF SECTION


MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 26 05 01-1

SECTION 26 05 01 - MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Electrical demolition.

PART 3 EXECUTION

2.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.

B. Report discrepancies to General Contractor before disturbing existing installation.

C. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.

2.2 PREPARATION

A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings to be removed.

B. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company.

C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service duringconstruction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnelexperienced in such operations.

2.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

B. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.

C. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceilingfinishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.

D. Disconnect and remove abandoned outlets and switches. Provide blank cover or patch wall asdirected by Architect.

E. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.

F. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that hasbeen removed.

G. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and otheraccessories.


MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 26 05 01-2

H. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.

I. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provideaccess panel as appropriate.

END OF SECTION


LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWERCONDUCTORS AND CABLES

26 05 19-1

SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Single conductor building wire.

B. Wire and cable for 600 volts and less.

C. Wiring connectors.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2001 (Reapproved 2007).

B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011.

C. ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded CopperConductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2009).

D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National ElectricalContractors Association; 2010.

E. NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy;National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009 (ANSI/NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658).

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association (edition adopted byAuthority Having Jurisdiction, including all applicable amendments and supplements).

G. UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

H. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ALL CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purposeindicated.



26 05 19-2

C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.

D. Comply with NEMA WC 70.

E. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.

F. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.

G. Conductor Material:1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project.

Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper

conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B 787M unless otherwiseindicated.

H. Conductor Color Coding:1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having

jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.3. Color Code:

a. 480Y/277 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:1) Phase A: Brown.2) Phase B: Orange.3) Phase C: Yellow.4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray.

b. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B: Red.3) Phase C: Blue.4) Neutral/Grounded: White.

c. 240/120 V High-Leg Delta, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B (High-Leg): Orange.3) Phase C: Blue.4) Neutral/Grounded: White.

d. 240/120 V, 1 Phase, 3 Wire System:1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B: Red.3) Neutral/Grounded: White.

e. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.

2.2 BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.

B. Conductor Stranding:1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:

a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.



26 05 19-3

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

D. Insulation:1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below.

Equipment ground wires may be type TW for circuits rated 100 Amps or less or type THW forcircuits over 100 Amps.

E. Conductor: Copper.

F. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.

G. Insulation: Thermoplastic material rated 90 degrees C.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Installation in Raceway:1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other

contaminants.2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum

pulling tension and sidewall pressure.4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not

recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner.

E. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supportsand methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support frombuilding structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems.

F. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet.

G. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipmentenclosures.

H. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make

splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.



26 05 19-4

2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting,nicking or damaging conductors.

3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides,

and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.

I. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for theapplication, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors.

J. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.

K. Color Code Legend: Provide identification label identifying color code for ungrounded conductorsat each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders orbranch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system.

L. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, usingmaterials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00.

M. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment anddevices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.

N. Install wire and cable securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.

O. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions.

P. Wire and cable routing indicated is intended to be diagrammatic.

Q. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routingand lengths required.

R. Include wire and cable of lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of locationshown.

S. No wiring shall be installed until the required raceway system, including junction, outlet and deviceboxes is completed. Install wiring before painting begins and protect against being painted.

T. Branch circuit sizes are noted on the Drawings and must be continuous without reduction in sizethroughout their length except where connecting to fixtures or devices.

U. Branch circuit wire sizes shall be increased as required where long runs will cause excessivevoltage drop per NEC.

V. Wire circuits as described or indicated on the Drawings to achieve a connected load as scheduled. Should any change be necessary, it must be brought to the Engineer's attention.

W. Install wire and cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation."

X. Use wiring methods indicated.

Y. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.



26 05 19-5

Z. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.

AA. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.

AB. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.

AC. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptibletemperature rise.

AD. Unless noted otherwise in the design drawings, use split bolt connectors for copper conductorsplices and taps, #6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electricaltape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.

AE. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices andtaps, #8 AWG and smaller.


A. Test wiring rated 600 volts and less to verify that no short circuits or accidental grounds exist. Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring No. 4 AWG and larger diameter using an instrumentwhich applies voltage of approximately 500 volts to provide direct reading of resistance. Minimumresistance shall be 250,000 ohms.

B. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.

END OF SECTION


GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICALSYSTEMS

26 05 26-1

SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Grounding and bonding components.

B. Provide all components necessary to complete the grounding system(s) consisting of:1. Metal underground water pipe, if available.2. Effectively bonded and grounded metal frame of the building.3. Concrete-encased electrode.4. Rod electrodes.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, NFPA (edition adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,including all applicable amendments and supplements).


A. Grounding System Resistance: 10 ohms.



B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purposespecified and indicated.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in thissection with minimum three years documented experience.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Wire: TW Stranded copper with green coding sized per NEC.

B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.


GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICALSYSTEMS

26 05 26-2

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install grounding and bonding system components in a neat and workmanlike manner inaccordance with NECA 1.

C. Provide bonding to meet requirements described in Quality Assurance.

D. Bond equipment such as metallic housing and feeder metallic conduits to grounding conductor. Use grounding bushings, on service conduit and at other points where grounding continuity isbroken.

E. Provide a bonding jumper for any equipment, motor, fixture or device to which current carryingconductors are connected that is not bonded directly to the grounded system. Connect bondingjumper to approved lugs and grounding conduit bushings or clamps.

F. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated grounding conductor within eachfeeder and branch circuit raceway (sized per NEC Section 250). Terminate each end on suitablelug, bus, or bushing. Metal raceways shall not be used as the sole method of grounding.


A. Test existing grounding system to ensure continuity and that resistance to ground is not excessive(above 10 ohms). Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before making connections torod; tie grounding system together and test for resistance to ground. Make resistancemeasurements in dry weather, not earlier than 48 hours after rainfall.

END OF SECTION


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICALSYSTEMS

26 05 29-1

SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Support and attachment components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electricalwork.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National ElectricalContractors Association; 2010.

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent EditionAdopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.


A. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purposespecified and indicated.

B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size andtype adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit.

B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized.

C. Anchors and Fasteners:1. Do not use powder-actuated anchors, spring clips, or beam clamps.2. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, powder-actuated

anchors, or preset inserts.3. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel spring clips, steel ramset fasteners, or

welded fasteners.4. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors.5. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow wall

fasteners.6. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts.7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.8. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICALSYSTEMS

26 05 29-2

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance withNECA 1.

C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,ductwork, or other systems.

D. Do not provide support from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid.

E. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of StructuralEngineer and Owner.

F. Equipment Support and Attachment:1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support

equipment as required.


A. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical systemcomponents, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.2. Obtain permission from Structural Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.

B. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance withadequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.

C. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inchoff wall.

D. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed inhollow partitions.

END OF SECTION


CONDUIT 26 05 34-1

SECTION 26 05 34 - CONDUIT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).

B. Aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC).

C. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

D. PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).

E. Flexible metal conduit (FMC).

F. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).

G. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

H. Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit.

I. Conduit fittings.

J. Conduit, fittings and conduit bodies.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005.

B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 2005.

C. ANSI C80.5 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit (ERAC); 2005.

D. ANSI C80.6 - American National Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC); 2005.

E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National ElectricalContractors Association; 2010.

F. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); National ElectricalContractors Association; 2006.

G. NECA 102 - Standard for Installing Aluminum Rigid Metal Conduit; National Electrical ContractorsAssociation; 2004.

H. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC); National ElectricalContractors Association; 2003.


CONDUIT 26 05 34-2

I. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical MetallicTubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007.

J. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit andIntermediate Metal Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005.

K. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; National Electrical ManufacturersAssociation; 2003.

L. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing;National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2004.

M. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association (edition adopted byAuthority Having Jurisdiction, including all applicable amendments and supplements).

N. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 6A - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.

Q. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

R. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

S. UL 651 - Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition, Including AllRevisions.

T. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

U. UL 1242 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.



B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specifiedand shown.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions.

B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.


CONDUIT 26 05 34-3

C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriatecovering.

D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testingfirm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated.

C. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicableminimum size requirements specified.

2.2 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

B. Fittings:1. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as

complying with UL 514B.2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and

compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

2.3 ALUMINUM RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC aluminum rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.5 andlisted and labeled as complying with UL 6A.

B. Fittings:1. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as

complying with UL 514B.2. Material: Use aluminum.3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and


2.4 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying withANSI C80.6 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1242.

B. Fittings:


CONDUIT 26 05 34-4

1. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled ascomplying with UL 514B.

2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and


2.5 METAL CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5.

C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.

2.6 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinylchloride (PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

B. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil.

C. PVC-Coated Fittings:1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC-coated conduit to be installed.2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.4. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mil.

D. PVC-Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimumthickness of 15 mil.

E. Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating.

F. Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 20 mil thick.

G. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to matchconduit.

2.7 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled ascomplying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.

B. Fittings:1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL

514B.2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

C. Description: Interlocked steel construction.


CONDUIT 26 05 34-5

D. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.

2.8 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduitlisted and labeled as complying with UL 360.


514B.2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

C. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.

D. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.

2.9 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 andlisted and labeled as complying with UL 797.


514B.2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) type.

a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.

C. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.

D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron compression type.

2.10 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 andlisted and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated, Schedule80 where subject to physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees C.

B. Fittings:1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL

651; material to match conduit.

C. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.

D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.


CONDUIT 26 05 34-6

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

D. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.

D. Install aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 102.

E. Install intermediate metal conduit (IMC) in accordance with NECA 101.

F. Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by themanufacturer.

G. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111.

H. Conduit Support:1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using

suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,

ductwork, or other systems.3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system.

Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles.

I. Connections and Terminations:1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized

steel conduits prior to making connections.2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece

couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads.3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into

connectors.5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock

nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.


CONDUIT 26 05 34-7

6. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protectconductors.

7. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electricalcontinuity.

J. Penetrations:1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade

beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set

sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to

prevent entry of moisture and gases.6. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of

membrane.7. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and

curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations arenecessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system andmaintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealingwith submittals.

8. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, usingmaterials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00.

K. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion andexpansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment.This includes, but is not limited to:1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.2. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.

L. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantialtemperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessiblepoint near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to:1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces.

M. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.


A. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended bymanufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

B. Where coating of PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) contains cuts orabrasions, repair in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.


CONDUIT 26 05 34-8

3.5 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS

A. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protectionfrom entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation ofconductors.

B. Install conduit securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.

C. Install steel conduit as specified in NECA 101.

D. Unless otherwise noted, all wiring shall be in conduit. Routing of conduit shown on drawings isintended to be diagrammatic and where changes are necessary as a result of structuralconditions, apparatus, or other causes, routing shall be changed to meet conditions. Conduitrisers and offsets are not indicated on Drawings, but are intended to be installed as required. Conduit shall be selected according to location and code requirements.

E. EMT shall be used in the building interior up to 2" in diameter unless otherwise indicated. EMTconduit shall not be used in wet or hazardous locations, below grade or in concrete, or whereexposed to damage. Provide compression fittings.

F. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be used for final connections to motors, appliances andvibrating equipment and shall be a maximum of six feet in length (regular flexible metal conduitmay be used for final connection to interior light fixtures).

G. Type MC cable shall only be used for 15 and 20 Amp, 120 Volt branch circuits totally concealed inany existing walls that are not being furred out. Provide a junction box at the top of the wall totransition to EMT conduit. Home runs to panel for these circuits shall be in conduit.

H. Flexible Metal Conduit shall only be used for final connection to equipment (non vibrating) with amaximum length of six feet (four feet for plenum ceilings). Nonmetallic flex conduit or tubing shallnot be used.

I. Underground conduit or conduit in concrete shall be PVC Schedule 40 (Type-EPC) or PVC coatedrigid steel unless indicated otherwise. Conduit under slab-on-grade shall be buried at least 12"below the vapor barrier. Conduit embedded in concrete slabs, walls, or beams shall not have anoutside dimension more than one-third the overall thickness of the concrete in which they areimbedded. Conduit shall not be run lengthwise in footings. Transitions to aboveground shall bemade with PVC coated rigid steel or with rigid steel conduit coated with 2 coats of asphaltic mastic. PVC conduit shall not be used aboveground.

J. Per NEC paragraph 300.5 (D)(3), provide warning tape or ribbon at least 12" above a servicelateral conduit that is not encased in concrete.

K. All metallic conduit terminating in outlet, junction or pull boxes and cabinets must terminate withbushing and double locknuts except exposed cast boxes, where they may be omitted. Conduitsizes 1-1/4" and above shall have insulating fiber bushings with double locknuts. Grounding typebushings must be used at points where grounding continuity is broken and at service entranceequipment. EMT conduit shall have compression type fittings (set screw connectors are notacceptable).

L. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


CONDUIT 26 05 34-9

M. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.

N. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevishangers, and split hangers.

O. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; providespace on each for 25 percent additional conduits.

P. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 26 05 29.

Q. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporarysupports.

R. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.

S. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.

T. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. Do not run conduit exposed inoccupied areas unless noted otherwise.

U. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.

V. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.

W. Do not cross conduits in slab.

X. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.

Y. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104degrees F.

Z. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.

AA. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.

AB. For conduit installed in floors that are in place before conduit is installed, properly seal aroundconduit, including any required fire chalk.

AC. Install no more than equivalent of four 90 degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies tomake sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one shot bender to fabricatebends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.

AD. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.

AE. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crossesseismic and expansion joints complete with copper bonding jumper.

AF. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.


CONDUIT 26 05 34-10

AG. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.

AH. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 26 05 26.

AI. In wooden load-bearing and exterior walls, do not cut or notch any wooden framing member to adepth exceeding 25 percent of its width. For wooden nonload-bearing walls, do not cut or notchany wooden framing member to a depth exceeding 40 percent of its width.

3.6 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements using materialsand methods listed as part of UL system.

B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork wherever possible. Where separateroofing penetration is required, coordinate location and installation method with roofing installation. Obtain approval from ARCHITECT before making penetrations. The roof warranty shall not bevoided.

END OF SECTION


BOXES 26 05 37-1

SECTION 26 05 37 - BOXES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.

B. Floor boxes.

C. Pull and junction boxes.

1.2 REFERENCES


B. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical MetallicTubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007.

C. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; NationalElectrical Manufacturers Association; 2008.

D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National ElectricalManufacturers Association; 2008.

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association (edition adopted byAuthority Having Jurisdiction, including all applicable amendments and supplements).



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 BOXES

A. General Requirements:1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by

NFPA 70 and product listing.2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system

and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or

testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated.4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable

minimum size requirements specified.5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate.


BOXES 26 05 37-2

6. Note that the design drawings take precedence over the materials described below inSections 2.2 through 2.4.

2.2 OUTLET BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel (unless noted otherwise in designdrawings).1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported;

include 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required.2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.3. Boxes for installation in concrete block wall construction shall be gang type, 3-1/2" deep for

switch devices and 4" square by 1-1/2" deep, with 1-1/4" single and two gang square cornerextension covers for receptacle and junction purposes. Boxes for installation in brick wallconstruction shall be gang type, 3-1/2" deep. Boxes installed in plastered walls shall be 4"square by 1-1/2" deep, with 3/4" single and two gang plaster covers. All boxes shall haveinternal mounting ears or threaded tappings.

B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs.

C. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 27 26.

2.3 FLOOR BOXES

A. Floor Boxes: NEMA OS 1, fully adjustable, 1-1/2 inches deep.

B. Material: Cast metal.

2.4 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. Boxes shall be 1 1/2" deep minimum. Boxesto which fixtures are installed shall have studs and straps to support fixture weight.

B. Pull and junction boxes shall be constructed of code gauge galvanized sheet steel and fitted withscrew covers held in place with corrosion resistant machine screws.

C. Provide boxes where noted on Drawings or where necessary to facilitate conductor pulling andsplicing. Splicing of conductors is to be avoided as much as possible with continuous lengthsbeing preferred. Box sizes shall conform to sizes required by NEC or as indicated on theDrawings (if larger than required by NEC).

D. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box:1. Material: Galvanized cast iron.2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.

E. In-Ground Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6, outside flanged, recessed cover box for flushmounting:1. Material: Galvanized cast iron.2. Cover: Smooth cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws.


BOXES 26 05 37-3

F. Fiberglass Handholes: Die molded glass fiber hand holes:1. Cable Entrance: Pre-cut 6 x 6 inch cable entrance at center bottom of each side.2. Cover: Glass fiber weatherproof cover with nonskid finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough-in.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install boxes securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.

B. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling,equipment connections, and as required by NFPA 70.

C. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 26 27 17.

D. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.1. Adjust box locations up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose.

E. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 27 26.

F. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance.

G. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.

H. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceilingaccess panel or from removable recessed luminaire.

I. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.

J. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, andbacksplashes.

K. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.

L. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.

M. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.

N. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.

O. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.


BOXES 26 05 37-4

P. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow forsurface finish thickness.

Q. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.

R. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.

S. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.

T. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.

U. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metalconduits both supported within 12 inches of box.

V. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.

W. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.

X. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.

Y. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for otherinstallations.

Z. Set floor boxes level.

AA. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast metalbox in other locations.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust floor boxes flush with finish flooring material.

B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.

C. Install knockout closures in unused box openings.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.

END OF SECTION


IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-1

SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Electrical identification requirements.

B. Identification nameplates and labels.

C. Warning signs and labels.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI Z535.2 - American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs; 2007.

B. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2007.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association (edition adopted byAuthority Having Jurisdiction, including all applicable amendments and supplements).

D. UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Identification for Equipment:1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control

equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.

B. Identification for Conductors and Cables:1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 05 19.2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded and

grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or branch-circuitdistribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more thanone nominal voltage system.

2.2 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

A. Identification Nameplates:1. Materials:



2. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inchhigh; Four, located at corners for larger sizes.

B. Identification Labels:1. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and

abrasion resistant.2. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless

otherwise indicated.

C. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background.

D. Locations:1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure.

E. Letter Size:1. Use 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.2. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.

F. Labels (for Power Outlets): Embossed adhesive tape, with 1/8 inch black letters on clearbackground. Use only for identification of appliances and equipment with their own branch circuitsand for dedicated computer circuits. Label outlet with name of load, panel and circuit number.

2.3 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable.

B. Warning Signs:1. Materials:2. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated.

C. Warning Labels:1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or

self-adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced usingmaterials recognized to UL 969.

2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessoriesrecommended by label manufacturer.

3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.

B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.

3.2 INSTALLATION




B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, andmaintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear

access.4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.5. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.6. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.

C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.

D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interiorsurfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.

E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles orwrinkles and edges properly sealed.

END OF SECTION


PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-1

SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Power distribution panelboards.

B. Lighting and appliance panelboards.

C. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Federal Specification;Revision D, 2006.

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National ElectricalContractors Association; 2010.

C. NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; National Electrical ContractorsAssociation; 2009.

D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2008.

E. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches; National ElectricalManufacturers Association; 1993.

F. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2006.

G. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance ofPanelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007.

H. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipmentand Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009.

I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association (edition adopted byAuthority Having Jurisdiction, including all applicable amendments and supplements).

J. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.

K. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.

L. UL 67 - Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures;Current Edition, Including All Revisions.



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity,overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entrylocations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories.

B. Provide catalog data for Surge Protection Devices.



B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in thissection with minimum three years documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com.

B. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.

C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.

D. Siemens Corporation.

2.2 ALL PANELBOARDS

A. Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose indicated.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the followingservice conditions:1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.2. Ambient Temperature:

a. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

C. Short Circuit Current Rating:1. Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault

current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings. Panelboards shall be fully ratedfor the available fault current. Series ratings are not allowed.

D. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices.



F. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements.1. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for

each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

G. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

H. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following

installation locations:2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated.

a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed.3. Fronts:

a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes.b. Fronts for Flush-Mounted Enclosures: Overlap boxes on all sides to conceal rough

opening.4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.

I. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including bussing,connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.

2.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type, circuitbreaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and featuresas indicated on the drawings.

B. Conductor Terminations:1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper

conductors.2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.

C. Bussing:1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.2. Ground Bus Material: Copper.

D. Circuit Breakers:1. Provide bolt-on type or plug-in type secured with locking mechanical restraints.

E. Enclosures:1. Provide surface-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated.

F. Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type.

G. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: As indicated.

H. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on circuit breakers with integral thermal andinstantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide electronic trip units where indicated in designdrawings. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branchcircuits.



I. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, enclosure type as indicated on drawings.

J. Cabinet Front: Surface type, fastened with concealed trim clamps, hinged door with flush lock,metal directory frame, finished in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.

K. Provide blank covers as necessary to cover unused spaces in panelboard. Blank covers shall bemanufactured by the manufacturer of the panelboard and intended for this purpose.

2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS

A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit type,circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations andfeatures as indicated on the drawings.

B. Conductor Terminations:1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper

conductors.2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.

C. Bussing:1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective devices.2. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.3. Ground Bus Material: Copper.

D. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Enclosures:1. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated.2. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.

F. Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard.

G. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: As indicated.

H. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers,with common trip handle for all poles. Plug-in circuit breakers are not acceptable.1. Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits.2. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.

I. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, as indicated on drawings.

J. Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide for 240 volt and less panelboards, 20 inches wide for480 volt panelboards.

K. Cabinet Front: Flush or Surface Mount as indicated on drawings. Cabinet front with concealedtrim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish inmanufacturer's standard gray enamel.

L. Provide blank covers as necessary to cover unused spaces in panelboard. Blank covers shall bemanufactured by the manufacturer of the panelboard and intended for this purpose.



2.5 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit

breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

2. Interrupting Capacity:a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit

current rating indicated.b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the

short circuit current rating indicated. Series rated protective devices are not allowed.3. Conductor Terminations:

a. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping

element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuitprotection.

5. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.

2.6 SURGE PROTECTION.

A. Provide Surge Protection Devices (SPDs) where indicated on the Drawings . The SPD deviceshall have a surge current rating as indicated on the drawings and shall be service rated, whererequired. Maximum ul 1449 2nd edition clamping voltage (c3, 20kv, 10ka, combination wave)shall be 1,150 Volts line to neutral and 1,950 Volts line to line for 480 Volt systems and 450 Voltsline to neutral and 800 Volts line to line for 208 or 240 Volt systems The SPD device shall be ULlisted and shall meet all criteria of UL 1449, current edition. Additionally, the device shall containvisual fault indication. The SPD device shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations, and shall be installed as close as possible to the incoming panel feeder usinga spare circuit breaker (confirm size of circuit breaker with SPD manufacturer). Provide integralSPD when required in design drawings. If installed at a enclosed main circuit breaker, provideovercurrent protection and disconnect. SPD's for the service equipment shall comply with U.L.96A, paragraph ref. 13.1 to allow a Master Label Certificate of Inspection for Lightning ProtectionSystems (even if a lightning protection system is not being installed).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install panelboards securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1(general workmanship), NECA 407 (panelboards), and NEMA PB 1.1.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructionsand NFPA 70.

D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29.

E. Install panelboards plumb.



F. Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and roughopening completely covered.

G. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers orswitches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform.

H. Provide minimum of five spare 1 inch trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted panelboardstubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor.

I. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

J. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories.

K. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and NECA 1.

L. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.

M. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than4 inches above floor.

N. Provide a dedicated neutral for all circuits requiring a neutral.

O. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.

P. Provide computer-generated circuit directory for each lighting and appliance panelboard and eachpower distribution panelboard provided with a door, clearly and specifically indicating the loadsserved. Identify spares and spaces.

Q. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflectcircuiting changes required to balance phase loads.

R. Provide identification nameplate for each panelboard in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

S. Provide arc flash and shock hazard warning labels in accordance with NFPA 70.

T. Prior to installation of a flush-mounted panel and related conduit, confirm with general contractorwhether panel is located in a fire rated wall. If so, coordinate with general contractor to relocatepanel or modify wall as necessary to maintain fire rating of wall. For panels installed flush infinished walls, provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible locationabove ceiling. Identify each as SPARE.1. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch.

U. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to NEC.


A. Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 40 00.

B. Inspect each circuit breaker visually.



C. Perform serveral mechanical on-off operations for each circuit breaker.

D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section7.6.1.1 for all main circuit breakers and circuit breakers larger than 600 amperes. Tests listed asoptional are not required.

E. Ground Fault Protection Systems: Test any GFP systems in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions as required by NFPA 70.

F. Test all receptacles to confirm circuit continuity and that ground and neutral are properlyconnected and polarized.

G. Test any GFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation.

H. Test any AFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation.

I. Test any shunt trips to verify proper operation.

J. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components.

K. For circuit breakers 600A and larger, determine that circuit breaker will trip on overcurrentcondition, with tripping time to NEMA AB 1 requirements. Include description of testing and resultsin test report.

END OF SECTION


EQUIPMENT WIRING 26 27 17-1

SECTION 26 27 17 - EQUIPMENT WIRING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Electrical connections to equipment.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical ManufacturersAssociation; 1999 (R 2005).

B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical ManufacturersAssociation; 2002 (R2008).

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association (edition adopted byAuthority Having Jurisdiction, including all applicable amendments and supplements).



B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purposespecified and indicated.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, andmanufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.

B. Determine connection locations and requirements.

C. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment.

D. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Disconnect Switches: As follows and and in individual equipment sections:1. Safety switches shall be quick-make, quick-break, heavy duty type in sheet steel enclosure,

except as required for rain tight installations, with door cover interlock. Provide fused typesafety switches and fuses where indicated on the Drawings or as required by Code. Fusedswitches shall utilize Class R fuseholders and fuses, unless indicated otherwise.



B. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 26 27 26.

C. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 26 05 34.

D. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 26 05 19.

E. Boxes: As specified in Section 26 05 37.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.

3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.

B. Make all final power feed connections to starters and/or motorized equipment installed by Heatingand Air Conditioning and Plumbing Contractors as indicated or required. Refer to ElectricalSections of other Contractors' Specifications for further information.

C. For air handling equipment with separate "field-installed" heater unit, provide fuse block with fuses,wiring and power connections for fan motor tapped to unit disconnect switch.

D. Verify all equipment for service and characteristics provided prior to rough-in and connection. Provide a grounding conductor for all equipment connected with flexible conduit and bond toconduit system and metallic frame of equipment.

E. Be responsible for securing and installing proper insulated conductors required for equipment ofhigher temperature range beyond that of specified branch circuit type.

F. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible metal conduit. Use liquidtight flexible metalconduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations and for all motors and vibratingequipment.

G. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperaturesencountered.

H. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.

I. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.

J. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipmentconnection boxes.

K. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to completeequipment wiring requirements.



L. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.

M. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipmentwiring requirements.

END OF SECTION


WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-1

SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Wall switches.

B. Wall dimmers.

C. Receptacles.

D. Wall plates.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification;Revision G, 2001.

B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification);Federal Specification; Revision F, 1999.

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National ElectricalContractors Association; 2010.

D. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical ManufacturersAssociation; 1999 (R 2005).

E. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical ManufacturersAssociation; 2002 (R2008).

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association (edition adopted byAuthority Having Jurisdiction, including all applicable amendments and supplements).

G. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

H. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

I. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including AllRevisions.

J. UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, andconfigurations.





B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in thissection with minimum three years documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS.

A. All devices shall be specification grade and shall be the product of one manufacturer throughoutthe project except as otherwise noted.

2.2 ALL WIRING DEVICES

A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purposespecified and indicated.

B. Finishes:

2.3 WALL SWITCHES

A. All Wall Switches: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver alloy contacts,complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and whereapplicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings.1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for

back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.

B. Wall Switches: NEMA WD 1, Heavy Duty, AC only general-use snap switch, quiet type with sidewire terminals. Switches shall be single or multi-pole as indicated on the Drawings. ProvideLeviton Decora Switches, or approved equal, if indicated on the design drawings. Also, provideWattStopper AS-100 switches or approved equal, if indicated on the design drawings.1. Body and Handle: plastic with toggle handle unless otherwise indicated. Color shall be as

described in drawings.2. Ratings:

a. Voltage: 120 - 277 volts, AC.b. Current: 20 amperes.

2.4 WALL DIMMERS

A. All Wall Dimmers: Solid-state with continuous full-range even control following square lawdimming curve, integral radio frequency interference filtering, power failure preset memory, air gapswitch accessible without removing wall plate, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, andlisted as complying with UL 1472; types and ratings suitable for load controlled as indicated on thedrawings.



B. Wall Dimmers: Type as indicated on drawings, complying with NEMA WD 6 and WD 1.1. Body and Handle: plastic with linear slide unless otherwise indicated. Color as described in

drawings.

C. Provide accessory wall switches to match dimmer appearance when installed adjacent to eachother.

2.5 RECEPTACLES

A. All Receptacles: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed ascomplying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the drawings.1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back

wiring with separate ground terminal screw.2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.

B. Receptacles: Heavy duty, complying with NEMA WD 6 and WD 1.1. Duplex receptacles shall be straight blade, grounding type, with side wiring terminals.

Conductors shall be connected to all receptacles using screws (not spring connectors).2. Device Body: plastic unless otherwise indicated. Color as described in drawings.3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated.

C. Convenience Receptacles: Type 5 - 20.

D. Duplex Convenience Receptacles.

E. GFCI Receptacles: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meetregulatory requirements. Also, provide GFCI receptacles where indicated. GFCI type receptaclesshall have "test" and "reset" buttons.

F. Weather proof receptacles shall be in a cast metal box with gasketed, weatherproof cover perNEC paragaph 406.8(B). Weatherproof receptacles shall be UL listed for use in "wet locations"with plug "in-use" and shall be GFCI rated. Receptacle itself shall also be rated weather resistant(WR) per NEC. Receptacles in damp locations may conform to NEC paragraph 406.8(A) withgasketed metal cover and metal weatherproof flip covers (confirm interpretation of damp locationwith AHJ before purchasing materials).

G. Floor-mounted receptacles shall have a brass plate and cover, unless noted otherwise.

H. Special purpose outlets shall be as indicated on the Drawings and have matching cover plates.

2.6 WALL PLATES

A. All Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D.1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring

devices.2. Size: Standard.3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish.



B. Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable coverand corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use withattachment plugs connected.

C. Decorative Cover Plates: smooth plastic unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Color asdescribed in drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and areproperly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.

D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.

E. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly.

F. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiringdevices.

G. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, whereapplicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwiseindicated.

B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 as required for installation ofwiring devices provided under this section.

C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devicesexceeds 300 V.



E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connectmore than one conductor to wiring device terminals.

F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal andtightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-inpressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipmentgrounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

H. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.

I. Install wall switches with OFF position down.

J. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging asinstructed by manufacturer. For dimmers associated with electronic ballasts, provide separatebox and plate (do not combine with other switches).

K. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers.

L. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mountedreceptacles with grounding pole on left.

M. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completelycovered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes orimproperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting thisrequirement.

N. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed ordesignated for future use.

O. Do not cut cover plate.

3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Mount switches and dimmers at no more than 47" above finished floor (to top of switch handle)unless noted otherwise. If there are obstructions (i.e. a service counter), mount switches at nomore than 44" above finished floor (to top of switch handle). See Section 308 of the ADAStandards For Accessible Design for more information. Conform to all Americans With DisabilityAct (ADA) requirements.

B. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install convenience receptacle with bottom 6 inches above counter.

D. Install dimmer 48 inches (to center of switch) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. Conform to all ADA requirements.



3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to matchoriginal factory finish.

END OF SECTION


ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 18-1

SECTION 26 28 18 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Fusible switches.

B. Nonfusible switches.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

D. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses.

1.3 REFERENCES


B. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002(R2007).

C. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum);National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2001 (R2006).

D. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipmentand Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009.

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent EditionAdopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com.



B. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.

C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.

D. Siemens Corporation.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch.1. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON

position.2. Handle lockable in OFF position.3. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class R fuses.

B. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch.1. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON

position.2. Handle lockable in OFF position.

C. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1.1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R unless noted otherwise.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install enclosed switches in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install enclosed switches securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructionsand NFPA 70.

D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29.

E. Install enclosed switches plumb.

F. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount enclosedswitches such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79 inches abovethe floor or working platform.

G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

H. Provide identification nameplate for each enclosed switch in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

I. Provide arc flash warning labels in accordance with NFPA 70.



J. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.

K. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and sizeinstalled.


A. Visually and mechanically confirm that safety switch is working.

B. For switches rated 200A and greater, perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS,Section 7.5.

C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed safety switches or associatedcomponents.

END OF SECTION


INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00-1

SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Interior luminaires.

B. Emergency lighting units.

C. Exit signs.

D. Ballasts.

E. Lamps.

F. Luminaire accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C78.379 - American National Standard for Electric Lamps -- Reflector Lamps --Classification of Beam Patterns; 2006.

B. ANSI C82.1 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballast - Line Frequency Fluorescent LampBallast; 2004.

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National ElectricalContractors Association; 2010.

D. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; NationalElectrical Contractors Association; 2006.

E. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; National ElectricalContractors Association; 2006.

F. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical ManufacturersAssociation; 2002 (R2008).

G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent EditionAdopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

H. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire ProtectionAssociation (edition adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction).

I. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

J. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data (including ballasts, drivers and lighting contactors): Provide dimensions, ratings, andperformance data.



B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in thissection with minimum three years documented experience.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish one replacement lamp for each lamp type.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRES

A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.

C. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purposespecified and indicated.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets,ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize andprotect the lamp and distribute the light.

E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operatingsystem.

F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without anydamage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.

2.2 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. Description: Emergency lighting units complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and localcodes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.



B. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20 percentvoltage drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps to integralbattery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automaticallyrecharges battery upon restoration of normal power source.

C. Battery:1. Size battery to supply all connected lamps, including emergency remote heads where

indicated.

D. Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manuallyactivate emergency operation.

E. Provide low-voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge.

2.3 LUMINAIRES

A. Furnish products as indicated in Schedule included on the Drawings. Confirm that the fixturesscheduled are the correct, voltage, wattage, size and mounting type and are listed for locationused (i.e. damp or wet locations) before ordering fixtures, ballasts, and lamps.

B. Although not specifically shown or specified, all light fixtures shall be provided with all necessaryoptional accessories and mounting hardware for installation as indicated or required.

C. Provide insulated ceiling (i.c.) rated fixtures where recessed incandescent, compact fluorescent,LED or low voltage light fixtures come into direct contact with insulation.

2.4 EXIT SIGNS

A. All Exit Signs: Internally illuminated with LEDs unless otherwise indicated; complying with NFPA101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.1. Number of Faces: Single or double as indicated or as required for the installed location.2. Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for the installed location.

B. Exit Signs: Exit sign fixture suitable for use as emergency lighting unit.1. Provide fixtures complying with NFPA 101.2. Lamps: Compact fluorescent.3. Mounting: As indicated.

2.5 BALLASTS AND CONTROL UNITS

A. All Ballasts:1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal

and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards.

2.6 LAMPS

A. All Lamps:



1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire.2. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed. Where lamps are not

specified, provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations.3. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state

lamp efficiency standards.4. Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated, for each type of lamp furnish

products which are consistent in perceived color temperature. Replace lamps that aredetermined by the Architect to be inconsistent in perceived color temperature.

B. Lamp Types: As specified for each fixture.

C. Reflector Lamps: Beam patterns in accordance with ANSI C78.379.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 as required for installation ofluminaires provided under this section.

B. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (generalworkmanship), NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).

D. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.

E. Install fixtures securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500 (commerciallighting).

F. Install suspended luminaires and exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.

G. Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling framing.

H. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.

I. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines andwith each other. Secure to prevent movement.

J. Support fixtures (2 x 4 foot and smaller) to be recessed in readily removable tile ceilings (lay-intype) from the T-bar tile support and connect to remote mounted 4" square (minimum size,conform to NEC) junction boxes with approved six foot long (four feet long for plenum ceilings),3/8" flexible conduit "fixture whip" with grounding conductor bonded between conduit system andfixture.



K. Connect single-connected fixtures, surface or stem hung, with heat resistant fixture wire. Connectmultiple-connected fluorescent fixtures, surface or stem hung, with type THHN heat resistantthermoplastic wire of a size indicated for branch circuit.

L. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place.

M. Provide sloped ceiling adaptors and all other required hardware as necessary to properly installceiling mounted light fixtures in sloped ceilings.

N. Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units, and exit signs at height as indicated onDrawings.

O. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.

P. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable fortemperature conditions within fixture; use flexible conduit.

Q. Connect luminaires and exit signs to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 26 05 37 usingflexible conduit.

R. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable fortemperature conditions within luminaire.

S. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

T. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire.

U. Emergency Lighting Units:

V. Exit Signs:

W. Install lamps in each luminaire.


A. See Quality Requirements Specification Section for additional requirements.

B. Inspect each product for damage and defects.

C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.

D. Test self-powered exit signs, emergency lighting units, and fluorescent emergency power supplyunits to verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply.

E. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replaceexcessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.



3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directedby Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.

B. Aim and position adjustable emergency lighting unit lamps to achieve optimum illumination ofegress path as required or as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction.

C. Exit Signs with Field-Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properlydesignate egress path as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction.

D. Aim and adjust fixtures as indicated.

E. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting), andmanufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restorefinishes to match original factory finish.

B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.

C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.

D. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Clean finishes and touch up damage. Also remove all instruction tags.

3.5 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion.

3.7 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS

END OF SECTION

.

COMMUNCATIONS GENERAL

REQUIREMENTS 270000 - 1


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

Section 270000 - Communications General Requirements

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 00 and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. This section, along with other related sections, cover cabling, pathways, equipment,

grounding and bonding for low voltage systems, information technology cabling and electronic safety and security systems.

2. Definitions used throughout Division 27 specifications.3. Electrical, Low-voltage, Communications, Electronic Safety and Security and Audio

Visual contractor(s):a. Qualifications.b. Bid submission requirements.c. Submittal Requirements.d. Project Close-out Requirements.e. General Warranty Requirements for Parts and Labor.

4. Execution requirements for all Division 27 and 28 specification sections.

B. Related Requirements:1. Communications, IT and Security (Low-voltage Systems) Drawings (“IT-“ and “SC-“

drawing number prefix).2. Electrical Drawings (“E-“ drawing number prefix) and Specifications (Division 26).3. Section 260536 “Cable Trays" for cable trays and accessories.4. Section 270526 “Grounding and Bonding for Communication Systems” for grounding and

bonding associated with components within this section. 5. Section 270528 “Pathways for Communications Systems” for conduit, back boxes and

cable supports associated with components within this section.6. Section 270544 “Sleeves and Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling” for rated

and non-rated cable protection sleeves associated with components within this section.7. Section 271100 “Communication Equipment Room Fittings” for all components within

telecommunication rooms and enclosures associated with components within this section.

8. Section 271300 “Communications Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with components within this section.

9. Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with components within this section.

10. Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and data cabling associated with components within this section.

11. Where conflicts exist between this section and other sections or drawings, the most stringent shall apply for pricing and contract requirements. However, all discrepancies must be presented in writing along with proposed resolution to the Owner in writing prior to ordering or installing any conflicting equipment or related products.

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

C. General Scope of Work:1. In general, provide Technology Systems cabling, systems and infrastructures as directed

in these specifications and drawings.2. In general, provide a new and complete Category 6 horizontal cabling infrastructure as

directed in these specifications and drawings. 3. In general, provide a new fiber optic riser cabling system as directed in these

specifications and drawings. 4. In general, build out the telecommunications rooms (MDF, IDFs) and telecommunications

enclosures as directed in these specifications and the drawings. 5. Provide outside plant cabling for support of the technology systems within the building as

directed within these specifications and drawings.6. Provide audio/visual equipment (including televisions and projectors), components,

cabling, terminations and other multimedia related interfaces and infrastructure.

D. Specifically Excluded from Scope of Work:1. The active networking equipment such as switches, routers, servers, printers and

wireless access points, unless required as part of these specifications, shall be provided with the owner. It is the responsibility of the contractor to coordinate installation of this active equipment with the owner during installation. Priority shall be placed on work that will support the owner’s installation.

E. General Requirements:1. The open communications cabling system approach shall be flexible and capable of

supporting multiple environments such as:a. Fast Ethernetb. Gigabit Ethernetc. Voice Over IPd. Video Distribution (including high-definition surveillance streaming and recorded

video)e. WLAN Distributionf. Power Over Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af)

2. All cabling and components used in the horizontal cabling system shall be Category 6 rated in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C unless otherwise specified.

3. Horizontal cabling shall not exceed a permanent link length of 270 feet. Measure the distance of each cable prior to installing and notify the engineer if the 270-foot distance is expected to be exceeded.

4. The horizontal cabling system shall contain all channel matched components. This includes cable, jacks, and patch cords.

5. All work shall conform to the standards and codes of the following organizations and publications as applicable. When a conflict occurs, follow the most stringent requirements:a. NFPA 70 – National Fire Codeb. ANSI – American National Standards Institutec. BICSI – Building Industry Consulting Services Internationald. TDMM – Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (BICSI current

editions)e. BOCA – Building Officials and Code BOCA Administrators (Standard Building

Code)f. EIA – Electronic Industries Associationg. FCC – Federal Communications Commission

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

h. ICBO – International Conference of ICBO Building Officials (Uniform Building Code)

i. IEEE – Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineerj. NBC – National Building Code (as adopted for site location)k. FBC – Florida Building Code (as adopted for site location)l. NFPA – National Fire Protection Associationm. TIA – Telecommunications Industry Associationn. All local codes and regulations

6. The contractor shall provide, install, test and warrant all work as required within these documents, unless specifically noted otherwise.

7. The contractor shall follow the general project construction schedule and phasing plan provided by the General Contractor and shall meet all construction and Owner move-in requirements.

F. Schedules1. Development of General Schedule: A General Schedule is to be submitted with bid.2. Development of Detailed Schedule

a. Within seven (7) days of the (tentative) award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a detailed schedule using "Microsoft Project" software or equivalent. It shall be prepared in the Gantt chart format. The Contractor Project Schedule (CPS) shall indicate detailed activities for the projected life of the project. The CPS shall consist of detailed activities and their restraining relationships, including such milestones, constraints, and interfaces with separate Owner-awarded contracts as the Owner may elect to include. The CPS shall include indications of the activity points at which each key item of material or equipment must be available on-site in order that the scheduled work can proceed as planned.

b. Preparation of Detail Schedule: In preparing the Contractor Project Schedule (CPS), meet with the Owner/Owners Representative and the General Contractor to develop detailed activity information, including staffing for the project. Provide anticipated submittal date, for fabrication and delivery durations for key construction materials, systems and equipment. The CPS shall contain an adjustable time-scaled schedule using a critical path method (CPM) precedence diagramming system.

3. Project Progress Meetingsa. The Contractor shall participate in Project Meetings held in facilities provided by

the Owner/Owner's Representative. These meetings shall be held weekly, at a time agreed by the Owner/Owner's Representative to establish the current state of completion, review coordination issues, and revise the schedule as necessary.

b. The construction schedule, as accepted by the Owner/Owner's Representative shall be an integral part of the Contract with the Owner/Owner's Representative, and shall establish interim contract completion dates for the various activities. The schedule must remain adjustable and flexible throughout the length of the project.

4. The Contractor shall purchase critical materials at the time the Contract is awarded so delays and substitutions will not be necessary when the time comes to incorporate these materials into the Work.

G. Regulatory Requirements and Fees: Deliver copies of all permits, licenses, warranties and certificates to the Owner and General Contractor prior to final payment and closeout.

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BICSI - Building Industry Consulting Service International, Inc.

B. CPU: Central processing unit.

C. Cross-Connect - A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection.

D. EMI – Electromagnetic Interference.

E. EMT – Electrical metallic tubing (conduit) – see Division 26 for requirements.

F. ESS – Electronic Safety and Security

G. IP: Internet Protocol

H. LAN: Local area network.

I. PC: Personal computer. Applies to the central station, workstations, and file servers.

J. PDF: Portable Document Format. The file format used by the Acrobat document-exchange-system software from Adobe.

K. P/N: Product or Part Number

L. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

M. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol.

N. TDMM – Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (BICSI - latest edition)

O. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

P. USB: Universal serial bus.

Q. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

R. WLAN: Wide Area Network

1.4 CONTRACT DOCUMENT FORMAT AND LANGUAGE

A. The Drawings: The Drawings are graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams.

B. The Specifications: The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services.

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

C. In the event of conflict between the drawing and specification, the greater quantity/quality is to be used.

D. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.

E. The organization of the Specifications in sections is not intended to imply trade responsibilities. 1. Section titles are not intended to limit the meaning or content of a section, or to be

completely descriptive of requirements specified within a section.

F. The imperative language is used generally in the Specifications. These statements in this Section are directed to the "Technology Systems Contractor". The term "Cabling Contractor" and “Audio Visual Contractor” may also be used to interchangeably with the term "Technology Systems" contractor.

G. Colons are used in the Specifications to list requirements generally for products. The words "shall be" shall be supplied by inference where a colon (:) is used for such purpose.

H. Miscellaneous Definitions1. The term "product" shall mean and includes materials, systems, and equipment, 2. Whenever the terms "accepted," "directed," "selected," "required," "submitted," or similar

words and phrases are used in the Contract Documents, it shall be assumed that the word "Project Engineer" follows the verb as the object of the clause, such as "...accepted by the Project Engineer," and "...submitted to the Project Engineer," the Project Engineer being a designated Owners on site representative.

3. The term "furnish" shall mean to furnish products and supervision. 4. The term "install" shall mean to supply labor and supervision to erect, install and correct. 5. The term "provide" shall mean collectively furnish and install as defined above. 6. The term "exposed" shall mean exposed-to-view when the project is substantially

complete. 7. The term "concealed" shall mean not exposed-to-view when the project is substantially

complete. 8. The terms "acceptable," "proper," and other qualifying words shall imply evaluation and

judgment by the Owner's Project Engineer (OPM).9. Singular words in the Contract Documents shall be considered plural where required by

the subject under discussion, 10. The term "similar" shall mean and be interpreted in its general sense and not as meaning

identical, and all details shall be suited to the location and to the connection with other parts of the work.

11. The term "as specified" shall mean collectively all terms, requirements, stipulations, etc., as described for the respective equipment, materials or methods in the Contract Documents.

12. The term "as indicated" shall mean as indicated on the Drawings.13. The term "Engineer" or "Project Engineer" shall mean the Owner-designated

representative having authority to issue instructions and allow approvals, and act as the Owner's agent.

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

1.5 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General:1. The contractor shall be solely responsible for quality control and shall maintain quality

control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, workmanship, and site conditions, to produce Work in accordance with Contract Documents.

2. Work shall be free from faults and defects in workmanship. Materials and equipment incorporated into the work shall be new, unless noted otherwise.

3. Required testing and inspection are intended to assist in determination of probable compliance of the work with the Contract Documents, but do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for this compliance. Specified testing and inspection are not intended to limit Contractor's quality control program.

B. Workmanship1. Standards: Comply with industry standards, except when tolerances that are more

restrictive or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or workmanship that is more precise.

2. Contractor shall re-work or re-install any quality problems not meeting the Project Engineer’s quality site visit reviews and/or not meeting the requirements of the drawings or specifications.

3. Anchorage: Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking.

C. Services of Manufacturers and Suppliers1. Manufacturer's Instructions: Require compliance with instructions in full detail, including

each step in sequence. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Manufacturer before proceeding.

2. Manufacturer's Certificates: When required in individual Specifications section, submit manufacturer's certificate, in duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements, executed by responsible officer.

3. Manufacturer's Field Services: When required in individual Specifications section, have manufacturer or supplier provide qualified representative to observe field conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test and adjust equipment as applicable and to make written report of observations and recommendations.

D. Coordination of Work1. Carefully check space requirements and the physical confines of the area of work to

insure that all material can be installed in the spaces allotted thereto, including conduits and cable supports. Transmit to other trades in a timely manner all information required for work to be provided under their respective Sections in ample time for installation.

2. Wherever work interconnects with or contacts the work of other trades, coordinate with other trades to insure that ail trades have the information necessary so that they may properly install all the necessary connections and equipment. Identify all items of work that require access so that the floor tile trade will know where to install tile cutouts.

3. Due to the type of installation, a fixed sequence of operation is required to properly install the complete systems. Coordinate project and schedule work with the General Contractor in accordance with the construction sequence. Provide progress status of the installation to the General Contractor to allow them to update their project schedules.

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

4. When directed by the General Contractor, the Contractor shall, without additional fee, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for proper compliance with the design intent.

5. Refer to the Architectural Plans and Elevations for exact locations of outlets and devices.

E. Supervision and Construction Procedures1. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and

attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters.

2. The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor.

3. The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Project Engineer or his representatives in the administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor.

4. The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed under this Contract to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.

5. The Contractor shall take field measurements where applicable, and verify field conditions and shall carefully compare such field measurements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor with the Contract Documents before commencing activities. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall be reported to the Engineer at once.

6. If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statues, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Engineer, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work and shall bear the attributable costs.

7. Contractor shall examine substrates and conditions under which product are to be installed and verify that the Work may commence. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been fully resolved.

8. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, except where more stringent requirements are shown and except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of Work.

9. Have a lead foreman or supervisor on-site that can make decisions and represent the Contractor.

F. Source Quality Control: Provide each type of material, product or system from a single source or manufacturer for the entire project and provide accessories, fittings, anchorages or similar items as provided or recommended by primary materials manufacturer. Do not change brand, type, or style.

G. Replacement and Correction1. Promptly replace or correct all work found not to be in compliance with the requirements

of the Contract Documents and the requirements of any public authority having jurisdiction so as not to delay the Work or the work of other contractors regardless of how

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

such failure to comply may be revealed. Replacement and correction shall be expedited as required to maintain interim contract completion dates and the full completion date.

2. The Engineer may require additional testing and inspection of work previously found not to be in compliance until such work has been properly replaced or corrected. Such additional testing and inspection shall be at Contractor's expense.

3. The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors.

H. Transportation, Handling, Storage and Protection1. Handle and store materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer and

supplier's recommendations and store packaged materials and equipment in original, undamaged condition with manufacturer's labels and seals intact.

2. Arrange for storage in protected and secured location. Provide for access for inspection. Maintain stored materials and equipment in a neat and orderly condition at all times.

3. All materials stored are the responsibility of the Contractor until final acceptance by the Owner.

I. Daily Cleanup and Project Cleanliness1. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate and check ail areas where

work is performed to ensure that a complete and thorough cleanup is performed to allow for the regular operation of the activities the area is designed for on a daily/shift basis. This is especially critical in areas where the work is completed after hours and on weekends to prevent disruption of daily activities.

2. Cleanup is to include all equipment, parts, waste, liquid, and dust as a result of work being performed.

3. Clean-up shall be continuous when working during normal business hours, or when working in occupied spaces.

J. Owner/Active Network Equipment Installation - Prior to requesting active equipment installation or turnover of telecommunication spaces to the owner for active networking equipment installation, the following requirements must be met:1. Telecommunication Spaces

a. Telecommunication racks, enclosures and equipment cabinets must be installed in their permanent position and bolted/mounted to building structure as required with the drawings and specifications. Connections to cable management components (vertical, horizontal and/or ladder rack systems) must be in place.

b. Horizontal and vertical cable managers installed and connected to ladder rack if required.

c. Ladder rack within each telecommunication space (if required) installed, grounded and connected to vertical wire managers and/or racks and equipment cabinets.

d. Fire retardant paint applied to plywood backing on wall (with uL stamp left unpainted).

e. Flooring completed including any final seals, cleaning and/or treatments to final product.

f. All fire sleeves (as required) installed, including additional spare (n+1) for cables entering telecommunication space.

g. All grounding and bonding components, wiring and requirements including installation and wiring to building electrical grounding system of the TMGB/TGB in each closet tested and completed.

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

2. Building Support Systemsa. “House” lighting operational and in working order with areas where owner

equipment is to be installed.b. Central air systems (HVAC) operational and filters changed at regular intervals. c. “Clean” power is available and all required receptacles within telecommunication

spaces installed, tested and active. Planned power outages MUST BE CONVEYED TO OWNER’S IS/IT TEAMS in order to facilitate soft shutdown of active equipment. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to replace damaged owner equipment due to power failures or surges during construction.

3. Telecommunication Cablinga. All fiber and copper connections supported within each telecommunication room

and/or enclosure must be completed and any debris cleaned from the area from installation. Once active equipment has been powered up, additional precautions must be taken in order to prevent small debris such as wire sheathing, small pieces of conductor and/or any additional debris from construction activities. Any work to be performed by the contractor within the telecommunication areas where owner equipment is active and receiving power must be approved by the owner’s IS/IT representative.

4. Cleanlinessa. A thorough cleaning of the telecommunication room/area where owner’s active

equipment is to be installed must be completed prior to active equipment installation. This includes a complete clean of all contractor installed equipment and free of debris, dust, dirt or any other particulates that could be damaging to the owner’s equipment.

b. “Sticky mats” shall be installed inside of each telecommunication room at the entrance to the area on the telecommunication room side of the door.

c. Positive pressure must be maintained within each telecommunication space and all air systems serving the areas active, tested and in working order. If conditioned air is not available at the time active networking equipment is to be installed, it will be the responsibility of the contractor to install temporary cooling and air flow units and maintain pressurization and temperature requirements of active equipment until final systems are available.

d. Temperature monitoring must be active and recorded with a minimum of twenty-four 24-hour history/data points. If construction requirements do not provide permanent temperature monitoring or if the temperature monitoring system is not operational at the time active networking equipment is to be installed, it is the responsibility of the contractor to provide temporary monitoring units (i.e. battery powered thermostats capable of recording temperature at minimum of every five (5) minutes for twenty-four (24) hours) within each area, room or enclosure where owner active networking equipment is to be installed.

e. Any area adjacent or surrounding telecommunication spaces shall be free of debris of construction waste and material. All carpentry and millwork in these adjacent spaces shall also be completed as to prevent dust and debris from construction activities from entering the telecommunication area.

5. Securitya. Door and door hardware must be installed and in working order. Ideally, final lock

cylinders are in place and keyed to the owner’s keying system, however, construction temporary lock cylinders will be acceptable if and only if the telecommunication spaces are on a separate and isolated temporary cylinder and owner shall have the only set of keys for the spaces. Keys can be distributed back

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

to the contractor at the discretion of the owner if required. If access is granted back to contractor, a log sheet will be temporarily affixed within the space and all non-owner parties entering and exiting shall record name, company, time in and time out.

b. Access control systems including card reader entering telecommunication spaces (if required per documents) do not have to be completely functional prior to active equipment installation. However, if these systems are functional or become functional prior to substantial completion, coordination with owner’s IT/IS representative must occur prior to removing or changing previous agreed upon access methods to the spaces.

c. Temporary locking measures attached to the door frame of the opening accessing the telecommunication spaces during construction that are of products that are not instructed or approved within these documents are not allowed. This includes any padlocks, auxiliary deadbolts, keyed padlocks, combo locks and other latching and/or locking devices attached to the door frame and the final or temporary door to the telecommunications area.

d. The telecommunications areas shall be locked at all times once the owner’s active networking equipment has been moved, stored and/or installed into the telecommunication areas.

6. Once owner equipment is powered on and prior to substantial completion, it is the responsibility of the contractor to keep the owner’s equipment in working order, secure and clean from construction debris. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to clean active networking equipment by a certified and owner approved technician that will maintain warranty of components if these standards are not met and sustained until substantial completion and building turnover to the owner.

7. If any of the above conditions are not met and failures to active networking equipment is deemed by the manufacturer of the networking equipment that the failure is attributed to construction related activity (i.e. debris, dirty conditions, power fluctuations, overheating of components due to temperature conditions not being controlled), the equipment will be replaced at the contractor’s expense including any expedited shipping charges incurred.

1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. Participation1. Contractor's Duties: Participate in weekly project and safety meetings at the job site with

the Owner and Owner's Engineer or Representative. Prepare and distribute minutes within three days of the meeting.

2. Participate in General Contractor's weekly meetings to facilitate timely coordination, schedule alignment, inspection reviews, information sharing, etc.

3. Participate in a weekly cabling system project meeting if deemed necessary by the Owner or General Contractor. See meeting requirements within this section for additional information.

4. Authorized Representatives: Representatives of separate contractors, subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of entity each represents.

B. Pre-construction Meeting1. Scheduling: Schedule within five (5) days of contract award. 2. Attendance:

a. Owner/Owner’s Representative (in person or by phone)

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

b. General Contractor (in person)c. Engineer (in person or by phone)d. Contractors’ superintendents and foreman for any entity providing, supplying or

installing any of the products, systems or services as required by these division 27 or division 28 specifications. It is recommended a representative from the electrical contractor performing work per division 26 drawings and specifications is included in this meeting if that work is being performed by a separate company and/or subsidiary. (in person)

C. Typical Technology System / Low-voltage Project Meeting1. Attendance

a. Same as pre-construction meeting attendeesb. Additionally, the owner’s IS/IT representative shall be invited and at the discretion

of the owner’s overall project manager.2. Minimum Agenda

a. Previous Meeting Minutes. b. The Contractor's Project schedule. c. Updated construction schedules. d. Claims for modifications to contracted scope of work. e. Critical work sequencing. f. Major equipment deliveries, priorities, and stored materials. g. Project Coordination.

1) Critical near term2) Designation of responsible personnel

3. Procedures and processing of:a. Field decisions. b. Proposal requests. c. Submittals and Submittals Schedule. d. Change Orders. e. Applications for Payment. f. Contract close-out procedures.

4. Quality Controla. Updated punch list itemsb. Documentation of correction actions made during previous week.

5. Punch Listsa. It is the contractor's responsibility to generate a punch list based on information

provided by the owner and the Engineer. b. Drawings indicating deficiencies will be provided by the parties listed above. The

contractor shall create and maintain a list of these deficiencies and progress made to correct them.

c. At minimum the list will contain the following information:1) Sheet Number 2) Room 3) Issue 4) Date reported 5) Corrective action taken 6) Date closed

6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

8. Use of p Mark-up Procedure: During progress of Work, maintain a printed set of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings in clean, undamaged condition with mark-up of actual installations which vary from Work as originally shown. Mark whatever drawing is most capable of showing actual physical condition, fully and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are marked up, mark cross-reference on Contract Drawings at corresponding location. Mark with erasable colored pencil, using separate colors where feasible to distinguish between changes for different categories of Work at same general location.

9. remises:a. Office, work and storage areasb. Owner’s requirements

10. Construction facilities, controls and construction aids. 1.11. Temporary utilities. 12. Safety and first-aid procedures. 13. Security procedures. 14. Parking/Transportation procedures. 15. Housekeeping procedures. 16. Special Contract requirements, including but not limited to:

a. Allowable locations of storage and temporary construction facilities. b. Allowable delivery times.c. Allowable use of public roadsd. Workers’ conduct

17. Review of work progress since previous meeting.18. Review field observations, problems, and conflicts.

1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Summary Description1. General: Throughout progress of Work, transfer recorded changes to a set of Record

Documents using Revit. A Revit file of the drawings will be provided for your use.2. Definitions: Record Documents are defined to include those documents or copies relating

directly to performance of the Work, which Contractor is required to prepare or maintain for Owner’s records recording Work as actually performed. In particular, Record Documents show changes in work relation to way in which work was shown and specified by the original Contract Documents; and show additional information of value to Owner’s records, but not indicated by Original Contract Documents. The record Revit files shall indicate all outlet locations, outlet labeling, riser cabling routes, IDF lay-outs, Rack elevations, backboard elevations, voice frame elevations, cable tray, ladder tray, j-hook routes, conduit, technology devices, and equipment. Record Documents include newly-prepared Drawings (if any are specified), mark-up copies of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, marked-up copies to Specifications, Addenda and Change Orders, marked-up Product Data Submittals, record Samples, Product List, field records for variable and concealed conditions and miscellaneous record information on Work which is otherwise recorded only schematically or not at all. Certain individual Work sections of these specifications indicate specific Record Document requirements, which extend requirements of this Section.

B. Quality Assurance1. General: Delegate responsibility for maintenance of Record Documents to one person on

Contractor's staff.

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

2. Accuracy of Records: Coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of Drawings and other Documents where such entry is required to show change. Accuracy of records shall be such that future searches for items shown in the Contract Documents may reasonably rely on information obtained from the Record Documents.

C. Description of Requirements1. Record Drawings

a. Mark-up Procedure: During progress of Work, maintain a printed set of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings in clean, undamaged condition with mark-up of actual installations which vary from Work as originally shown. Mark whatever drawing is most capable of showing actual physical condition, fully and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are marked up, mark cross-reference on Contract Drawings at corresponding location. Mark with erasable colored pencil, using separate colors where feasible to distinguish between changes for different categories of Work at same general location.

b. Mark-up important additional information which was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. Give particular attention to information on Work concealed, which would be difficult to identify or measure and record at a later date. Note alternative numbers, Change Order numbers and similar identification. Each person preparing markup shall initial and date markup and indicate name of firm.

c. In preparation for Certification of Substantial Completion, review completed mark-up of Record Drawings with the Project Engineer. Prepare a full set of Revit generated corrected drawings for Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings using Revit software. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked-up on print sets, by erasing and redrawing where applicable, and by adding details and notations where applicable; refer instances of uncertainty to the Project Engineer for determination. Identify and date each updated Drawing.

d. Copies, Distribution: At the completion of Work, Contractor shall forward three sets of prints generated from the Revit files to the Engineer. Organize drawings into matching print sets, place set(s) in a durable tube-type drawing container (with end caps), and mark end cap with suitable identification referencing the job # and name as noted in the header of this document.

e. Prior to forwarding to the Engineer, submit corrected drawings to the Engineer for review and acceptance. The Engineer will review each drawing for general scope of changes and information recorded thereon, and of general quality of draftsmanship thereon (erasures and drafting). Drawings will be returned to Contractor for organizing into a set and for final submittal.

2. Record Specifications: During progress of the Work, maintain one copy of Specifications, including Addenda, Change Orders and similar modifications issued in print form during construction, and mark-up variations (of substance) in actual Work in comparison with text of Specifications and Modifications as issued. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of options, and similar information on Work where it is concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related Record Drawing information and Product Data, where applicable. Mark up exact locations of equipment, racks, cable rack trays, cabinets, etc. on the furnished drawings in the specifications. Upon completion provide changes in a Revit format and, submit to the Engineer.

3. Record Product Data

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

a. Mark-up Procedure: During progress of Work, maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal, and mark-up significant variations in actual Work in comparison with submitted information. Include both variations in product as delivered to project site, and variations from manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for installation. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work which cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related Change Orders and mark-up of Record Drawings and Specifications. Upon completion of mark-up, provide changes using Revit and submit completed Revit set of documents to the Engineer.

b. Product List: Prior to final completion, submit final up-to-date Products List.c. Samples: Immediately prior to dates of Substantial Completion, Engineer will meet

with Contractor at project site, and will determine which (if any) of submitted samples maintained by Contractor during progress of the Work are to be transmitted to Owner for record packaging, identification marking, and delivery to Owner's sample storage space. Dispose of other samples in manner specified for disposal of surplus and waste materials, unless otherwise indicated or directed by the Engineer.

4. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other sections of Specifications for requirements of record keeping and Submittals in connection with actual performance of Work. Prior to dates of Substantial Completion, complete records and place in good order, identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to the Engineer.

1.8 PROJECT CLOSETOUT

A. Cleaning1. Maintain a clean working environment throughout the entire job.2. Prior to final inspection and acceptance of the Work, remove all debris, rubbish, waste

material, tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials from the Project site and thoroughly clean your work area.

3. Thoroughly clean all system materials and components located in the TRs, Data Center, labs and work rooms. All surfaces shall be free of dust and dirt.

B. Substantial Completion1. Contractor

a. Submit written notice to Engineer that Project is Substantially Complete.b. Submit list of items (punch list) to be completed or corrected. Failure to include any

items on such list does not alter responsibility of Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with Contract Documents.

2. Inspectiona. Engineer will make an inspection after receipt of notice.b. Should Engineer consider that Work is Substantially Complete:

1) Owner will accept work as noted "Acceptably Completed".2) Contractor shall complete Work listed for completion or correction, within

designated time.3) Should Engineer consider that Work is not Substantially Complete:4) He shall notify Contractor in writing, stating reasons.5) Contractor will complete Work, and send second written notice stating that

Project is Substantially Complete.6) Engineer will re-inspect Work.

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

C. Final Inspection1. Contractor shall submit written notice that:

a. Contract Documents have been reviewed.b. Project has been inspected for compliance with Contract.c. Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract.d. Project is completed, ready for final inspection as described in the General

Conditions.2. Inspection:

a. Engineer will make final inspection after receipt of notice.b. Should Engineer consider that Work is finally complete in accordance with Contract

Documents, he shall request Contractor to make Project Closeout submittals.c. Should Engineer consider that Work is not finally complete:

1) He shall notify Contractor, in writing, stating reasons.2) Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and

send second written notice certifying that Work is complete.3) Engineer will re-inspect Work.

D. Closeout Submittals: Submittals: On or before Date of Substantial Completion submit:1. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.2. Certification and Warranties:

a. Category 6 test certificates for all horizontal cabling. (Marginal passes will NOT be accepted).

b. Contractor and manufacturer’s Category 6 cabling system warranty certification for complete end-to-end solution.

c. Fiber optic cable test, certificate and OTDR results.3. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.4. Return any existing equipment which had been removed during the Project.5. Deliver evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities: Low voltage

certificates of Inspection.6. Test data reports including fiber optic, Category 6a and Category 3 cabling.7. Service contracts.8. Project record documents, both hard and soft copies.9. As-built documentation: Three hard copies and one soft copy to Owner and one soft copy

to Engineer.

E. Instructions1. Section Cross-reference: Refer to Division 1 Sections.2. Operational Instructions: Instruct Owner’s personnel in operation of any system and

equipment.

F. Final Application for Payment: Contractor shall submit final application in accord with requirements of General Conditions of Contract. Owner sign-off of closeout submittal shall be obtained prior to request for final payment.

G. Return of Contract Documents: Drawings, details, sketches and specifications are the property of the owner and are issued to Contractor as instruments of service only. If required, Contractor shall return same to owner.

H. Post-Construction Inspection

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

1. Prior to expiration of one year from Date of Substantial Completion, Engineer will make visual inspection of Project to determine whether correction of Work is required, in accordance with provisions of Conditions of Contract.

2. Engineer will notify Contractor, in writing, of observed deficiencies.

1.9 SUBMITTALS

A. General1. Contractor

a. The Contractor shall review, accept and submit to the Engineer, shop drawings, product data, samples and similar submittals for all products and material; and as required by the Contract Documents. Submittals made by the Contractor which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned without action.

b. Preparation: Prepare shop drawings, product data and samples and other submittals for submission.1) Determine and verify:

a) Field measurements.b) Field construction criteria.c) Catalog numbers and similar data.d) Conformance with specifications.

2) Coordinate each submittal with requirements of Work and of Contract Documents.a) Representation: By acceptance and submittal of shop drawings, samples or

product data, the Contractor represents determination and verification of field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, dimensions, catalog numbers, and similar data, and that Contractor has checked and coordinated each item with other applicable accepted shop drawings and contract requirements.

b) Conformance' Project work, materials, fabrication, and installation shall conform to accepted shop drawings, applicable samples, and product data.

2. The Project Engineer can be contacted at:a. Company: H. Stephen Jones and Associates, Inc. (HSJ)b. Contact: Stephen Jones and Tod Sailor, RCDDc. Office Phone Number: 904-260-0024d. Email: [email protected] and [email protected]. The Engineer and the General Contractor will review and accept or take other

appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as shop drawings, product data and samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review of such submittals are not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor. The review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of any specified obligations. The review shall not constitute acceptance of safety precautions or, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The acceptance of a specific item shall not indicate acceptance of an assembly of which the item is a component. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Project Engineer's acceptance of shop drawings, product data, and samples of similar submittals. The Contractor shall not be relieved of

mailto:[email protected]

mailto:[email protected]

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

responsibility for errors or omissions in shop drawings, product data, samples or similar submittals by the Engineer thereof.

f. When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, the Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness of such calculations and certifications.

B. General Submittal Requirements1. General:

a. Shop drawings, product data, samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required the way the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.

b. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of shop drawings, product data, samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been accepted by the reviewers.

2. All submittals which require product data, shop drawings and samples shall be prepared together and submitted to the Engineer at one time. All submittals shall be combined together and bound in a 3-ring binder. Provide (3) binder copies.

3. Transactions: Transactions shall be through the Project Engineer. Inform each manufacturer, vendor, distributor, and material supplier of requirements concerning submission of required submittals.

4. Submission Date: The submittal binder and associated samples shall be submitted to the Project Engineer and received within five (3) days of contract award. Submittals will be reviewed and returned to the Contractor within three (2) days. The Contractor shall submit three (3) copies.

5. Submittals shall be delivered to the Engineer's Office.6. Identification:

a. General: Submittals shall have the following identification data, as applicable.

1) The date of submission.2) The Project title and location.3) Contract identification.4) The names of:

a) Contractorb) Installerc) Supplierd) Manufacturer

b. Identification of product (brand name, model number), use, and location with specification section number.

c. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.d. Relation to adjacent or critical features of Work or materials.e. Applicable standards.f. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents.g. Identification of revisions on re-submittals.h. An 8” x 3” blank space for Engineer's stamp.i. Submission of RCDD staff qualifications.

7. Shop Drawings: Title, drawing number, revision number, and date of drawing and revision.

8. Project Data: Each separate catalog, brochure, or single page submitted shall have an attached number. Catalogs or brochures submitted containing multiple items need the identification only on the cover, however, specific products for the project within such

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

multiple item catalogs must be clearly identified including item name or designation, page, specific product number, or other available identification.

C. Specific Category Submittal Requirements1. General: Except as otherwise indicated in individual work sections, comply with

requirements specified herein for each indicated category of submittal.a. Where testing or inspections are specified in individual sections or where Testing or

Inspections are required by governing authorities, submit test or inspection reports to the Engineer.

b. The requirements for submission of other types of submittals are specified in individual sections.

c. Submit a detailed description and shop drawings describing how each outlet will be installed and how the cabling will be installed to each outlet. Describe the mounting type, raceway types and paths. Submit to HSJ (engineer) for approval prior to purchasing materials.

d. Construction Schedule: Within five (5) days after execution of the Contract or the date of issuance of a letter of intent, whichever is earlier; submit three (3) copies of a detailed construction schedule to Engineer. This document will be finalized after submitting it with bid. Include with construction schedule a separate schedule of the following meetings:1) Project Weekly Progress Meetings: Day of week and time.2) Other Proposed Meetings: Purpose, Date and Time for each.

e. Section Cross-Reference: Refer to Divisions 01 and 17 for construction schedule requirements.

f. Submit one copy of the construction schedule with monthly invoice. Indicate:1) Activities or portions of activities completed up to the end of the previous

month.2) The progress along the critical path in terms of days ahead of or behind the

allowable dates.g. The accepted construction schedule shall not be changed without the Owner's consent.

In such instance, promptly submit three (3) copies of a revised schedule to the Engineer.2. Shop Drawings

a. Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work.

b. Provide newly prepared information on project prints with graphic information at accurate scale (except as otherwise indicated), with name of preparer indicated (firm name). Show dimensions and note which are based on field measurement. Identify materials and products for the work shown. Indicate compliance with standards, and coordination requirements. Do not allow shop drawing copies without appropriate final "Action" markings by the Engineer to be used in connection with the work.1) Four (4) copies are required for Submittal.2) Drawing Requirements: Shop drawings shall indicate dimensions necessary for

construction and erection; arrangement and sectional views; complete details including relationship and connection with adjoining work of other trades; kind of materials, thickness and finish, and other data necessary.a) Identify details by reference to sheet and detail numbers shown on

Contract Drawings.

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

b) Sheet size: Minimum: 18" x 12"; maximum: 36" x 24". Indicate scale on each sheet/view and provide electronic copies scaled per AIA standards.

3) Related Work: Associated drawings relating to a complete assembly shall be submitted at same time to greatest extent possible, so that each may be checked in relation to proposed assembly. Furnish necessary templates, patterns and setting drawings to other trades as required for coordination.a) Reference Set: Maintain one copy of each accepted set of shop drawings at

project site, available for reference by the Engineer and others.b) Installer’s Copy: Do not proceed with installation of materials, products, or

systems until copy of accepted applicable shop drawings is in possession of Installer.

3. Product Dataa. Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions,

brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.

b. General: Collect required data into one submittal for each unit of Work or system; and mark each copy to show which choices and options are applicable to project. Include manufacturer's standard printed recommendations for application and use, compliance with standards, application of labels and seals, notation of field measurements that have been checked, and coordination requirements.1) Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information that is not applicable to the

Work.2) Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to

the Work.3) Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products, brand names or models.4) Show performance characteristics and capacities.5) Show dimensions and clearances required.6) Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls.

c. Manufacturer's Standard Specifications: Submit manufacturer’s specifications modified to reflect job conditions and project requirements.

d. Manufacturer's Required Recommendations: Where specifications sections require manufacturer's recommendations, submit such recommendations with product data.

e. Reference Set: Maintain one set of product data (for each submittal) at project site, available for reference by the Engineer, the General Contractor and others.

f. Required Copies: Provide a preliminary submittal where required for selection of options by the Engineer.

g. Installer's Copy: Do not proceed with the purchase or installation of materials, products or systems until copy of accepted applicable product data is in possession of Installer.

4. Inspection and Test Reports: Provide all test reports to the Engineer as specified. All reports to be typed. Submit format for approval prior to commencing test.

5. Warrantiesa. General: Refer to individual specifications sections for additional requirements on

warranties, product/workmanship bonds and maintenance agreements.b. Copies: In addition to copies desired for Contractor's use, furnish one executed copy in

each conformed Operation and Maintenance Manual.6. Close-out Submittals:

a. Record Documents: Refer to Division 01.b. Maintenance/operating Manuals: Refer to Division 01.

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

c. Materials and Tools: Refer to individual work sections for required quantities of spare parts, extra and overrun stock, maintenance tools and devices, keys, and similar physical units to be submitted.

7. Action Submittalsa. Engineer’s Action:

1) Where action and return of submittal is specified, Engineer will review each submittal, mark with "Action", and return submittal. Where submittal must be held for coordination, Contractor will be so advised.

2) Unrestricted Release: Work may proceed, provided it complies with Contract Documents, when submittal is returned with the following marking: “Accepted”.

3) Restricted Release: Work may proceed, provided it complies with notations and corrections on submittal and with Contract Documents, when submittal is returned with the following marking: “Accepted as Noted."

4) Returned for Re-submittal: Do not proceed with Work. Revise submittal in accordance with notations thereon, and resubmit without delay. Do not allow submittals with the following marking “Rejected, Resubmit” (or unmarked submittals where a marking is required) to be used in connection with performance of the Work.

5) Other Action: Where submittal is returned for other reasons, Project Engineer will note reason and return it marked as follows: “Action Not Required" or “No Action Taken.”

6) Non-Conforming Submission: Submittals which do not comply with Contract Documents shall not be submitted. Should a submission which does not comply with the Contract Documents be forwarded, said submission will be returned without action, marked "Non-Complying Submission."

7) Where submittals are noted as “For Information Only,” “For Owner's File,” or similar designation, Engineer will accept submittal but will take no action and will not return submittal to Contractor. Submittals including, but not limited to, Inspection and Test Reports, Warranties, Certifications, Standards and Maintenance Manuals and other Close-Out Submittals do not require Engineer's action and will not be returned to Contractor.

b. Contractor’s Action:1) Contractor's Review: Prior to submission, check, correct, stamp and sign

submission for coordination with Work of other trades, field dimensions and conditions, and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Mechanical and electrical submissions shall bear stamps of acceptance and certification indicating that coordination between mechanical and electrical trades has been carried out and that no conflict exists. Notify in writing of any deviations from Contract Documents, or of any changes required for coordination or field conditions.

2) Contractor's Stamp: The Contractor's stamp shall have following wording: "The Contractor certifies that he has reviewed this Shop Drawing or Sample and Work indicated complies with the Contract Documents."

3) Contractor's Distribution: When submittals are returned “Accepted for Design," or “Accepted for Design as Noted,” the Contractor shall provide reproductions of Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data which carry the Engineer and Contractor's stamp to subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, governing authorities and others as necessary for performance of Work. Show such distributions on transmittal forms.

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

D. Submission Procedure1. In the event that first submission is considered unsatisfactory as to make it unwise for

Contractor to proceed with any work indicated, the submission will be marked “Rejected- Resubmit," and returned to Contractor.

2. Second and subsequent submissions shall follow the procedures for a first submission until submission is stamped “Accepted for Design” or “Accepted for Design as Noted."

3. Resubmission: When transparencies are returned as “Rejected-Resubmit," original tracing shall be corrected, a new reproducible transparency made and resubmitted until is obtained.

4. The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing, on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those noted by the Engineer on previous submittals.

5. If submittals, upon review by the Owner or Engineer are found not to conform to the requirements of these specifications, the Contractor shall be required to resubmit with modifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for the Owner's extra expenses for subsequent review(s) of rejected submittals necessitated by the Contractor's failure to make the requested modifications. Such extra fees shall be deducted from payments by the Owner to the Contractor. Acceptance of submittals by the Owner or Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to meet the requirements of this Section.

1.10 WARRANTIES

A. General1. In general, the Contractor shall warrant the Technology Systems they are providing for a

period of one (1) year after acceptance by the Owner. All materials, equipment, parts and labor are included within the warranty. System failures, faulting operations, system components, parts, etc. shall all be remedied and corrected to 100% satisfaction of the Owner.

2. The Category 6 cabling portion of the Project for all systems shall be warranted from the manufacturer for a minimum of 25 years. The warranty will begin on the first day after final acceptance. The warranty shall include materials, parts, labor, and performance. Provide a warranty certificate at the Project closeout, both from the Contractor and the manufacturer on the end-to-end certified installations.

1.11 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. The Substitution procedure is required for any products which deviate from the specified manufacturer and model. This includes, but is not limited to, products submitted as “Comparable,” as well as products submitted to meet the requirement for the Contractor to provide products incorporating the latest performance improvements as required by the specific sections of work.

B. For substitutions offered as part of the bid submittal, submit all proposed substitutions as one package and at least (7) seven working days prior to the bid opening date.

C. The substitution procedure is as follows: 1. The Contractor must submit information verifying performance, cost and availability

criteria of each proposed substitution.

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

2. There is no guarantee, expressed or implied, that any product substitution shall be accepted. The Owner may reject any proposed substitution without cause and without altering in any way the Contractor’s contractual obligation to complete the Project.

D. Substitutions must meet the following criteria for consideration: 1. The proposed products shall offer superior performance without adding cost to the

Contract. 2. The proposed products shall offer equivalent performance and reduce cost to the

Contract. 3. The specified products are no longer available. 4. The proposed products avoid delays to the project that would be caused by the specified

products. 5. The specified products will not operate as intended due to unexpected field conditions.

E. Once comparable products have been approved, any additional changes must be approved in writing by the Owner’s representative and will be treated as a substitution.

F. Use the same products for the same use throughout the systems.

G. Use only products from a single manufacturer for similar use throughout the systems unless otherwise specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. In general, all products shall be new, free of any defects, UL compliant and meet or exceed the latest revisions, amendments, drafts and TSBs of ANSI/TIA-568-C, 569B, 606, 758, 942, J-STD 607-A, and the latest version and revisions to the U.S. National Electrical Code.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. In general, you shall provide a new, complete, certified, tested, and warranted system as described in the Specifications and Drawings.

B. The complete installation shall be installed with highly skilled and trained technicians providing a quality and professional system. Installers shall be trained and certified by supplied material manufacturers to install all materials that are specified and certified to use all system test equipment.

C. The Contractor shall provide a supervisory work force sufficient to efficiently and effectively execute the Contractor's responsibilities.

D. Generally accepted industry standards, as well as manufacturer's written installation instructions and recommendations, shall be used for in-process quality control and final acceptance of the Work installation.

.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

E. System and Product Manufacturers: Certified and experienced craft personnel will be required to provide and use the proper tools and test equipment in the performance of each activity. Tools must be in good working order and test equipment must be properly calibrated. Contractor is responsible for safe storage of tools, and is responsible for their security of their tools, materials, and work in place until final acceptance by the Owner.

F. Cable Placement

1. Adequate care shall be exercised when handling, storing reels, or during the installation of cable to prevent damage to the cable. Cable with dents, flat spots, or other sheath distortions shall not be installed. Do not leave pulled cable above the floor, susceptible to damage prior to terminating.

2. After pulling cable, coil neatly and tie-up so it is not lying on the floor.

G. Installing Cable with Ceiling Grid in Place: Caution shall be used when installing cable with ceiling grid in place. Adequate supports and pulling apparatus shall be used to ensure that cable does not damage ceiling grid. Any damage to ceiling grid caused by the pulling in of cable is the responsibility of the Contractor.

H. Securing Cable: Cables and equipment shall be supported and secured as indicated on the Drawings. Where the specific method of support is not shown, adequate supports and fasteners shall be used to secure cable and equipment in position. Metallic supports and fasteners shall have a corrosion- resistant finish. All methods used to secure or transport cables shall be in accordance with the applicable codes, standards, and Owner Guideline.

I. Bending: Caution shall be used when bending cable to avoid kinks or other damage to the sheath. The bend radius shall be as large as possible with a minimum radius of six times the outside diameter of the cable. Minimum radii shall be increased when necessary to meet cable manufacturer's recommendations. Bending operations in manholes and vaults shall be performed in accordance with the procedures and instructions of the manufacturer. The Contractor is to provide a Junction Box every 3 turns.

J. Damage: The cable shall be carefully inspected for sheath defects or other irregularities as it is payed off the reel. If defects are detected, pulling sheath shall stop immediately and the cable section shall be repaired or replaced at the discretion of the Owner. A system of communications, visual or otherwise, shall be maintained between feed and pulling locations so that pulling can be stopped instantly, if necessary.

K. Cable Termination: Terminate cables in proper order and sequence, and as shown on the Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, mount top of equipment on walls AT 6’-0” AFF. Installation shall not impede future installations and shall not damage existing.

L. Category 6 Acceptance Tests: Category 6 horizontal cable system, cable and connecting hardware shall be tested to ensure compliance with ANSI/TIA 568-C and the manufacturer's Category 6a warranted requirements and as approved by the Project Engineer, the Owner, and the system manufacturer. An approved Category 6a cable test unit analyzer shall be used for testing purposes. Each jack in each outlet shall pass the Category 6a analyzer test. The complete channel and system shall be fully installed prior to start of testing.


GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTESMS 270526 - 1


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

Section 270526 - Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Grounding conductors.2. Grounding connectors.3. Telecommunications grounding bus bars.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 260526 “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems”2. Section 260536 “Cable Trays" for cable trays and accessories.3. Section 270000 “Communications General Requirements” 4. Section 270528 “Pathways for Communications Systems” for conduit, back boxes and



telecommunication rooms and enclosures associated with components within this section.

1.3 SECTION SPECIFIC DEFINITIONS

A. See section 270000 “Communications General Requirements” for standard definitions pertaining to all sections within Division 27 and Division 28.

B. BCT: Bonding conductor for telecommunications.

C. TGB: Telecommunications grounding bus bar.

D. TMGB: Telecommunications main grounding bus bar.


A. Provider per Section 270000 “Communications General Requirements”.

B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room signal reference grid. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.


A. Provide per Section 270000 “Communications General Requirements”.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL



B. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.1. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of ITS

Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site.

2. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as a registered communications distribution designer to perform the on-site inspection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Comply with UL 486A-486B.

B. Insulated Conductors: Stranded copper wire, green or green with yellow stripe insulation, insulated for 600 V, and complying with UL 83.1. Ground wire for custom-length equipment ground jumpers shall be No. 6 AWG, 19-

strand, UL-listed, Type THHN wire.2. Cable Tray Equipment Grounding Wire: No. 6 AWG.

C. Cable Tray Grounding Jumper:1. Not smaller than No. 6 AWG and not longer than 12 inches. If jumper is a wire, it shall

have a crimped grounding lug with two holes and long barrel for two crimps. If jumper is a flexible braid, it shall have a one-hole ferrule. Attach with grounding screw or connector provided by cable tray manufacturer.

D. Bare Copper Conductors:1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmils, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, and 1/4 inch in

diameter.5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.6. Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with two-hole

copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

2.3 GROUNDING CONNECTORS

A. Irreversible connectors listed for the purpose. Listed by an NRTL as complying with NFPA 70 for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. Comply with UL 486A-486B.

B. Compression Wire Connectors: Crimp-and-compress connectors that bond to the conductor when the connector is compressed around the conductor. Comply with UL 467.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

1. Electroplated tinned copper, C and H shaped.

C. Signal Reference Grid Connectors: Combination of compression wire connectors, access floor grounding clamps, bronze U-bolt grounding clamps, and copper split-bolt connectors, designed for the purpose.

D. Bus bar Connectors: Cast silicon bronze, solderless compression or exothermic-type, mechanical connector; with a long barrel and two holes spaced on 5/8- or 1-inch centers for a two-bolt connection to the bus bar.

E. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

2.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING BUS BARS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers:1. Panduit2. Chatsworth Products, Inc.3. Commscope4. Engineer approved equivalent

B. TMGB: Predrilled, wall-mounted, rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section, length as indicated on Drawings. The bus bar shall be NRTL listed for use as TMGB and shall comply with J-STD-607-A.1. Basis of design: See section 271100 “Communications Equipment Room Fittings”.2. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section.3. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide a 4-inch4. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in

600-V switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V.

C. TGB: Predrilled rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, 1/4 by 2 inches in cross section, length as indicated on Drawings. The bus bar shall be for wall mounting, shall be NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and shall comply with J-STD-607-A.1. Basis of design: See section 271100 “Communications Equipment Room Fittings”.2. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section.3. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide at least a 2-inch4. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in

600-V switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Examine the AC grounding electrode system and equipment grounding for compliance with requirements for maximum ground-resistance level and other conditions affecting performance of grounding and bonding of the electrical system.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=7611

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123456928005




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Bonding shall include the communications cable entrance and the grounding electrode system. The bonding of these elements shall form a loop so that each element is connected to at least two others.

C. Comply with NECA 1.

D. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Conductor Support:1. Secure grounding and bonding conductors at intervals of not less than 36 inches

B. Grounding and Bonding Conductors:1. Install in the straightest and shortest route between the origination and termination point,

and no longer than required. The bend radius shall not be smaller than eight times the diameter of the conductor. No one bend may exceed 90 degrees.

2. Install without splices.3. Support at not more than 36-inch intervals.4. Install grounding and bonding conductors in 3/4-inch PVC conduit until conduit enters a

telecommunications room. The grounding and bonding conductor pathway through a plenum shall be in EMT. Conductors shall not be installed in EMT unless otherwise indicated.a. If a grounding and bonding conductor is installed in ferrous metallic conduit, bond

the conductor to the conduit using a grounding bushing that complies with requirements in Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems," and bond both ends of the conduit to a TGB.

3.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM

A. The BCT between the TMGB and the AC service equipment ground shall not be smaller than No. 1/0 AWG.

B. The BCT between the AC service equipment ground shall be provided by the Cabling Contractor.

3.5 GROUNDING BUS BARS

A. Indicate locations of grounding bus bars on Drawings. Install bus bars horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 12 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Shall be provided by Cabling Contractor.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

B. Bond metallic equipment in a telecommunications equipment room to the grounding bus bar in that room, using equipment grounding conductors not smaller than No. 6 AWG.

C. Stacking of conductors under a single bolt is not permitted when connecting to bus bars.

D. Assemble the wire connector to the conductor, complying with manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:1. Use crimping tool and the die specific to the connector.2. Pretwist the conductor.3. Apply an antioxidant compound to all bolted and compression connections.

E. Primary Protector: Bond to the TMGB with insulated bonding conductor.

F. Interconnections: Interconnect all TGBs with the TMGB with the telecommunications backbone conductor. If more than one TMGB is installed, interconnect TMGBs using the grounding equalizer conductor. The telecommunications backbone conductor and grounding equalizer conductor size shall not be less than 2 kcmils/linear foot of conductor length, up to a maximum size of No. 3/0 AWG unless otherwise indicated.

G. Telecommunications Enclosures and Equipment Racks: Bond metallic components of enclosures to the telecommunications bonding and grounding system. Install top-mounted rack grounding bus bars unless the enclosure and rack are manufactured with the bus bars. Bond the equipment grounding bus bars to the TGB No. 2 AWG bonding conductors.

H. Shielded Cable: Bond the shield of shielded cable to the TGB in communications rooms and spaces. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.1 and TIA/EIA-568-C.2 when grounding screened, balanced, twisted-pair cables.

I. Rack- and Cabinet-Mounted Equipment: Bond powered equipment chassis to the cabinet or rack grounding bar. Power connection shall comply with NFPA 70; the equipment grounding conductor in the power cord of cord- and plug-connected equipment shall be considered as a supplement to bonding requirements in this Section.

3.7 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as part of duct-bank installation.

B. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

C. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches extends above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.

D. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

Connect grounding conductors to cable armor and cable shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.1. Label TMGB(s) with "fs-TMGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for

the space containing the TMGB.2. Label TGB(s) with "fs-TGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for the

space containing the TGB.3. Label the BCT and each telecommunications backbone conductor at its attachment point:

"WARNING! TELECOMMUNICATIONS BONDING CONDUCTOR. DO NOT REMOVE OR DISCONNECT!"



B. Tests and Inspections:1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,

electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Test the bonding connections of the system using an AC earth ground-resistance tester, taking two-point bonding measurements in each telecommunications equipment room containing a TMGB and a TGB and using the process recommended by BICSI TDMM. Conduct tests with the facility in operation.a. Measure the resistance between the bus bars and the nearest available grounding

electrode. The maximum acceptable value of this bonding resistance is 100 milliohms.

3. Test for ground loop currents using a digital clamp-on ammeter, with a full-scale of not more than 10 A, displaying current in increments of 0.01 A at an accuracy of plus/minus 2.0 percent.a. With the grounding infrastructure completed and the communications system

electronics operating, measure the current in every conductor connected to the TMGB. Maximum acceptable AC current level is 1 A.

C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground at the BCT exceeds 5 ohms, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

D. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEMS 270528 - 1


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

Section 270528 - Pathways for Communications Systems

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Communications Systems Requirements for:

a. Metal conduits and fittings b. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings.c. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.d. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 260536 "Cable Trays" for communication systems cable trays and accessories.2. Section 260534 "Conduit” " for additional conduit requirements. 3. Section 260537 “Boxes” for additional backbox requirements. 4. Section 270000 “Communications General Requirements” 5. Section 270526 – “Grounding and Bonding for Communication Systems” for grounding

and bonding requirements associated with components within this section. 6. Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and

data cabling associated with components within this section.7. Section 270544 “Sleeves and Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling” for rated

and non-rated cable protection sleeves associated with components within this section.



B. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing

C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride

D. RMC: Rigid steel conduit



B. Product Data: For surface pathways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

C. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.


SYSTEMS 270528 - 2


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL



B. Coordination Drawings: Pathway routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:1. Structural members in paths of pathway groups with common supports.2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

C. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BASE REQUIREMENTS

A. Division 26 specifications contain project base requirements for all conduit, backboxes, raceways, supports and hangers. These requirements apply for all communications, safety and security wiring, cabling, components and equipment. Information listed within this specification contains additional requirements over and above these base requirements.

B. If a conduit, backbox, support or hanger product type is listed or shown in the drawings or specifications and does not appear in the product specification below, please see Division 26 and apply base requirements for the product type when using in applications covered in Division 27 and 28.

2.2 CONDUIT

A. Application1. See 260534 “Conduit”2. In general, exterior, underground, in slab or under slab conduit shall be PVC-coated,

galvanized steel rigid metal conduit unless otherwise indicated in drawings or specifications.

3. In general, interior conduit concealed above ceiling, in stud or masonry walls shall be EMT.

B. Size1. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than

applicable minimum size requirements specified.

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:1. Comply with TIA-569-B.2. Boxes, enclosures and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet

locations.

B. Typical Telecommunications Outlet Box (JT)1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. Randl Industries, Inc.b. Engineer approved equivalent


SYSTEMS 270528 - 3


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

2. Basis of Design: Randle Industries – T-55017 5 Square Telecommunications Outlet Box3. Requirements

a. Size: 5”H x 5”W x 2 7/8”Db. Knockouts: ½”, 1” and 1 ¼”c. Integrated cable managementd. Compatible with Category 6 and Category 6a minimum bend radius.e. uL or ETL listed

C. Sheet-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

F. Gangable boxes are allowed.

G. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

H. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.2. Nonmetallic Enclosures:

a. Material: Plastic or Fiberglass.b. Finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.

3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2.4 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND CABLING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as

defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.3. Comply with TIA-569-B.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two.1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:a. Quazite: Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with closed bottom unless otherwise indicated.4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "COMMUNICATIONS.".7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.




SYSTEMS 270528 - 4


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

8. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency.2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


3.2 PATHWAY APPLICATION

A. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. Minimum size for optical-fiber cables is 1 inch.

B. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location.1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type

of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

C. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

D. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings.

E. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.

3.3 INSTALLATION


B. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101, and TIA-569-B for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum pathways. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

C. Keep pathways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.


SYSTEMS 270528 - 5


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

D. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.

E. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

F. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

G. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends in any pathway run. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. Utilize long radius ells for all optical-fiber cables.

H. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

I. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

J. Pathways Embedded in Slabs:1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.

2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Arrange pathways to keep a minimum of 1 inch of concrete cover in all directions.4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location.

K. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:1. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

L. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

M. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated pathway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

N. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts.

O. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

P. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

Q. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length.

R. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lbtensile strength. Leave at least 12” of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap


SYSTEMS 270528 - 6


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

underground pathways designated as spare above grade alongside pathways in use. Provide pull wire in each cell of innerduct routed within conduit.

S. Surface Pathways:1. Install surface pathway for surface telecommunications outlet boxes only where indicated

on Drawings.2. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points.3. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight pathway section. Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

T. Pathways for Optical-Fiber and Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 50 feet.2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 75 feet.3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway

unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

U. Install pathway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

V. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all pathways at the following points:1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces.2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure.3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

W. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings.

X. Expansion-Joint Fittings:1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature

change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature

change.b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

temperature change.d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install


SYSTEMS 270528 - 7


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

Y. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

Z. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

AA. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

BB. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

CC. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

DD. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

EE. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench

bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of

conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor.a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and

encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a


SYSTEMS 270528 - 8


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits, but a minimum of 6 inches below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit.

7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.5 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.

F. Field cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 270544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling."

3.7 FIRESTOPPING


B. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration.1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.


SYSTEMS 270528 - 9


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL


SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR

COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND

CABLING 270544 - 1


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

Section 270544 - Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Sleeve-seal systems.2. Sleeve-seal fittings.3. Grout.4. Silicone sealants.5. Communications cable pathways.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-

resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.

2. Section 260536 “Cable Trays" for cable trays and accessories.3. Section 270000 “Communications General Requirements” applies to this section.4. Section 270526 “Grounding and Bonding for Communication Systems” for grounding and

bonding associated with components within this section. 5. Section 270528 “Pathways for Communications Systems” for conduit, back boxes and

cable supports associated with components within this section.

1.3 Section Specific Definitions


B. VOC – Volatile Organic Compound



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable.1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following: a. Specified Technologies, Inc.

1) Solid 1” p/n FS1002) Solid 2” p/n FS200




CABLING 270544 - 2


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

3) Solid 4” p/n FS4004) Split 1” p/n FSR1005) Split 2” p/n FSR2006) Split 4” p/n FSR400

2.2 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.3 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below.1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal

surfaces that are not fire rated.2. Sealant shall have VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).3. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

2.4 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE PATHWAYS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with these specifications, provide products by one of the following:1. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI)2. Hilti3. Engineer approved equivalent

B. Requirements1. Provide both rated and non-rated components by the same manufacturer.2. The self-contained sealing system shall automatically adjust to the installed cable loading

and shall permit cables to be installed, removed, or retrofitted without the need to remove or reinstall firestop or other sealing materials.

3. Provide 1 spare, additional pathway in each location (n+1). 4. Minimum 3” opening capacity per sleeve. 5. Where multiple pathways are required, gang pathways together per manufacturer’s

instructions. Provide additional mounting components as required. 6. Label all pathways per Division 26 labeling requirements.7. Provide cable supporting radius “waterfall” modules on each side of pathway.



CABLING 270544 - 3


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

8. Provide extension modules on either side of pathway as required to span partitions greater than 9” wide and connect via manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Smoke and Acoustical Pathways for Non-Rated Partition and Floor Penetration: 1. Shell Composition: V-0 High Impact ABS/PC Thermoplastic.2. Seal and Curtain: Flame Retardant Neoprene Rubber.3. In-Service Temperature: -30 deg F to 130 deg F.4. Basis of Design: Specified Technologies Inc (STI) EZ-Path Smoke & Acoustical Pathway

(Non-Rated) – NEZ33.

D. Fire Rated Pathways:1. Shell Composition: Galvanized Steel.2. Expansion Temperature: 350 deg F (expansion begins at this temp)3. Volume Expansion: 800%.4. Size: Minimum 3” opening.5. The fire-rated pathway shall contain a built-in fire sealing system sufficient to maintain the

hourly fire rating of the barrier being penetrated. 6. Finish: Orange or red in color.7. UL tested and approved per UL1479.8. Basis of Design: Specified Technologies Inc (STI) EZ-Path Series Fire Rated Pathway –

EZDP33FWS.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pathway

or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.



CABLING 270544 - 4


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved

opening.2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board

assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pathway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at pathway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.

3.5 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE PATHWAYS

A. Install per manufacturer’s specifications and direction.

B. Install in accordance with applicable code requirements.


COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT

ROOM FITTINGS 271100 - 1


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

Section 271100 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Telecommunications mounting elements.2. Backboards.3. Telecommunications equipment racks and ladder rack systems.4. Cable Management

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 260536 "Cable Trays" for cable trays and accessories.2. Section 270000 “Communications General Requirements”3. Section 270526 – “Grounding and Bonding for Communication Systems” for grounding and

bonding associated with components within this section. 4. Section 270528 – “Pathways for Communications Systems” for conduit, back boxes and

cable supports associated with components within this section.5. Section 270544 – “Sleeves and Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling” for rated

and non-rated cable protection sleeves associated with components within this section.6. Section 271300 "Communications Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cabling

associated with components within this section.7. Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for voice and data cabling

associated with components within this section.8. Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and

data cabling associated with components within this section.



B. PDU – Power Distribution Unit


A. Provide per Section 270000 “Communications General Requirements” including the additional requirements within this section.

B. Product Data: For each type of product.1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for equipment racks and cabinets.2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

C. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room fittings. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable connections. Provide structural calculations from manufacturer’s registered engineer showing compliance with IBC for floor anchoring and specifically applicable to the project. Any owner provided equipment shall be factored into this calculation such as active networking or server, rack mounted equipment. Submit request for this list of material to owner or owner’s representative and provide calculations within this submittal.

3. Grounding: Indicate location of grounding bus bar and its mounting detail showing standoff insulators and wall mounting brackets.

D. Closeout Submittals



B. Qualification Data: For installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITALLS

A. Turnover all spare parts and unused equipment, parts and/or fittings to owner.

B. Provide documentation of keying arrangements and keys to all telecommunications enclosures, cabinets or other lockable devices or boxes provided per this specification. Keys shall be labeled and coded as to which piece of equipment it is intended. Provide spreadsheet showing keys to equipment utilizing telecommunications labeling and naming conventions.



B. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under the direct supervision

of RCDD.2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Registered


3. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as RCDD to perform the on-site inspection.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches or as otherwise shown within the drawings. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels specified in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."

2.2 TELECOMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT CABINETS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with these specifications, provide products by one of the following:1. Panduit2. American Power Conversion (APC) by Schneider Electric.3. Engineer approved equivalent.

B. General Cabinet Requirements:1. Distribution Frames: Freestanding modular-steel units designed for telecommunications

terminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported.2. Module Dimension: Width compatible with EIA 310-D standard, 19-inch panel mounting.3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked-polyester powder coat.4. Support a static load (weight supported by the casters and leveling feet) of at least 3,000

lb. total installed equipment weight.5. Capable of ganging together multiple units. If units are shown adjacent to each other in

plan provide all additional hardware and tools to gang each unit together during installation. Verify with owner prior to installation these locations and requirements for controlling access between cabinets.

6. Access Doorsa. Provide swinging, perforated front access door covering the full height of the cabinet

swinging as one door that can be mounted on either side (front or rear) of the cabinet and capable of swinging in either direction.

b. Provide split swinging, perforated rear access door covering the full height of the cabinet capable of mounting on either side (front or rear) of cabinet.

c. All doors shall be capable of ease of removal by a single person with lift off hinges and/or spring loaded lock in place for hinge assembly.

d. All doors shall be perforated and provide maximum ventilation to equipment within each cabinet.

7. Side panelsa. Provide half-height side panels covering the entire length of assembly on both sides

of unit (4 total panels). b. Side shall be flush to the frame in so that the overall width of the unit does not change

with side panels installed. 8. Locking

a. Provide locking devices for all (4) panels and doors utilizing the same key. b. Electronic locks, card access controls and or any additional locking arrangements

other than a simple key and keyway are not required nor permitted. c. If multiple units are required, each cabinet shall be keyed independently from all

others. Key lock cylinders from the manufacturer shall be available to provide a minimum of 220 unique key combinations.

d. Provide minimum 2 keys per cabinet and turnover to owner during closeout. See closeout submittal for additional instructions.





ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

9. Ground each cabinet to telecommunications ground bus bar within each closet per drawings and specifications.

10. Cabling Routing and Protectiona. Provide plastic grommets with rounded corners and edges for all knockouts and/or

cable openings. All cables shall pass through these protected openings and in an orderly and neat manner per workmanship standards within the specifications. Install cable protection prior to routing or pulling cables into unit.

b. Route cables only through the top of the cabinet through manufacturer provided knockouts. Cables routed through side panels or from under/below cabinet are not permitted.

11. Stabilizationa. Each unit shall be capable of field leveling and independently controlled

adjustments. b. Provide any additional stabilization and leveling kits by the same manufacturer of

the unit compatible with mounting instructions. c. Each point making contact with the finished floor or building structure shall be

capable of field adjustment and leveling. d. All units shall be mounted, affixed to the finish floor per manufacturer’s requirements

for permanent placement (“bolt” to structure/floor slab). 12. Accessories

a. Provide all required accessories as indicated within drawings or required to complete the requirements of this specification.

b. Vertical Cable Managers1) Provide vertical cable manager on each vertical side of cabinet (qty 2) and

mounted on front of side of rack. 2) Size as required for each cabinet.

a) 42U Cabinet Basis of Design: Panduit PRV679b) 45U Cabinet Basis of Design: Panduit NRV6

c. Rack mounted PDU1) Provide 1U 120v power distribution unit with minimum ten (10) NEMA 5-20R

receptacles. 2) Unit shall have 1 NEMA 5-20P input connection unless otherwise required.

Coordinate input plug type with owner prior to ordering and confirm UPS type for compatibility.

3) Unit shall have 20A current draw per phase with a minimum of 2400VA load capacity.

4) Provide quantity as indicated in rack elevations. If quantity is not indicated within drawings, provide two (2) per cabinet or rack.

d. Shelving1) Provide rack mounted fixed shelving as required per drawings. 2) Each shelf shall be capable of supporting 250 lbs. of non-rack mount

equipment and secured to rack within the standard rack unit mounting system.

e. It is the responsibility of the contractor to provide bonding conductor and all other necessary hardware required to make connection between cabinet and the common ground.

C. Floor-Mounted Cabinets (applicable for all cabinets in Building C): Modular-type, aluminum construction.1. Baked-polyester black powder coat finish.2. Basis of design: Panduit 45U Net-Access – N8521BC or equivalent.3. Specific Requirements




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

a. Provide 29.53” (750mm) wide and 47.24” (1200mm) deep cabinet with 45 available rack units as shipped from manufacturer.

b. Provide minimum 1310 square inches of total ventilation area on the front door and minimum 1440 square inches on the rear door. Measurements shall be computed with each door in a fully closed and latched position.

D. Floor Mounted Cabinets (applicable for all cabinets in Buildings A and B): Modular-type, aluminum construction.1. Baked-polyester black powder coat finish.2. Basis of design: Panduit 42U – N8212BC or equivalent.3. Specific Requirements:

a. Provide minimum 910 square inches of total ventilation area on the front door and minimum 1000 square inches on the rear door. Measurements shall be computed with each door in a fully closed and latched position.

b. Provide 29.53” (750mm) wide and 42.13” (1070mm) deep cabinet with 42 available rack units as shipped from the manufacturer.

2.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES (WALL-MOUNT).

A. BASIS OF DESIGN: MIDDLE ATLANTIC CWR-26-32PD

2.4 RACK MOUNTED PASSIVE EQUIPMENT AND CABLE MANAGMENT

A. Horizontal Cable Manager (2U)1. Basis of design: 2U Panduit PatchLink – WMPHF2E2. Provide 3.5” H x 19.0” W x 8.9” D rack mounted horizontal cable managers in quantity as

indicated and mount to front or back of standard 19” EIA rack, enclosure or cabinet per drawings.

3. The unit shall consist of a single piece, molded plastic construction with pass through holes in the rear and fingers with rounded edges on the front.

4. Provide capacity for at minimum 48 CAT patch cables with nominal diameter of .250”.5. Provide with at least one (1) two-way hinged cover that has ability to be completely

removed if required by owner. Turnover any unused covers to owner during closeout. 6. All mounting hardware shall be included and the responsibility of the contractor.

B. Modular UTP Patch Panels (Horizontal Cabling) (2U)1. Subject to compliance with these specifications, Modular UTP patch panels to be installed

shall be as manufactured by one of the following:a. Panduitb. Engineer approved equivalent

2. Basis of design: Panduit 48-port Patch Panel, 2U – CPP48HDWBLY3. Requirements:

a. Provide 48-port capacity per unit.b. Numbering provided by manufactory for each port.c. Made of 16-guage steel with black finish.d. Meet or exceed all category 6 standards/e. Capable of receiving standard 8P8C, Cat 6 modular ports (see modular port

specification for requirements).f. Mount within standard 19” EIA/TIA rack.g. Provide blanks for any unused ports.h. Each unit shall be capable of replacing ports without interrupting service to any other

points within the panel.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

C. Fiber Optic Enclosures1. Enclosures for Inner-building Patch Panel (MDF to IDF or equivalent where strand count

to location equals 12 or fewer).a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:1) Panduit2) Engineer approved equivalent.

b. Basis of design: Panduit – FCE1Uc. Requirements:

1) Enclosure shall be capable of housing quantity of termination cassettes/adapter plates/patch assemblies for total fiber strand count per drawings and fiber riser schedule with additional 25% capacity for future use.

2) Provide quantity as required to terminate all strands of fiber as indicated in fiber riser schedule in drawings.

3) Made of 16-guage steel with black finish.4) Mount within standard 19” EIA/TIA rack.

2. Enclosures for OSP Cross-connects/Patch Panel (Service Provider to MDF or Entrance Facility or equivalent where strand count to location is greater than 12).a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:1) Panduit2) Engineer approved equivalent.

b. Basis of design: Panduit – FCE4Uc. Requirements:

1) Enclosure shall be capable of housing termination cassettes/adapter plates/patch assemblies for total fiber strand count per drawings and fiber riser schedule with additional 25% capacity for future use.

2) Provide quantity as required to terminate all strands of fiber as indicated in fiber riser schedule in drawings.

3) Made of 16-guage steel with black finish.4) Mount within standard 19” EIA/TIA rack.

3. See 271500 – “Communication Horizontal Cabling” and 271300 – “Communication Backbone Cabling” for fiber optic termination assemblies, patch panels, patch cables, cassettes, adapters and connector types.

D. Vertical Cable Manager1. See specification within equipment cabinet for requirements.

2.5 LADDER RACK

A. Provide ladder rack for cable support as shown on the Drawings.

B. Subject to compliance with these specifications, ladder rack systems to be installed shall be as manufactured by one of the following:1. Cooper B-Line (basis of design). 2. Chatsworth Products, Inc.3. Engineer approved equivalent

C. Ladder rack system shall meet the following specifications:1. Ladder style tray, mounted horizontally and vertically as indicated on drawings. 2. Width as indicated on drawings.






ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

3. 1.5” minimum side rails.4. 9” maximum rung spacing.5. Black in color.6. Provide all necessary splice, supports, bolts, end caps, hangers and installation

accessories required for a complete cable rack tray system.7. Provide cable radius drops at transitions in ladder rack heights or when cables routed to

telecom room/space enter at a different height than ladder rack installation height as indicated in drawings.

2.6 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 270526 "Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Telecommunications (Main) Grounding Bus Bar (TMGB/TGB):1. Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire

terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.2. Ground Bus Bar: Copper, minimum ¼” thick by (height and width per drawings). Holes

spaced 5/8” apart.3. Stand-Off Insulators: Comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC,

impulse tested at 5000 V.4. Subject to compliance with these specifications, ladder rack systems to be installed shall

be as manufactured by one of the following:a. Panduitb. Engineer approved equivalent

5. Basis of design:a. TMGB (4”H x 12”W)– Panduit GB4B0612TPI-1 with LTYK labeling kit.b. TGB (2”H x 10”W) – Panduit GB2B0304TPI-1 with LTYK labeling kit.

C. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

2.7 TIE WRAPS

A. Description: Properly rated, sized adequately to properly bundle tie and support cable. Velcro tie wraps shall be used in the Server Room, TR’s, and where cabling is not in cable tray. Provide same color to match cable being wrapped unless installed in plenum. No other cable ties shall be permitted.

B. Purpose: To bundle and support cables, and provide a neat and orderly cabling installation.

C. Acceptable Products: Belden, or approved equivalent

2.8 LABELING

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Provide per Section 270500 “Technology Systems – General”.

3.2 ENTRANCE FACILITIES

A. Comply with requirements in Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for materials and installation requirements for all pathways.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Provide per Section 270500 “Technology Systems – General”.

B. Comply with NECA 1.

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout and installation of communications equipment rooms.

D. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

E. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange carrier.1. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local exchange carrier

representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces.

2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants.3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch

panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment.

4. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the equipment room.

F. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate.

G. Anchor floor mounted racks and cabinets with expansion bolt kit. All hardware required for mounting shall be provided by the contractor. Mount per manufacturer’s instructions.

H. Attach ladder rack to equipment cabinets, racks or enclosures with “runway to rack mounting kit” per manufacturer’s specifications. The ladder rack/cable tray shall be positioned so that it does not interfere with the hot air exhaust in the cabinet, enclosure or rack’s top panel.

I. Affix ladder runway rack to data equipment room walls with specified Chatsworth rack wall angle support kit per manufacturer’s specifications. Bolt angle brackets into wall studs or appropriate wall structure to comply with the manufacturer’s requirements. Validate load bearing capability after installation for manufacturer’s rated load.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 270544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling."

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Provide per Section 270544 – “Sleeves and Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling.”

B. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

C. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping."

D. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

B. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground per drawings and specifications.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.

E. Scrape paint at ground conductor contact location to ensure appropriate conductivity. Connect rack structure electrically to the data equipment room bus bar. Verify conductivity between extreme ends of ladder rack runways and the ground bus bar via resistance measurement with an ohmmeter. Resistance measurements shall comply with requirements in Section 270526.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide per Section 270500 “technology Systems – General”.Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

C. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.


COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE

CABLING 271300 - 1


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

Section 271300 - Communications Backbone Cabling

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Innerduct, fabric innerduct.2. 9/125-um, optical fiber cabling.3. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.4. Cabling identification products.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 270000 “Communications General Requirements” applies to this section.2. Section 270528 “Pathways for Communications Systems” for conduit, back boxes and



telecommunication rooms and enclosures associated with components within this section.5. Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for voice and data cabling

associated with components within this section.



B. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

1.4 BACKBONE CABLING DESCRIPTION

A. Backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between communications equipment rooms, main terminal space, and entrance facilities in the telecommunications cabling system structure. Cabling system consists of backbone cables, intermediate and main cross-connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-to-backbone cross-connection.

B. Backbone cabling cross-connects may be located in communications equipment rooms, enclosures or at entrance facilities. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of backbone cabling.


A. General Performance: Backbone cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-C.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.


CABLING 271300 - 2


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL



B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings:1. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics including the following:

a. Cross-connects.b. Patch panels.c. Patch cords.

2. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components.



B. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

C. Supply all quality-control reports and all cabling testing reporting data.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.



B. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and Cabling Administration

Drawings, Cabling Administration Drawings, and field testing program development by an RCDD.

2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Level 2 Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site.

3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise

on-site testing.

D. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


CABLING 271300 - 3


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

F. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

G. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.



B. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use optical

loss test set.2. Test optical fiber cable while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify

the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector, including the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.



B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.11 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INNERDUCT AND FABRIC INNERDUCT.1. Fabric innerduct for 4” applications shall have three cells designed to hold cables up to 1.5”

in diameter, factory lubricated, and have pre-installed color coded pull tapes.2. Fabric innerduct for 2” applications shall have three cells designed to hold cables up to

0.85” in diameter, factory lubricated, and have pre-installed color coded pull tapes.3. Basis of design for Fabric Innerduct: Maxcell MXC4003XX(footage) for 4” applications,

Maxcell MXC2003XX(footage) for 2” applications.4. Corrugated flexible innerduct shall be plenum rated, UL 2024 rated, solid construction,

nonmetallic, pre-installed pull tape, orange color, 1.48” ID.5. Basis of design for Corrugated Flexible Innerduct: Panduit CLTS series.

2.2 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:1. Panduit2. Engineer approved equivalent.

B. General Requirements



CABLING 271300 - 4


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

1. Provide plenum rated cabling for all interior cable runs that are routed through ceiling or ladder rack.

2. Provide outside plant cabling per 338000 “Outside Plant Communication Utilities” and route as shown in drawings.

3. All fiber optic cabling shall be singlemode with nominal 9/125-um core/cladding diameters.

4. Provide cabling with low water peak glass. 5. Cabling shall comply with ANSI/EIA/TIA-492-CAAA.

C. Interior, Armored Plenum Rated Distribution Cable1. 06 Strand OM3 Basis of Design: Panduit - FOPRX06Y2. 12 Strand OM3 Basis of Design: Panduit – FOPRX12Y3. 24 Strand OM3 Basis of Design: Panduit – FOPRX24Y4. Requirements

a. All interior fiber optic cables shall have an orange outer jacket color if both origination and termination point are within interior spaces and cable is not routed within a single building.

D. Outside, Plant Cable Armored Non-Rated1. 06 Strand SM Basis of Design: Panduit - FSWN906

2. 12 Strand SM Basis of Design: Panduit - FSWN9123. 24 Strand SM Basis of Design: Panduit - FSWN9244. All fiber optic cables routed to the exterior shall have a black outer jacket color.

2.3 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:1. Optical Cable Corporation2. Panduit Optical Fiber3. Engineer approved equivalent.

B. Fiber Optic Rack Mounted Enclosures1. See 271100 – Communication Equipment Room Fittings

C. Patch Cords: Provided by Owner.

D. Interior Patch Panels1. Basis of Design: Panduit – FCE1U (4 Cassette Capacity)2. Requirements:

a. Provide minimum 6 strand/port termination capacity per panel.b. Capable of singlemode cable type termination minimum.c. Compatible with Type ST connectors.d. Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS)

specifications of TIA-604-2-B, TIA-604-3-B, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.3.

e. Provide quick-connect, Type LC connectors. Insertion loss not more than 0.2 dB. Design basis utilizes ceramic sleeving to accomplish this requirement.

3. Provide quantity as required to terminate all strands required to each location per drawings and fiber riser schedules with 25% capacity for future growth. For example, if 12 strands are required between closet and MDF, provide two (2) patch panels, a 12 port and a 6 port for a total of 18 ports. Label all unused ports as “SPARE,”




CABLING 271300 - 5


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

4. Provide slack and strain relief for all incoming cables prior to termination and neatly place within enclosure.

5. Provide one (1) DUST CAP for each port.

E. Exterior Patch Panels/Enclosures1. Basis of Design: Panduit - FWME42. Requirements:

a. Provide minimum 6 strand/port termination capacity per panel.b. Capable of singlemode cable type termination minimum.c. Compatible with Type LC connectors.d. Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS)

specifications of TIA-604-2-B, TIA-604-3-B, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.3.

e. Provide quick-connect, Type LC connectors. Insertion loss not more than 0.2 dB. Design basis utilizes ceramic sleeving to accomplish this requirement.

3. Provide quantity as required to terminate all strands required to each location per drawings and fiber riser schedules with 25% capacity for future growth. For example, if 12 strands are required between closet and MDF, provide two (2) patch panels, a 12 port and a 6 port for a total of 18 ports. Label all unused ports as “SPARE,”

4. Provide slack and strain relief for all incoming cables prior to termination and neatly place within enclosure.

5. Provide one (1) DUST CAP for each port.

2.4 GROUNDING


B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

2.5 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-C.1.

C. Factory test optical fiber cables according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568-C.3.

D. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.


CABLING 271300 - 6


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


3.2 ENTRANCE FACILITIES

A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by communications service provider.

3.3 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceway

and Boxes for Electrical Systems."3. Install horizontal fiber optic cables within innerduct when enclosed within conduit.

B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CABLES


B. General Requirements for Cabling:1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.1.2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make

terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches

and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

5. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

6. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution spools.

7. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

8. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

9. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.


CABLING 271300 - 7


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

C. Optical Fiber Cable Installation:1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.3.2. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.

D. Open-Cable Installation:1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with

terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.2. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other

potentially damaging items.

E. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

F. Separation from EMI Sources:1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating unshielded

copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches.b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.

4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches.c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.

5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING



C. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."


3.6 GROUNDING



CABLING 271300 - 8


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

B. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

C. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION


B. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."1. Color-code cross-connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service backboards,

connections, covers, and labels.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

D. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.

E. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors.

F. Cable and Wire Identification:1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a

cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device

if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet.

3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet.

4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips and identify each

cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device with name and number of particular device as shown.

b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each

connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.

G. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA 606-A, for the following:1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent.


CABLING 271300 - 9


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL


A. Provide per Section “Technology Systems – General”.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:1. Visually inspect optical fiber jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect

cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-C.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

3. Optical Fiber Cable Tests:a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-C.1.

Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:1) Attenuation test results for backbone links shall be less than 2.0 dB.

Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-568-C.1.

D. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

E. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

F. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.


COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

271500 - 1


Section 271500 - Communications Horizontal Cabling

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. UTP cabling. 2. 50/125-micrometer, optical fiber cabling. 3. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects. 4. Telecommunications outlet/connectors. 5. Cabling system identification products.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 270000 “Communications General Requirements” applies to this section. 2. Section 270528 “Pathways for Communications Systems” for conduit, back boxes and

cable supports associated with components within this section. 3. Section 270544 “Sleeves and Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling” for rated

and non-rated cable protection sleeves associated with components within this section. 4. Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and

data cabling associated with security system panels and devices.



B. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways.

C. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection.

D. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

E. MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one location of several telecommunications outlet/connectors.

F. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area.


271500 - 2



A. Provide per 270000 “Communications General Requirements”.

B. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For all products listed in this submittal, include the following product and installation data:

a. Nominal OD. b. Minimum bending radius. c. Maximum pulling tension. d. Product number.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the

cabling and asset identification system of the software. 2. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following:

a. Cross-connects. b. Patch panels.




B. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Provide per Section 270000 “Communications General Requirements”



B. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings by an RCDD. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Registered


C. All cabling shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the Contract Documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based on the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal” or “engineer approved equivalent” is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified, and subject to approval during the


271500 - 3


submittal process. Substitution requests must be submitted for approval for any alternates from the manufacturers listed.



B. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION

A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called a "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols. 1. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or consolidation point

between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector. 2. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling. 3. Splitters shall not be installed as part of the optical fiber cabling.

B. A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft., and includes the components that extend from the telecommunications outlet/connectors to the station equipment.

C. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet. This maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet to the workstation equipment or in the horizontal cross-connect.


A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-C.1 when tested according to test procedures of this standard.


C. Grounding: Comply with J-STD-607-A.

2.3 Category 6 UTP CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Panduit 2. Engineer approved equivalent. 3. Basis of Design

a. PANDUIT PLENUM RATED CAT6 CABLE – PUP6004**UY (** - JACKET COLOR)

B. Description: 500MHz, 100-ohm, UTP 1. Cable jackets shall be colored BLUE.



271500 - 4


2. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.1 for performance specifications. 4. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2, Category 6. 5. Cable shall withstand a bend radius of 2 inch at -20ºC without jacket or insulation cracking. 6. The ultimate breaking strength measured in accordance with ASTM D 4565 shall be 400

N minimum. 7. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262.

2.4 UTP CABLE HARDWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Panduit 2. Engineer approved equivalent.

B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or

tools. 2. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher. 3. Provide the necessary jacks and blanks in each surface mounted outlet, faceplate and

patch panel as indicated in the drawings.

C. Patch Panel: See 271100 “Communications Equipment Room Fittings.”

D. Patch Cords: Provided by owner.

E. Category 6 Modular Data Connectors 1. Basis of Design

a. Panduit Mini-Com – CJ688TGAW (‘AW’ designates color “Arctic White) 2. Color of jack shall match terminated cable. 3. Wired in accordance with EIA/TIA T568B polarization sequence. 4. The connector shall meet or exceed the requirements for channel and component-level

performance described in ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Category 6 standards. 5. Physical Characteristics:

a. Physical Characteristics: Inserts shall be functional from -10ºF to 140º F and be tested in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-A Annex A.

b. The connector shall be individual snap-in style and compatible with all communication faceplates, surface mounted outlets and patch panels.

F. Standard Four (4) Port Communication Outlet Faceplates 1. Basis of Design

a. Panduit Single-Gang Sloped Vertical Wallplate, 4-port with ID designation window – CFPSL4WHY (‘WHY’ designates color “White”)

2. Faceplates shall be UL listed. 3. Jacks and faceplates must be from the same manufacturer and compatible. 4. Provide 4 port faceplates for all locations indicated in the drawings. If symbol on drawings

indicates cable quantities at faceplate location less than 4 ports, provide blank inserts in unused ports.

5. Physical Characteristics



271500 - 5


a. Faceplate color shall match building standard. See architectural and electrical drawings and specifications.

b. Label each outlet with machine printed label and insert behind window per naming requirements and conventions outlined within specifications.

G. Wall Phone Outlet and Faceplates 1. Basis of Design

a. Panduit KWP6PY 2. Faceplates shall be UL listed. 3. Verify and test owner’s wall phone with outlet prior to ordering to ensure compatibility. 4. Provide two (2) post mounting for owner’s wall phone integrated with faceplate. 5. Modular port or 8 conductor punch down block on back of faceplate is acceptable. 6. Category 6 standard shall be maintained to faceplate connection. 7. Provide single gang faceplate size only.

H. Systems Furniture Outlet and Faceplates (12-Port/Dual-Gang) 1. Basis of Design

a. Panduit Dual-Gang Wallplate, 12-port with ID designation window – CFPF12WH-2G (‘WH’ designates color “White”)

2. Faceplates shall be UL listed. 3. Jacks and faceplates must be from the same manufacturer and compatible. 4. Provide 12 port faceplates for all locations indicated in the drawings where modular and/or

systems furniture consolidate connections to a single location. 5. Physical Characteristics

a. Faceplate color shall match building standard. See architectural and electrical drawings and specifications.

b. Label each outlet with machine printed label and insert behind window per naming requirements and conventions outlined within specifications.

6.

2.5 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

A. See 271300 – Communications Backbone Cabling.

2.6 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE

A. See 271300 – Communications Backbone Cabling.

2.7 SURFACE MOUNT OUTLETS

A. Two-port Surface Mount Box 1. Basis of Design

a. Panduit Mini-Com 2 Port Surface Mount Box - CBX2AW-AY 2. Surface Mount Boxes shall be UL listed. 3. Jacks and surface mount boxes must be from the same manufacturer and compatible. 4. Physical Characteristics

a. Surface mount box color shall match building standard. See architectural and electrical drawings and specifications.

b. Label each surface mounted box with machine printed label and insert behind window per naming requirements and conventions outlined within specifications.


271500 - 6


2.8 GROUNDING


B. Comply with J-STD-607-A.


A. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-C.1.

B. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-C.2.

C. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


3.2 WIRING METHODS

A. Install cables in pathways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal pathways and cables except in unfinished spaces. 1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Comply with requirements in Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems." 3. Comply with requirements in Section 270536 "Cable Trays for Communications Systems."

B. Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: 1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding

manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. 2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES


B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations

only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. 4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches

and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

5. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.


271500 - 7


6. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

7. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.


9. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.

C. UTP Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain

cable geometry. 3. Install blanking modular inserts within unused station faceplate module spaces.

D. Open-Cable Installation: 1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with

terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by

cable supports not more than 60 inches apart. 3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other

potentially damaging items.

E. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

F. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B for separating unshielded copper voice and data

communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.

4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.

5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.


271500 - 8


3.4 FIRESTOPPING



C. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping."


3.5 GROUNDING


B. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

C. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the TGB/TMGB, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION


B. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

C. Using cable management system software specified in Part 2, develop Cabling Administration Drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use unique, alphanumeric designation for each cable and label cable, jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with same designation. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

E. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.

F. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. Follow convention of TIA/EIA-606-A. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in software and format selected by Owner.

G. Cable and Wire Identification:


271500 - 9


1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet.

3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet.

4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel. a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify each

cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular device as shown.

b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames. Example: XXXX (Room Number), 1, 2, 3, etc. (Location in room starting at primary entrance door and going around the room clockwise). A, B, C, D, etc. (Port location in the face plate starting at top left). Labeling scheme: Closet-Rack-Panel-Jack-Number.

5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.

H. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A. 1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.



B. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification

markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-C.1.

2. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels.

3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

4. Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-C.2.

Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

5. UTP Performance Tests: a. Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA-

568-C.1 and TIA/EIA-568-C.2: 1) Wire map. 2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements). 3) Insertion loss.


271500 - 10


4) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss. 5) Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss. 6) Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT). 7) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT). 8) Return loss. 9) Propagation delay. 10) Delay skew.

6. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP systems after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed.

C. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

D. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND

SECURITY 280513 - 1


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

Section 280513 - Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. RS-232 cabling.2. RS-485 cabling.3. Control-voltage cabling.4. Control-circuit conductors.5. Identification products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

B. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.

C. Open Cabling: Passing telecommunications cabling through open space (e.g., between the studs of a wall cavity).

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate layout and installation of electronic safety and security cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.1. Installation data for UTP and optical-fiber cables as specified in TIA 569-C-1.2. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used:

a. Nominal OD.b. Minimum bending radius.c. Maximum pulling tension.

B. Shop Drawings:1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and

format selected by Owner.2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the

cabling and asset identification system of the software.3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts.



SECURITY 280513 - 2


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following:a. Cross-connects.b. Patch panels.c. Patch cords.



A. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise

on-site testing.


A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.1. Test optical-fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand, end to end. Use

[optical-fiber flashlight] [or] [optical loss test set] <Insert test>.2. Test optical-fiber cable on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the

cable length, and locate cable defects, splices, and connector; include the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.

3. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.1. Flame-Spread Index: [25] <Insert value> or less.2. Smoke-Developed Index: [50] [450] <Insert value> or less.


2.2 UTP CABLE

A. See section 271500 “Communications Horizontal Cabling”

2.3 UTP CABLE HARDWARE

A. See section 271500 “Communications Horizontal Cabling”



SECURITY 280513 - 3


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

2.4 OPTICAL-FIBER CABLE

A. See section 271300 “Communications Backbone Cabling”

2.5 OPTICAL-FIBER CABLE HARDWARE

A. See section 271300 “Communications Backbone Cabling”

2.6 RS-485 CABLE

A. Shall be Windy City Wire 485 Comm-line, 0420003: 24/2P, shielded and plenum rated. No exceptions.

2.7 MISC CABLE

A. Wiegand Signal / Card Reader Cabling1. 22 AWG/6 Conductor shielded cable.2. Plenum rated for interior applications.3. Gel-filled for exterior applications.

B. Door Status, Door Release and Duress Button Cabling1. 22 AWG/4 Conductor shielded cable.2. Plenum rated for interior applications.3. Gel-filled for exterior applications.

C. Request to Exit Cabling1. 22 AWG/4 Conductor shielded cable.2. Plenum rated for interior applications.3. Gel-filled for exterior applications.

D. Provide 14 AWG cabling for all connections between power supplies and door hardware requiring 1 AMP power draw or more.


A. Provide cables and conductors by a single manufacturer where possible.

B. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" and 260536 “Cable Tray” for installation of supports for cables.

3.2 WIRING METHOD

A. Install wiring in metal pathways and wireways.



SECURITY 280513 - 4


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

1. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch. Control and data-transmission wiring shall not share conduits with other building wiring systems.

2. Comply with requirements in Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems."3. Comply with requirements in Section 260536 "Cable Trays.”

B. Install cable, concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors when possible.

C. Wiring on Racks and within Enclosures:1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without

exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM's "Cabling Termination Practices" chapter. Cable ties shall not be excessively tightened such that the transmission characteristics of the cable are altered.

2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.3. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended in writing by

manufacturer.4. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure.5. Connect conductors associated with intrusion system that are terminated, spliced, or

interrupted in any enclosure onto terminal blocks.6. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams.7. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal

blocks, or plug connectors.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 70.

B. Conductors: Size according to system manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

C. Do not install conductors and cables that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

D. Install UTP, optical-fiber, and coaxial cables and connecting materials after spaces are complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

E. General Requirements for Cabling:1. Comply with TIA-568-C.1.2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make

terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels. Leave a minimum of 6 inches of slack at outlet terminations and coil loosely into box after termination on outlet fitting.

4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

5. Maintain minimum cable bending radius during installation and termination of cables.6. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable

between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.




SECURITY 280513 - 5


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

8. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. Do not exceed manufacturer's rated cable-pulling tension.

9. Riser Cable: Riser cable support intervals shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

10. Comply with Section 280544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electronic Safety and Security Pathways and Cabling."

F. Open-Cable Installation:1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunication spaces with

terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings

by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart. Cable supports shall be fastened to structural members or floor slabs in accordance with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3. Cable shall not be run in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Cables shall not be run through structural members or use structural members, pipes, ducts, or equipment as a support.

G. Separation from EMI Sources:1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-C recommendations for separating unshielded

copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communication cables or cables in nonmetallic pathways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.

3. Separation between communication cables in grounded metallic pathways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches.b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.

4. Separation between cables in grounded metallic pathways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches.c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.

5. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or hp and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

6. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.

3.4 POWER AND CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. 120-V Power Wiring: Install according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" unless otherwise indicated.

B. Minimum Conductor Sizes:1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG.2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG.3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 12 AWG.



SECURITY 280513 - 6


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 281300 "Access Control" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 282300 "Video Surveillance" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" and 270544 “Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communication Pathways and Cabling.”

B. Comply with TIA-569-C, "Firestopping" Annex A.

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.7 GROUNDING

A. For communication wiring, comply with J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM's "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" chapter.

B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 270526 "Grounding and Bonding for Communication Systems."

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA-606-B. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections[ with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative]:1. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment

and patch cords, and labeling of all components.2. Test UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity

between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross connection.a. Test instruments shall comply with or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-

C.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

B. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

C. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



SECURITY 280513 - 7


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.


ACCESS CONTROL 281300 - 1


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

Section 281300 - Access Control

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Security access controllers.2. Identifier readers.3. Monitoring input/output device for access control systems.4. Power supplies for access control systems.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 087100 “Door Hardware” for electronic hardware and door components associated

with this section.2. Section 270000 “Communications General Requirements” 3. Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cabling associated with

components within this section.4. Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and

data cabling associated with components within this section.



B. CCTV: Closed-circuit television.

C. Credential: Data assigned to an entity and used to identify that entity.

D. GFI: Ground fault interrupter.

E. Identifier: A credential card; keypad personal identification number; or code, biometric characteristic, or other unique identification entered as data into the entry-control database for the purpose of identifying an individual. Where this term is presented with an initial capital letter, this definition applies.

F. I/O: Input/Output.

G. Location: A Location on the network having a PC-to-controller communications link, with additional controllers at the Location connected to the PC-to-controller link with a TIA 485-A communications loop. Where this term is presented with an initial capital letter, this definition applies.

H. PCI Bus: Peripheral Component Interconnect. A peripheral bus providing a high-speed data path between the CPU and the peripheral devices such as a monitor, disk drive, or network.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

I. RAS: Remote access services.

J. RF: Radio frequency.

K. ROM: Read-only memory. ROM data are maintained through losses of power.

L. TWAIN: Technology without an Interesting Name. A programming interface that lets a graphics application, such as an image editing program or desktop publishing program, activate a scanner, frame grabber, or other image-capturing device.

M. WAV: The digital audio format used in Microsoft Windows.

N. WMP: Windows media player.

O. Wiegand: Patented magnetic principle that uses specially treated wires embedded in the credential card.

P. Windows: Operating system by Microsoft Corporation.

Q. Workstation: A PC with software that is configured for specific, limited security-system functions.

R. WYSIWYG: What You See Is What You Get. Text and graphics appear on the screen the same as they will in print.


A. See section 270000 “Communications General Requirements” for base requirements.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Reference each product to a location on Drawings. Test and evaluation data presented in Product Data shall comply with SIA BIO-01.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.1. System labeling schedules, including electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of

the cable and asset identification system of the software specified in Parts 2 and 3.2. Wiring Diagrams. For power, signal, and control wiring. Show typical wiring schematics

including the following:a. Workstation outlets, jacks, and jack assemblies.b. Patch cords.c. Patch panels.

3. Cable Administration Drawings: As specified in "Identification" Article.4. Battery and charger calculations for central station, workstations, and controllers.

D. Samples: For workstation outlets, jacks, jack assemblies, and faceplates. For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

E. Other Action Submittals:1. Project planning documents as specified in Part 3.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL



B. Field quality-control reports.



B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For security system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:1. Microsoft Windows software documentation.2. PC installation and operating documentation, manuals, and software for the PC and all

installed peripherals. Software shall include system restore, emergency boot diskettes, and drivers for all installed hardware. Provide separately for each PC.

3. Hard copies of manufacturer's specification sheets, operating specifications, design guides, user's guides for software and hardware, and PDF files on CD-ROM of the hard-copy submittal.

4. System installation and setup guides with data forms to plan and record options and setup decisions.



B. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.1. Cable installer must have on staff a registered communication distribution designer (RCDD)

certified by Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI).

C. Source Limitations: Obtain central station, workstations, controllers, and all software through one source from single manufacturer. Provide identifier reader per approved manufacturer list.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with [SIA DC-01 and ]SIA DC-03[ and SIA DC-07].



B. Central Station, Workstations, and Controllers:1. Store in temperature- and humidity-controlled environment in original manufacturer's sealed

containers. Maintain ambient temperature between 50 and 85 deg F, and not more than 80 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.

2. Open each container; verify contents against packing list; and file copy of packing list, complete with container identification, for inclusion in operation and maintenance data.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

3. Mark packing list with the same designations assigned to materials and equipment for recording in the system labeling schedules that are generated by software specified in "Cable and Asset Management Software" Article.

4. Save original manufacturer's containers and packing materials and turnover to owner



B. Environmental Conditions: System shall be capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability:1. Control Station: Rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 60 to 85 deg F

and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent, noncondensing.2. Interior, Controlled Environment: System components, except central-station control unit,

installed in temperature-controlled interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 36 to 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. Use NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosures.

3. Interior, Uncontrolled Environment: System components installed in non- temperature-controlled interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 0 to 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. Use NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosures.

4. Exterior Environment: System components installed in locations exposed to weather shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of minus 30 to plus 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, condensing. Rate for continuous operation when exposed to rain as specified in NEMA 250, winds up to 85 mph. Use NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures.

5. Hazardous Environment: System components located in areas where fire or explosion hazards may exist because of flammable gases or vapors, flammable liquids, combustible dust, or ignitable fibers shall be rated, listed, and installed according to NFPA 70.

6. Corrosive Environment: System components subject to corrosive fumes, vapors, and wind-driven salt spray in coastal zones. Use NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide all required components, controllers, I/O devices, wiring, mounting hardware, accessories and identifier readers for a complete access control system for each building. The system shall connect and be an extension of the owner’s existing Apollo Security’s Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System (APACS).

B. Field controllers shall connect to a single master controller in each building. Each master controller shall interface with field controllers via RS-485 serial bus loop. Each master controller shall connect to the building LAN and interface with the head-end server via the owner’s IT WAN.

C. Provide all licensing required to install required readers and controllers into existing access control system. Connection to head-end system and servers shall be via owner’s WAN. No additional server or client licensing are required unless specifically noted within this specification.

D. Contractor shall work closely with the owner’s security and IT representative for coordination and integration with existing systems, network communication requests and final closeout of installation.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

2.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Security Access System: PC-based central station (existing), one or more networked PC-based workstations (existing), and field-installed controllers, connected by a high-speed electronic-data transmission network.

B. Network connecting the existing central station and workstations shall be a LAN for on-site communications as well as the owner’s WAN for communication to off-site monitoring and server database storage. Communication shall be TCP/IP based for both. Coordinate with owner network address settings prior to installation. See patching request protocol within this specification for additional requirements when connecting IP based controllers to the central station and server.

C. Network(s) connecting PCs and controllers shall consist of one or more of the following:1. Local area, IEEE 802.3 Fast Ethernet 100 BASE-TX, star topology network based on

TCP/IP.

2.3 OPERATION

A. System Network Requirements:1. System components shall be interconnected and shall provide automatic communication of

status changes, commands, field-initiated interrupts, and other communications required for proper system operation.

2. Communication shall not require operator initiation or response and shall return to normal after partial- or total-network interruption such as power loss or transient upset.

3. System shall automatically annunciate communication failures to the operator and shall identify the communications link that has experienced a partial or total failure.

4. Communications controller may be used as an interface between the central-station display systems and the field device network. Communications controller shall provide functions required to attain the specified network communications performance.

B. Field equipment shall include controllers, sensors, and controls.1. Controllers shall serve as an interface between the central station and sensors and controls.2. Data exchange between the central station and the controllers shall include down-line

transmission of commands, software, and databases to controllers.3. The up-line data exchange from the controller to the central station shall include status data

such as intrusion alarms, status reports, and entry-control records.4. Controllers are classified as alarm-annunciation or entry-control type.

C. System Response to Alarms:1. Field device network shall provide a system end-to-end response time of one second(s) or

less for every device connected to the system.2. Alarms shall be annunciated at the central station within one second of the alarm occurring

at a controller or at a device controlled by a local controller, and within 100 ms if the alarm occurs at the central station.

3. Alarm and status changes shall be displayed within 100 ms after receipt of data by the central station.

4. This response time shall be maintained during system heavy load.

D. False-Alarm Reduction: The design of the central station and controllers shall contain features to reduce false alarms. Equipment and software shall comply with SIA CP-01.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

E. Data Line Supervision: System shall initiate an alarm in response to opening, closing, shorting, or grounding of data transmission lines.

F. Door Hardware Interface:1. Comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware required to

be monitored or controlled by the security access system.2. Electrical characteristics of controllers shall match the signal and power requirements of door

hardware.

2.4 APPLICATION SOFTWARE

A. Controller Software:1. Controllers shall operate as autonomous, intelligent processing units.

a. Controllers shall make decisions about access control, alarm monitoring, linking functions, and door-locking schedules for their operation, independent of other system components.

b. Controllers shall be part of a fully distributed processing-control network.c. The portion of the database associated with a controller, and consisting of parameters,

constraints, and the latest value or status of points connected to that controller, shall be maintained in the controller.

2. The following functions shall be fully implemented and operational within each controller:a. Monitoring inputs.b. Controlling outputs.c. Automatically reporting alarms to the central station.d. Reporting of sensor and output status to the central station on request.e. Maintaining real time, automatically updated by the central station at least once a day.f. Communicating with the central station.g. Executing controller resident programs.h. Diagnosing.i. Downloading and uploading data to and from the central station.

3. Controller Operations at a Location:a. Up to 32 controllers connected to TIA 485-A communications loop. Globally operating

I/O linking and anti-passback functions between controllers within the same Location without central-station or workstation intervention. Linking and anti-passback shall remain fully functional within the same Location even when the central station or workstations are off-line.

b. In the event of communication failure between the central station and a Location, there shall be no degradation in operations at the controllers at that Location. Controllers at each Location shall be connected to a memory buffer with a capacity to store up to 10,000 events; there shall be no loss of transactions in system history files until the buffer overflows.

c. Buffered events shall be handled in a first-in-first-out mode of operation.4. Individual Controller Operation:

a. Controllers shall transmit alarms, status changes, and other data to the central station when communications circuits are operable. If communications are not available, controllers shall function in a stand-alone mode; operational data, including the status and alarm data normally transmitted to the central station, shall be stored for later transmission to the central station. Storage capacity for the latest 1024 events shall be provided at each controller.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

b. Card-reader ports of a controller shall be custom configurable for at least 120 different card-reader or keypad formats. Multiple reader or keypad formats may be used simultaneously at different controllers or within the same controller.

c. Controllers shall provide a response to card readers or keypad entries in less than 0.25 seconds, regardless of system size.

d. Controllers that are reset, or powered up from a nonpowered state, shall automatically request a parameter download and reboot to their proper working state. This shall happen without any operator intervention.

e. Initial Startup: When controllers are brought on-line, database parameters shall be automatically downloaded to them. After initial download is completed, only database changes shall be downloaded to each controller.

f. On failure for any reason, controllers shall perform an orderly shutdown and force controller outputs to a predetermined failure-mode state, consistent with the failure modes shown and the associated control device.

g. After power is restored, following a power failure, startup software shall initiate self-test diagnostic routines, after which controllers shall resume normal operation.

h. After controller failure, if the database and application software are no longer resident, controllers shall not restart but shall remain in the failure mode until repaired. If database and application programs are resident, controllers shall immediately resume operation. If not, software shall be restored automatically from the central station.

5. Communications Monitoring:a. System shall monitor and report status of TIA 485-A communications loop of each

Location.b. Communication status window shall display which controllers are currently

communicating, a total count of missed polls since midnight, and which controller last missed a poll.

c. Communication status window shall show the type of CPU, the type of I/O board, and the amount of RAM for each controller.

6. Operating systems shall include a real-time clock function that maintains seconds, minutes, hours, day, date, and month. The real-time clock shall be automatically synchronized with the central station at least once a day to plus or minus 10 seconds. The time synchronization shall be automatic, without operator action and without requiring system shutdown.

B. Controller-to-Controller Communications:1. TIA 485-A, four-wire, point-to-point, regenerative (repeater) communications network

methodology.2. TIA 485-A communications signal shall be regenerated at each controller.

C. Database Downloads:1. All data transmissions from PCs to a Location, and between controllers at a Location, shall

include a complete database checksum to check the integrity of the transmission. If the data checksum does not match, a full data download shall be automatically retransmitted.

2. If a controller is reset for any reason, it shall automatically request and receive a database download from the PC. The download shall restore data stored at the controller to their normal working state and shall take place with no operator intervention.

3. Software shall provide for setting downloads via dial-up connection to once per 24-hour period, with time selected by the operator.

4. Software shall provide for setting delays of database downloads for dial-up connections. Delays change the download from immediately to a delay ranging from one to 999 minutes.

D. Alarms:



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

1. System Setup:a. Assign manual and automatic responses to incoming-point status change or alarms.b. Automatically respond to input with a link to other inputs, outputs, or operator-response

plans; unique sound with use of WAV files; and maps or images that graphically represent the point location.

c. Setup shall assign messages to each access point, zone and sensor.d. Secondary messages shall be assignable by the operator for printing to provide further

information and shall be editable by the operator.

E. Alarm Monitoring: Monitor sensors, controllers, and DTS circuits and notify operators of an alarm condition. Display higher-priority alarms first and, within alarm priorities, display the oldest unacknowledged alarm first. Operator acknowledgment of one alarm shall not be considered acknowledgment of other alarms nor shall it inhibit reporting of subsequent alarms.1. Displayed alarm data shall include type of alarm, location of alarm, and secondary alarm

messages.2. Printed alarm data shall include type of alarm, location of alarm, date and time (to nearest

second) of occurrence, and operator responses.3. Maps shall automatically display the alarm condition for each input assigned to that map if

that option is selected for that input location.4. Alarms initiate a status of "pending" and require the following two handling steps by

operators:a. First Operator Step: "Acknowledged." This action shall silence sounds associated with

the alarm. The alarm remains in the system "Acknowledged" but "Un-Resolved."b. Second Operator Step: Operators enter the resolution or operator comment, giving the

disposition of the alarm event. The alarm shall then clear.5. Each workstation shall display the total pending alarms and total unresolved alarms.6. Each alarm point shall be programmable to disallow the resolution of alarms until the alarm

point has returned to its normal state.7. Alarms shall transmit to the central station in real time except for allowing connection time

for dial-up locations.8. The time and name of the operator who acknowledged and resolved the alarm shall be

recorded in the database.9. Identical alarms from the same alarm point shall be acknowledged at the same time the

operator acknowledges the first alarm. Identical alarms shall be resolved when the first alarm is resolved.

10. Alarm functions shall have priority over downloading, retrieving, and updating database from workstations and controllers.

11. When a reader-controlled output (relay) is opened, the corresponding alarm point shall be automatically bypassed.

2.5 SURGE AND TAMPER PROTECTION

A. Surge Protection: Protect components from voltage surges originating external to equipment housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads. Include surge protection for external wiring of each conductor-entry connection to components.1. Minimum Protection for Power Connections 120 V and More: Auxiliary panel suppressors

complying with requirements in Section 264313 "Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits."

2. Minimum Protection for Communication, Signal, Control, and Low-Voltage Power Connections: Comply with requirements in Section 264313 "Surge Protection for Low-



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

Voltage Electrical Power Circuits" as recommended by manufacturer for type of line being protected.

B. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on enclosures, control units, pull boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, and other system components shall initiate a tamper-alarm signal when unit is opened or partially disassembled. Control-station control-unit alarm display shall identify tamper alarms and indicate locations.

2.6 CONTROLLERS

A. MANUFACTURERS1. Manufacturers: All controllers shall be from the same manufacturer of the existing system.

Provide from the following:a. Apollo Security

B. Controllers: Intelligent peripheral control unit, complying with UL 294, that stores time, date, valid codes, access levels, and similar data downloaded from the central station or workstation for controlling its operation.

C. Subject to compliance with requirements in this article, manufacturers may use multipurpose controllers.

D. Battery Backup: Provide sealed, lead acid; sized to provide run time during a power outage of 5 minutes, until emergency backup failover power takes over, complying with UL 924.

E. Master Controller1. Subject to compliance with these specifications, the master controller shall be the following:

a. Apollo AAN-32NCC2. Requirements:

a. Communications1) Provide RS-485 communication port for downstream communications with

reader interface panels and input/output controllers.a) Basis of design: Apollo Security, ASM-48

2) Provide 8P8C network interface port for upstream communications with owner’s network, access control server, database and monitoring station.a) Basis of design: Apollo Security, ANI-100

3) Provide additional input/output modules, communication expansion modules, and/or accessories to fulfill the requirements of a complete system based on these drawings and specifications.

b. Power1) 12-28 vDC at 400mA power draw.2) Provide low-voltage power connection to power supply indicated in drawings. 3) Wiring from power supply to master controller shall not exceed 25’.4) Provide (qty. 3) AA Akaline batteries (type NEDA 15A) with master controller for

memory backup.c. Enclosure

1) Subject to compliance with these specifications, mount the master controller in the following enclosure:a) Mier – BW-102BP (20”W x 24”H x 5”D).b) Provide enclosure with 18” x 22”removable backplane.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

c) Maximum capacity 4 control panels per enclosure. Provide all mounting hardware per manufacturer instructions including spacers, standoffs etc.

d) If less than 4 panels are installed, prep back plane of enclosure for future installations and provide standoff brackets and spacers as required for unused capacity.

F. Door-Control Panel, Door Reader Interface Module

1. Provide network door controller(s) as shown on the project plans. The network door controller shall provide access control processing, and host functionality for either four (4) or two (2) reader devices. a. The four (4) reader Integrated Controller shall be an Apollo AAN-4SL Door Reader

Interface Module. b. The two (2) reader Integrated Controller shall be an Apollo AAN-2SL Door Reader

Interface Module. 2. The network door controller shall accept Wiegand output card readers and card formats up

to 128 bits in length.3. Panel Boards are NOT to be stacked, 3” x 3” working area to be maintained around panel

boards. 4. The network door controller shall provide a complete, fully featured access control hardware

and firmware infrastructure for host-based access control software applications.5. The network door controller shall communicate with hosted access control software using

RS-485 serial bus.6. The network door controller shall provide the following certifications:

a. UL 294 Listed Access Control System Unitsb. FCC Class A Verification

7. The network door controller shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for 18 months.

8. Door Control Panels / Door Reader Interface Modules controlling card readers physically attached to each buildings’ interior and exterior. a. Locate Door Control Panels / Door Reader Interface Modules controlling readers

located in or on exterior of buildings within Mier BW-102BP enclosures located in IDF/MDF/Comm. rooms on wall as indicated herein and/or on drawings.

b. Power supplies for Door Control Panel / Door Reader Interface Modules controlling readers located in or on exterior of buildings shall be Altronix AL1024ULACM, located adjacent Door Reader Interface Modules in IDF/MDF/Comm. rooms on wall as indicated herein and/or on drawings.

c. Battery Backup: Provide sealed, lead acid; sized to provide run time during a power outage of 5 minutes, until emergency backup failover power takes over, complying with UL 924.

9. Gate Enclosure Mounted Door Control Panels / Door Reader Interface Modules controlling gate readers. a. Locate gate enclosure mounted Door Control Panels / Door Reader Interface Modules

controlling readers located within gate enclosures as indicated on drawings within Apollo AUS-1204 enclosures.

b. Power supplies for Gate Enclosure Mounted Door Control Panels / Door Reader Interface Modules shall be Apollo AUS-1204 power supply / enclosure combination unit, located as indicated on drawings.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

c. Battery Backup: Provide sealed, lead acid; sized to provide run time during a power outage of 5 minutes, until emergency backup failover power takes over, complying with UL 924.

G. Analog Alarm Input Module1. Provide Input Modules as shown on the project plans. The Input Modules shall provide

interface of external monitoring devices. Input modules shall include sixteen (16) total inputs.

c. The Analog Alarm Input Modules shall be Apollo AIO-168. d. Locate as indicated on plans.

2.7 Door Hardware / Locking Device Power Supplies

A. Power Supplies for door hardware devices: exit devices, electric locksets and integrated locksets are to be Securitron ADQ series with option board 8F8R, specific amperage specified in section 087100 and on drawings. Door Hardware power supplies are not to be used for access control devices specified in this section unless otherwise noted.

2.8 Card Readers and Credential Cards

A. Contactless Wall Mounted Card Reader1. The wall and/or storefront card reader shall be HID R10, 900NTNNEK0001F.2. See Section 087100 for integrated card reader (IC4) locksets. 3. Where mounted on interior and / or exterior of building wall, provide double gang back box

with single gang plaster ring, centerline maximum height of forty-eight (48) inches above finished floor, except where mounted on aluminum storefront vertical members.

4. Where mounted on interior of building, coordinate height and electrical wall plate finish with adjacent switchplates. Height must meet ADA requirements.

5. Where mounted on interior and / or exterior of building aluminum storefront vertical members, mount flush to aluminum vertical members, centerline maximum height of forty eight (48) inches above finished floor. Provide flexible conduit concealed within aluminum storefront system as indicated in Section 270528.

6. Wall Mounted Card-Reader Power: Powered from its associated Door Control Panels / Door Reader Interface Module, including its standby power source.

7. Mounting: surface, semi-flush, pedestal, or weatherproof mounting. See drawings for additional requirements. Mounting types shall include any and all additional accessories to be suitable for installation in the following locations:a. Indoors, controlled environment.b. Indoors, uncontrolled environment.c. Outdoors, with pure silicon clear sealant to provide water tight seal between card

reader and mounting surface.

B. Credential Cards: Owner Provided

2.9 Biometric Identity-Verification Equipment

A. Fingerprint Biometric + Contactless Card Reader1. Contactless biometric plus smart card reader shall Reader shall be: L-1 4GFXLSO V-Flex

Lite Biometric (iClass / Smart) Biometric Fingerprint + Smart Card Reader. 2. Biotmetric card reader shall securely read access control data from iClass contactless



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

smart cards.3. Biometric Card Reader Power: power for biometric card readers shall be provided by

Altronix AL1024ULACM power supplies, shall NOT be powered from Door Control Panels / Door Reader Interface Module

4. Communications to access control system to be provided from device to security management system via RS-485 and TCP/IP interface.

5. Provide same manufacturer supplied outdoor enclosure and mounting accessories as required. (V-Flex 4G iClass / Smart WR).

6. Fingerprint Biometric + Contactless Card reader shall provide the ability to read fingerprint templates from Smart Card.

7. Provide enrollment reader as required by owner. Enrollment reader shall provide write ability of fingerprint template to iClass Smart card.

8. Fingerprint template information shall have the ability to be imported into the existing security management system.

2.10 DOOR AND GATE HARDWARE INTERFACE

A. Exit Device with Alarm: Operation of the exit device shall generate an alarm. Exit device and alarm contacts are specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

B. Exit Alarm: Operation of a monitored door shall generate an alarm. Exit devices and alarm contacts are specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

C. Electric Door Strikes: Use end-of-line resistors to provide power-line supervision. Signal switches shall transmit data to controller to indicate when the bolt is not engaged and the strike mechanism is unlocked, and they shall report a forced entry. Power and signal shall be from the controller. Electric strikes are specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

D. Electromagnetic Locks: End-of-line resistors shall provide power-line supervision. Lock status sensing signal shall positively indicate door is secure. Power and signal shall be from the controller. Electromagnetic locks are specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

E. Vehicle Gate Operator: Interface electrical operation of gate with controls in this Section. Vehicle gate operators shall be connected, monitored, and controlled by the security access controllers. Vehicle gate and accessories are specified in Section 323113 "Chain Link Fences and Gates" and 323111 “Gate Operators.”

2.11 CABLES

A. General Cable Requirements: Comply with requirements in Section 280513 “Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security Systems” and as recommended by system manufacturer for integration requirement.

B. LAN Cabling:1. Comply with requirements in Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety

and Security."2. NFPA 262.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

2.12 TRANSFORMERS

A. NFPA 70, Class II control transformers, NRTL listed. Transformers for security access-control system shall not be shared with any other system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways, cable trays, and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation.

B. Examine roughing-in for LAN and control cable conduit systems to PCs, controllers, card readers, and other cable-connected devices to verify actual locations of conduit and back boxes before device installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with recommendations in SIA CP-01.

B. Comply with TIA/EIA 606-A, "Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure."

C. Obtain detailed Project planning forms from manufacturer of access-control system; develop custom forms to suit Project. Fill in all data available from Project plans and specifications and publish as Project planning documents for review and approval.1. Record setup data for control station and workstations.2. For each Location, record setup of controller features and access requirements.3. Propose start and stop times for time zones and holidays, and match up access levels for

doors.4. Set up groups, facility codes, linking, and list inputs and outputs for each controller.5. Assign action message names and compose messages.6. Set up alarms. Establish interlocks between alarms, intruder detection, and video

surveillance features.7. Prepare and install alarm graphic maps.8. Develop user-defined fields.9. Develop screen layout formats.10. Propose setups for guard tours and key control.11. Discuss badge layout options; design badges.12. Complete system diagnostics and operation verification.13. Prepare a specific plan for system testing, startup, and demonstration.14. Develop acceptance test concept and, on approval, develop specifics of the test.15. Develop cable and asset-management system details; input data from construction

documents. Include system schematics and Visio Technical Drawings in electronic format.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

3.3 CABLING

A. Comply with NECA 1, "Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction."

B. Install cables and wiring according to requirements in Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security."

C. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces.

D. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Use NRTL-listed plenum cable in environmental airspaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

E. Boxes and enclosures containing security-system components or cabling, and which are easily accessible to employees or to the public, shall be provided with a lock. Boxes above ceiling level in occupied areas of the building shall not be considered accessible. Junction boxes and small device enclosures below ceiling level and easily accessible to employees or the public shall be covered with a suitable cover plate and secured with tamperproof screws.

F. Install end-of-line resistors at the field device location and not at the controller or panel location.

3.4 CABLE APPLICATION

A. Comply with TIA 569-B, "Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces."

B. Cable application requirements are minimum requirements and shall be exceeded if recommended or required by manufacturer of system hardware.

C. TIA 232-F Cabling: Install at a maximum distance of 50 ft..

D. TIA 485-A Cabling: Install at a maximum distance of 4000 ft..

E. Card Readers and Keypads:1. Install number of conductor pairs recommended by manufacturer for the functions specified.2. Unless manufacturer recommends larger conductors, install No. 22 AWG wire if maximum

distance from controller to the reader is 250 ft., and install No. 20 AWG wire if maximum distance is 500 ft..

3. For greater distances, install "extender" or "repeater" modules recommended by manufacturer of the controller.

4. Install minimum No. 18 AWG shielded cable to readers and keypads that draw 50 mA or more.

F. Install minimum No. 16 AWG cable from controller to electrically powered locks. Do not exceed 250 ft..

G. Install minimum No. 18 AWG ac power wire from transformer to controller, with a maximum distance of 25 ft..



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Comply with Section 270526 "Grounding and Bonding for Communication Systems."

B. Comply with IEEE 1100, "Recommended Practice for Power and Grounding Electronic Equipment."

C. Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

D. Bond shields and drain conductors to ground at only one point in each circuit.

E. Signal Ground:1. Terminal: Locate in each equipment room and wiring closet; isolate from power system and

equipment grounding.2. Bus: Mount on wall of main equipment room with standoff insulators.3. Backbone Cable: Extend from signal ground bus to signal ground terminal in each equipment

room and wiring closet.

3.6 INSTALLATION

A. Push Buttons: Where multiple push buttons are housed within a single switch enclosure, they shall be stacked vertically with each push-button switch labeled with 1/4-inch-high text and symbols as required. Push-button switches shall be connected to the controller associated with the portal to which they are applied, and shall operate the appropriate electric strike, electric bolt, or other facility release device.

B. Install card readers, keypads, push buttons, and biometric readers.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. In addition to requirements in this article, comply with applicable requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and with TIA/EIA 606-A.

B. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.1. All wiring conductors connected to terminal strips shall be individually numbered, and each

cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device shall be identified with the name and number of the particular device as shown.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at the device if the color of the wire is consistent with the associated wire connected and numbered within the panel or cabinet.

C. At completion, cable and controllers shall reflect as-built conditions.

3.8 SYSTEM SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE

A. Develop, install, and test software and hardware, and perform database tests for the complete and proper operation of systems involved. Assign software license to Owner.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL


A. Perform tests and inspections.1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections:1. Test each circuit and component of each system. Tests shall include, but are not limited to,

measurements of power-supply output under maximum load, signal loop resistance, and leakage to ground where applicable. System components with battery backup shall be operated on battery power for a period of not less than 10 percent of the calculated battery operating time. Provide special equipment and software if testing requires special or dedicated equipment.

2. Operational Test: After installation of cables and connectors, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. Test each signal path for end-to-end performance from each end of all pairs installed. Remove temporary connections when tests have been satisfactorily completed.

C. Devices and circuits will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise and assist with startup service.1. Complete installation and startup checks according to approved procedures that were

developed in "Preparation" Article and with manufacturer's written instructions.2. Enroll and prepare badges and access cards for Owner's operators, management, and

security personnel.

3.11 PROTECTION

A. Maintain strict security during the installation of equipment and software. Rooms housing the control station, and workstations that have been powered up shall be locked and secured with an activated burglar alarm and access-control system reporting to a central station complying with UL 1610, "Central-Station Burglar-Alarm Units," during periods when a qualified operator in the employ of Contractor is not present.


VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282300 - 1


ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

Section 282300 - Video Surveillance

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a video surveillance system consisting of cameras and data transmission wiring. Video surveillance system shall be integrated with owner’s existing monitoring and control system video management system CompleteView VMS by Salient Systems.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 270000 “Communications General Requirements” 2. Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cabling associated with

components within this section.3. Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and

data cabling associated with components within this section.4. Section 281300 “Access Control” for integrations with access control system.



B. AGC: Automatic gain control.

C. BNC: Bayonet Neill-Concelman - type of connector.

D. B/W: Black and white.

E. CCD: Charge-coupled device.

F. FTP: File transfer protocol.

G. IP: Internet protocol.

H. LAN: Local area network.

I. MP: Megapizel

J. MPEG: Moving picture experts group.

K. NTSC: National Television System Committee.

L. PC: Personal computer.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

M. PTZ: Pan-tilt-zoom.

N. RAID: Redundant array of independent disks.

O. SNR: Signal to Noise Ratio

P. TCP: Transmission control protocol - connects hosts on the Internet.

Q. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

R. VMS: Video Management System

S. WDR: Wide Dynamic Range



B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions and data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

C. Shop Drawings: For video surveillance. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Functional Block Diagram: Show single-line interconnections between components for signal transmission and control. Show cable types and sizes.

3. UPS: Sizing calculations.4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Equipment List: Include every piece of equipment by model number, manufacturer, serial number, location, and date of original installation. Add pretesting record of each piece of equipment, listing name of person testing, date of test, set points of adjustments, name and description of the view of preset positions, description of alarms, and description of unit output responses to an alarm.



B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.





ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cameras, power supplies, infrared illuminators, monitors, videotape recorders, digital video recorders, video switches, and control-station components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:1. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended to be stored at the site

for ready access.




C. Comply with NECA 1.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Electronic data exchange between video surveillance systems with an access-control system shall comply with SIA TVAC.



B. Environmental Conditions: Capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability:

a.2. Security Environment: Camera housing for use in high-risk areas where surveillance

equipment may be subject to physical violence.

1.9 WARRANTY


B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of cameras, equipment related to camera operation, and control-station equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Video-signal format shall comply with NTSC standard, composite interlaced or progressive scan video.

B. Surge Protection: Protect components from voltage surges originating external to equipment housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads. Include surge protection for external wiring of each conductor's entry connection to components.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

1. Minimum Protection for Power Connections 120 V and More: Auxiliary panel suppressors complying with requirements in Section 264313 "Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits."

2. Minimum Protection for Communication, Signal, Control, and Low-Voltage Power Connections: Comply with requirements in Section 264313 "Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits" as recommended by manufacturer for type of line being protected.

3. It is the responsibility of the contractor to provide all required surge protection components for all products specified in this section where communications cabling is routed to the exterior. Provide suppression device in-line with all UTP cabling nearest to pathway where cable enters building. Ground per 270526 “Grounding and Bonding for Communication Systems.”

C. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on enclosures, control units, pull boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, and other system components shall initiate a tamper-alarm signal when unit is opened or partially disassembled. Control-station, control-unit alarm display shall identify tamper alarms and indicate locations.

2.2 FIXED NETWORK CAMERAS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with these specifications, provide products by one of the following:1. Axis2. Panasonic3. Arecont Vision4. Engineer Approved Equivalent5. Basis of Design: Axis P3225-LVE Network Camera

Fixed Color Dome Camera: Assembled and tested as a manufactured unit, containing dome assembly, color camera and receiver/driver.1. Power and Communication

a. Camera shall be IP based. Coaxial connections are not allowed. b. All standard fixed cameras shall be powered via owner provided network switch

(PoE) with a maximum power draw of 12.95W per channel. 1) Comply with IEEE 802.3af-2003.

2. Videoa. Minimum output of 15FPS at 2 MP b. Sensor

1) Image Censor: CMOS2) Progressive Scan 1/2.8”3) Minimum sensor size in megapixel: 2MP4) Horizontal Resolution: 1080

c. Compression: Support H.264, MPEG-4 and Motion JPEG.d. Built-in digital motion detection

3. Opticsa. Lens

1) Varifocal, 3.0-10.5mm, F1.42) Minimum field of view

a) Horizontal: 92-34 degreesb) Vertical: 50-20 degrees

3) Zoom: capable of controlling via web interface (remote zoom).




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

4) Focus: capable of controlling via web interface using manual or automatic settings (remote focus).

b. WDR Required on all camerasc. Automatic or manual selectable modes for backlight compensation or normal

lighting (day/night auto sensing).d. Sensitivity: Camera shall provide usable images in low-light conditions, delivering

an image at a scene illumination of 0.05 lux at F1.4 in B/W mode without IR illumination and 0.25 lux at F1.4 in color mode without IR illumination.

4. Other Requirementsa. Camera angle adjustment (manual)

1) Pan: +/- 180 degrees2) Tilt: -5 to +75 degrees3) Rotate: +/- 95 degrees

b. Automatic onboard infrared illumination required on all cameras.1) 850nm LEDs2) Range of 75’3) Auto and manual adjustable intensity

c. White Balance: Auto-tracing white balance, with manually settable fixed balance option.

2.3 MULTI-CHANNEL/MULTI-LENS NETWORK CAMERAS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with these specifications, provide products by one of the following:1. Axis2. Panasonic3. Arecont Vision4. Engineer Approved Equivalent5. Basis of Design: Arecont Vision AV12276DN-28

B. Multi-Channel/Multi-lens Camera: Assembled and tested as a single manufactured unit, containing dome assembly, color camera and receiver/driver.1. Power and Communication

a. Camera shall be IP based. Coaxial connections will not be accepted. Each camera shall require a single (1) data connection to fulfill requirements outlined herein.

b. All multi-channel/multi-lens network cameras shall be powered via owner provided network switch (PoE) with a maximum power draw of 12.95W per channel. 1) Comply with IEEE 802.3af-2003.

2. Videoa. Minimum output of 15FPS at 2048 x 1536 resolution b. Sensor

1) Image Censor: CMOS2) Progressive Scan 1/3.2” 3) Minimum sensor size in megapixel: 3MP each4) Resolution: 2048 x 15365) Each sensor of the camera shall feature automatic exposure, automatic

multi-matrix white balance, shutter speed control to minimize motion blur, programmable resolution, brightness, saturation, gamma, sharpness and tint.

c. Compression: H.264 and MPEGd. Built-in digital motion detection




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

3. Opticsa. Lens

1) Quantity: 4 (integrated) with identical specifications per requirements below.2) Varifocal, 2.8mm, F1.63) Minimum field of view

a) Horizontal: 88 degrees4) Zoom: capable of controlling via web interface (remote digital zoom).5) Focus: capable of controlling via web interface using manual or automatic

settings (remote focus).b. Adjustable WDR required on all cameras, streams and feeds up to 100 dB and a

maximum SNR of 51 dB.c. Automatic or manual selectable modes for backlight compensation or normal

lighting (day/night auto sensing).d. Sensitivity: Camera shall provide usable images in low-light conditions, delivering

an image at a scene illumination of 0.05 lux at F1.4 in B/W mode without IR illumination and 0.25 lux at F2.0 in color mode without IR illumination.

4. Housing/Enclosurea. Exterior rated. Shall withstand water, dust, debris (IP66).b. Vandal resistant. c. Material: Die-cast aluminumd. Provide mounting accessories to achieve placement, weather proofing and height

as shown in security drawings.5. Other Requirements

a. Camera angle adjustment (manual; each lens)1) Pan: 360 degrees2) Tilt: 90 degrees3) Rotate: 360 degrees

b. White Balance: Auto-tracing white balance, with manually settable fixed balance option.

c. Camera shall have the ability to provide privacy masking regions with user customized, arbitrary geometric regions within the field of view.

d. The camera shall support 8, non-identical streams (2 per lens). Each stream shall have the ability to customize frame rate, bit rate, resolution, quality and compression format.

e. Capable of rotating image up to 180 degrees via standard web based user interface.

f. Camera shall support unicast and multicast communication protocols.

2.4 INFRARED ILLUMINATORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with these specifications, provide products by one of the following:1. Axis2. Raytec3. Engineer Approved Equivalent4. Basis of Design: RM150-AI-PANUT

B. Description: Lighting fixtures that emit light only in the infrared spectrum, suitable for use with cameras indicated, for nighttime surveillance, without emitting visible light.1. Field-Selectable Beam Patterns: Wide – single unit to provide 180 degree coverage area2. Lamp/Bulb: LED Technology. Dimmable/adjustable.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

3. Power Supply: Provided with unit. Requires 120v connection.

C. Area Coverage: Illumination to 328 feet in a wide beam pattern and 558 feet in narrow beam pattern.

D. Exterior housings shall be suitable for same environmental conditions as the associated camera (IP66 for exterior mounting locations).

E. Exterior installations shall have wired photocell with minimum 8’ cable. Mount photocell on exterior and position away from direct light sources including IR illuminator and any additional site lighting.

F. Provide mounting bracket(s) as required for installation to provide maximum coverage for desired angle of view as indicated in security drawings.

2.5 CAMERA-SUPPORTING EQUIPMENT

A. Provide supporting equipment, accessories and mounting brackets by same manufacturer as mounted component.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with these specifications, provide products by one of the following:1. Axis2. Panasonic3. Arecont Vision4. Raytec5. Engineer Approved Equivalent

C. Minimum Load Rating: Rated for load in excess of the total weight supported times a minimum safety factor of two.

D. Mounting Brackets for Fixed Cameras: Type matched to items supported and mounting conditions. Include manual pan-and-tilt adjustment.1. Provide drop ceiling kits for locations where camera is to be installed on acoustical tile

ceiling.

E. Protective Housings for Fixed and Movable Cameras: Steel enclosures with internal camera mounting and connecting provisions that are matched to camera/lens combination and mounting and installing arrangement of camera to be housed.1. Tamper switch on access cover sounds an alarm signal when unit is opened or partially

disassembled. Central-control unit shall identify tamper alarms and indicate location in alarm display. Tamper switches and central-control unit are specified in Section 281600 "Intrusion Detection."

2. Camera Viewing Window: Polycarbonate or Lexan window, aligned with camera lens.3. Alignment Provisions: Camera mounting shall provide for field aiming of camera and

permit removal and reinstallation of camera lens without disturbing camera alignment.4. Sun shield shall not interfere with normal airflow around the housing.5. Mounting bracket and hardware for wall or ceiling mounting of the housing. Bracket shall

be of same material as the housing; mounting hardware shall be stainless steel.6. Finish: Housing and mounting bracket shall be factory finished using manufacturer's

standard finishing process suitable for the environment.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

2.6 NETWORK VIDEO RECORDERS

A. Owner provided.

2.7 VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. All cameras shall be compatible with the owner’s existing VMS: CompleteView by Salient Systems.

B. Provide 1 each camera license for every camera supplied. Camera licenses should not be tied to a specific camera. Turnover licensing information and documentation to owner prior to closeout.

2.8 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS

A. All communications shall be IP over Category 6 cable.

B. Provide CAT6 patch cables (length and quantity as required) for connection of camera to data jack located near camera per technology and security drawings.

C. See section 280513 “Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security” and 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for additional requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerance, hazards to camera installation, and other conditions affecting installation.

B. Examine roughing-in for LAN, WAN, and IP network before device installation.


3.2 WIRING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways unless otherwise indicated.1. Except raceways are not required in accessible indoor ceiling spaces and attics.2. Except raceways are not required in hollow gypsum board partitions.3. Conceal raceways and wiring except in unfinished spaces.

C. For LAN connection and fiber-optic and copper communication wiring, comply with Section 271300 "Communications Backbone Cabling" and Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."1. Structured cabling contractor to provide data outlet at camera per technology drawings. 2. Security integrator to provide camera, mounting components, patch cable and any

additional components required to complete the installation and connect to IT network.



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

3. Owner to provide PoE network switch in closet for security integrator’s use. Present owner with the following patching request information AFTER camera has been installed and patch cable connected from camera to field data outlet.a. Camera Type (manufacturer make and model, fixed/PTZ/multi-stream etc.)b. Camera IDc. Data Outlet IDd. Telecommunication Closet data cable is terminatede. Rack and Patch panel ID where data cable is terminatedf. IP address of camera (including subnet and default gateway)g. MAC address of camerah. Installation locationi. PoE requirements including required power (in watts)

D. Grounding: Provide independent-signal circuit grounding recommended in writing by manufacturer.

E. Physical Support: Provide support from camera (and housing) to building infrastructure per manufacturer’s recommendations where cameras are shown to be installed in acoustical tile ceiling, gypsum wall board ceiling or any other material where camera weight load compromises integrity of ceiling or wall system.

3.3 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install cameras and infrared illuminators level and plumb.

B. Install cameras with 84-inch-minimum clear space below cameras and their mountings. Change type of mounting to achieve required clearance.

C. Set pan unit and pan-and-tilt unit stops to suit final camera position and to obtain the field of view required for camera and per drawings. Connect all controls and alarms, and adjust.

D. Focus and set field for each camera relative to the desired field of view shown in the security drawings and per testing requirements below. Verify with owner final view prior to closeout.

E. Provide 16 hours labor from qualified system programmer for camera setup (programmer shall be certified by VMS manufacturer and certification information provided with bid). This includes but not limited to installing camera license in owner’s VMS, basic camera feed setup (i.e. frame rate, compression, network settings and resolution), camera alarm notification setup, motion detection programming and adjusting/programming of video storage settings. Request standard setup information from owner’s security representative prior to placing order for cameras. Request standard settings to be set as default by manufacturer prior to shipping. Any programming requirements outlined by the owner that the manufacturer is unable to set prior to shipment shall be the responsibility of the contractor. If it is estimated that the allotment of hours in this requirement does not cover the requested owner settings, notify general contractor and engineer prior to beginning programming work.

F. Install power supplies and other auxiliary supporting components on interior spaces unless otherwise indicated.

G. Mount IR illuminators within 12” below associated camera and aim to illuminate field of view indicated in drawings. For exterior installations, final directional placement shall be performed at



ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

night under typical night light condition and site lighting has been completed, powered and adjusted.

H. Install tamper switches on components indicated to receive tamper switches, arranged to detect unauthorized entry into system-component enclosures and mounted in self-protected, inconspicuous positions.

I. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:1. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled,

and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.2. Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to

verify that they comply with specified requirements. Conduct tests at varying lighting levels, including day and night scenes as applicable. Prepare video-surveillance equipment for acceptance and operational testing as follows:a. Prepare equipment list described in "Informational Submittals" Article.b. Verify operation of auto-iris lenses.c. Set back-focus of fixed focal length lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate

nighttime lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear image. Adjust until image is in focus with and without the filter.

d. Set back-focus of zoom lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear image. Additionally, set zoom to full wide angle and aim camera at an object 50 to 75 feet away. Adjust until image is in focus from full wide angle to full telephoto, with the filter in place.

e. Set and name all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel.f. Set sensitivity of motion detection.g. Connect and verify responses to alarms.h. Verify operation of control-station equipment.

3. Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed and system has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice of test schedule.

4. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper operation in all functional modes.

D. Video surveillance system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.




ST. AUGUSTINE, FL

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Tasks shall include, but are not limited to, the following:1. Check cable connections.2. Check proper operation of cameras and lenses. Verify operation of auto-iris lenses and

adjust back-focus as needed.3. Adjust all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel.4. Recommend changes to cameras, lenses, and associated equipment to improve Owner's

use of video surveillance system.5. Provide a written report of adjustments and recommendations.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.

B. Clean video-surveillance-system components, including camera-housing windows, lenses, and monitor screens.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain video-surveillance equipment.
